Gek 90842cSeriesOneProgrammableControllersUser'sManual

Series One
Programmable
Controllers
Series One/One Plus
Users Manual
GE Fanuc Automation
hgust
1988
GEK-90842C
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES AS USED IN THIS PUBLICATION
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, -ts,
mmtures,
or other conditions that could cause personal injuryexist in this equipment or may be asso&ted with its
use.
In situations where inattention could cause eitkr personal injury or damage to equipment, a Waning
noticeis used.
El
CAUTION
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.
NOTE
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and operating the
equipment.
This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts have been made to be accurate,
the information contained he1611does not purport to cover all details or variations in hardware ad software, nor to provide
for every possible contingency in connection with installation, operation, and maintenance. Features may be described herein
which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes no obligation of notice to
holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.
GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory with respect to, and assumes no
responsibility for the accuraq, completeness, suBiciency, or usefulness of the information contained herein. No wananties
of merchantability of fitness for purpose shall apply.
Wopyright 1987GE Fanuc Auto&n
North Amerka,
Inc.
Preface
e*
Rll
GE&90842
The purpose of this manual is to provide information for the user to install, program and implement the
family of Series One TMfamily of Programmable Controllers (PCs) into a control system. The Series
One family of PCs includes the Series One, Series One Model E, Series One Plus and Series One Plus
3.7K PCs, which are described in this manual. The Series One Junior PC is described in a separate
Users Manual, GEK-90503.
The Series One PC provides the user with the capability of developing and programming a control
system using the familiar ladder diagram logic approach. The Series One Plus includes the same ladder
diagram function plus a group of data operation functions, which includes data moves, math functions,
conversion, and fault diagnosis.
Chapter 1, Introduction, is an introduction
to the Series One and Series One Plus PCs, with emphasis
on features and capabilities. A summary of terms common to PCs is provided at the end of this chapter
as an aid to first-time PC users.
Chapter 2, Physical Equipment Configuration, provides a detailed description of the hardware

components of the PC. This chapter provides an understanding of the components of a Series One or
Series One Plus PC system and how they are related to the overall system
Chapter 3, Installation, provides the specifications
Programmable
and instructions
required for installation
of your
Control system.
Chapter 4, J?C Operation, describes the operation of the Series One and Series One Plus PCs,
including features and functions of the programmer used for entering new programs, editing existing
programs, monitoring the status of inputs or outputs, displaying timer or counter accumulated values,
and displaying register contents. The last part of this chapter describes operation of peripheral devices
Peripherals include an audio cassette tape
which may be used with both Programmable Controllers.
recorder for recording your program after it has been entered in order to have a permanent record of that
program, a PROM Writer Unit, which allows a non-volatile means of program storage within the PC,
and a Printer Interface Unit to allow documenting of your programs.
Chapter 5, Programming, provides the basic information required in order to develop, enter, and
implement your programs. A description of each function is provided, including examples of using each
Progr amming, Basic Instructions,
function.
Three sections are included:
and Data Operation
Instructions.
Chapter 6, I/O Specifications and Wiring, is a guide to the specifications
modules
and their physical
connections
of the input and output (I/O)
to field devices.
Chapter 7, Maintenance, is a guide to basic maintenance
of your system, should it be needed.

Reliability of the Series One family of PCs is excellent and other than changing the Lithium back-up
battery, when required, there should be little maintenance required of your PC. This chapter includes
troubleshooting procedures and information on replacing components.
Chapter 8, Applications, provides several typical Applications

and Series One Plus PCs.
mable controller.
This chapter should be especially
using the capabilities of the Series One

helpful to first-time users of a program-
Appendices A through D contain a summary of Related Documentation,
a Glossary of Programmable
Controller Terms, a guide to the compatibility of the Series One family of Programmable Controllers,
and a Description of other GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc. Programmable Controllers. A
comprehensive index is included as an aid to the location in the manual of particular items of interest.
iv
Preface
GEK-90842
All references to Series One in this manual for hardware and programming apply to both the Series One
and Series One Model E PCs, except where specifically noted in the text. Similarly, all references to
Series One Plus apply to both the Series One Plus and Series One Plus 3.7K PCS.
Should further infomation
be required, contact your salesperson
America, Inc., P. 0. Box 8106, Charlottesville, Virginia 22906.
or GE Fanuc Automation
First Edition - May 1986

Second Edition - March 1987
Third Edition -September 1987
Henry A. Konat
Senior Technical
Writer
North
Preface
GEK-90842
NOTE
The Series One/Series One Plus and associated modules have been tested and found
to meet or exceed the requirements of FCC Rule, Part 15, Subpart J. The following
note is required to be published by the FCC.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not
installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause interfe=nce
to radio communications.
It has been tested and found to comply with the limits of
a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which
are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area
is likely to cause interference, in which caSe the user at his own expense will be
required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference.
Content
vii
GE&90842
CHAPTER
CHAPTER
CHAPTER
CHAPTER
1.
2.
3.
4.
SERIES
ONE/SERIES
ONE PLUS PC INTRODUCTION
History of Programmable Controllers
Advantages Over Other Control Devices
Series One Programmable Controllers
Series One Model E Programmable Controller
Series One Plus 3.7K
Programmable Controller Concepts
Programming the Series One and Series One Plus
PCS
Function of the Central Processing Unit
Memory Word Length
Types of Memory for Program Storage
Function of the Input/Output Circuitry
Communicating
With Other Devices
Remote I/O for Series One and Series One Plus
PC Terminology
PHYSICAL
EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION
Rack Description
Module Location in Rack
Heat Dissipation
Adding Racks
Programmer Tape Port
Programmer Mount Assembly
Hardware Requirements
System Estimating
Peripheral Devices Supporting Series One Family of
PCS
Data Communications
Unit
Printer Interface Unit
PROM Writer Unit
l-1
1-1
1-1
l-3
1-3
l-5
1-5
1-6
1-6
1-7
1-7
l-8
l-8
l-8
2-1
2-1
2-2
2-2
2-4
2-4
2-7
2-7
29
2-10
2-11
2112
INSTALLATION
Specifications for Installation
Installation
Power Supply Limitations for Racks
units of Load
Safety Considerations
Recommended
Field Wiring Procedures
3-l
32
3-13
3-13
3-15
3:15
PC OPERATION
Introduction to PC Operation
Programmer
Programmer Features
Mode Switch
Atikhwss
Data Display
Status Display
Logic Display
Logic Keys
Editing Keys
4-l
4-l
4-2
4-2
4-2
4-2
4-2
4-3
4-4
Content
GEK-90842
Shifted Functions
Data Operation Keys
Peripheral Jack
Program Checking and Error Codes
Operation Sequences
Monitor CPU Logic
Search CPU Logic
Alter One Logic Element
Delete One Logic Element
Clear All Memory
Insert One Logic Element
Monitor I/O Status
Monitor Timer or Counter Status
Display a Specific Address
Monitor Data Register Contents
Change Contents of a Data Register
Enter or Change a Password
Access to Programmer Functions with Password in
Effect
Forcing References
Operation With Peripheral Devices
Tape Recorder Operation
Recording A Program
.
Verifying A Program
Loading A Program
Hardware Description
Hardware Features
80/l 32 Column Selection Switch
External Power Supply Connector
Power Supply Select Switch
Sequence of Operation
Power-up Sequence
User Program Transfer From PC To Printer Interface
unit
Selection of Printout Format and Type of PC
Start Printer Operation
Printing Of Error Messages During Ladder Diagram
Listing
Printing Of Error Messages During Boolean Listing
Cross Reference Printout
Expanded Print Format
Printout Annotation Explanation
Sample Printout
PROM Writer Unit

Front Panel Features
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-7
48
4-10
4-11
4-11
4-12
4-12
4-12
4-12
4-13
4-13
4-14
4-14
4114
4-14
4-15
4-15
4-15
4-16
4-16
4-18
4-18
4-19
4-20
4-21
4-21
4-21
4-22
4-22
4-22
4-22
4-22
4-23
4-23
4-23
4-24
4-24
4-25
4-29
4-30
4-3 1
4-31
4-31
ix
Content
GEK-90842
Timer/Counter Setpoint Unit

Timer/Counter Setpoint Unit Specifications
Remote Mounting of Timer/Counter Setpoint Unit
References for the Timer/Counter Setpoint Unit
Example of Using Thumbwheel Inputs
CHAPTER 5.
Section 1.
Section
2.
PROGRAMMING
Introduction to Programming
General Information
Planning a PC System
How to Use This Chapter
Programming Fundamentals
Significance of References
Significance of Input/Output References
Internal Coils
Use of the Special Function Coils
Shift Register References
Timer and Counter References
Data Registers
Flexibility in Using References
Operating Principles
scanning
Programmer Functions
Basic Ladder Diagram Format
Concept of Power Flow
Unlimited References
Basic Instructions
Basic Instructions
How to Begin Programming
Entering a Rung With Series Contacts
Entering the Clear all Memory Sequence
Entering a Rung with Parallel Contacts
Entering a Simple Timer Rung
Basic Relay Logic (Motor Starter)
Motor Starter Logic Description
Normally Closed Input
Push-Down Stack
Detailed Example of AND SIR, OR STR
Description of Operation
Use of Retentive Coils as Latches
Programming a Latched Relay
Master Control Relay Functional Description
Programming a Master Control Relay Function
Multiple Master Control Relay Functions
Disabling of Outputs
Timer and Counter Functional Description
Special Timer/Counter References
Programming Timers
Specifying Timer Preset Values
Programming Counters
4-32
4-33
4-33
4-33
4-34
5-1
5-l
5-l
5-1
5-7
5-7
58
5-13
5-13
5113
5-13
5-13
5-14
5-14
5-14
5-15
5-17
5-17
5-18
5-19
5-19
5-19
5-19
5-19
5-20
S-20
5-20
S-21
5-22
5-23
5-24
5-24
5-26
5-26
5-27
5-28
5-28
5-29
S-30
5-30
5-30
5-31
5-32
Content
GEK-90842
Section
3.
Extending the Timer and Counter Range

Sequencer Operation
Referencing Sequencer Contacts with a Series One
Plus PC
Shift Register Functional Description
Shift Register Operation
Forcing I/O References
Data Operation Instructions for the Series One Plus Programmable
Controller
Data Operations
Using References for Data Operations
Entering a Constant Value
Entering a Group Reference
Data Register References
Timer/Counter References
Example of Specifying a Group Reference
Programming the Data Operation Instructions
Special Function Coils for Data Operations
D*STR (FSO)
D.STRl (F51)
D.STR-2 (F52)
D*STR3 (F53)
D*STRS (FSS)
DeOUT (F60)
D.OUTl (F61)
D*OUT2 (F62)
D*OUT3 (F63)
D*OUTS (F65)
CMPR (F70)
Addition (+), BCD 4 Digit (F71)
Subtraction (-), BCD 4 Digit (F72)
Multiplication (X), BCD 4 Digit (F73)
Division (:), BCD 4 Digit (F74)
DoAND (DATA AND) (F75)
D.OR (DATA OR) (F76)
Shift Right (FSO)
shift Left (F81)
Decode (F82)
Encode (F83)
INV (F84)
BIN (BCD to Binary) (F85)

BCD (Binary to BCD) (F86)
External Fault Diagnosis (F20)
CHAPTER 6.
I/O SPECIFICATIONS AND WIRING

I/O system IntKKhlctio~
Field Wiring to I/O Modules
16 Circuit J/O Modules with Connectors
I/O References for 16 Circuit Modules
5-34
5-36
5-37
5-38
5-39
5-40
5-42
5-43
5-43
5-44
5-44
5-44
5-44
5-45
5-45
5-45
5-46
5-47
5-48
5-48
5-49
5-49
5-50
5-50
5-51
5-51
5-52
5-52
5-53
5-56
5-58
5-59
5-61
5-63
5-65
S-65
5-67
5-68
5-68
5-69
5-70
5-71
6-1
6-2
6-4
6-4
xi
Content
GEK-90842
I/O Interface Cable Cross Reference
List
I/O Module Catalog Numbers
I/O Module Specifications and Wiring
115 V ac Input IC61OMDL125
230 V ac Input IC61OMDL127
115 V ac Isolated Input IC61OMDL126
24 V dc Sink Input (8 Circuits) IC61OMDLlOl
24 V dc Sink Input (16 Circuits) IC61OMDL106
24 V dc Sink Load Input (16 Circuits) with
Removable Terminal Board IC61OMDL107
24 V ac/dc Source Input IC61OMDLlll
24 V ac/dc Source Input (16 Circuits) with
115/230 V ac Output IC61OMDL175
115/230 V ac Isolated Output IC61OMDL176
24 V dc Sink Output (8 Circuits) IC61OMDL151
24 V dc Sink Output (16 Circuits) IC6lOMDL156
24 V dc Sink Output (16 Circuits) with Removable
Terminal Board IC6lOMDL157
24 V dc 2 Amp Sink Output IC61OMDL153
24 V dc 2 Amp Sir&/Source Output IC61OMDL154
24 V dc Source Output IC61OMDL155
24 V dc Source Output (16 Circuits) with
_
Relay Output (8 Circuits) IC61 OMDL180
Relay Output (16 Circuits) with Removable
Terminal Board IC61OMDL182
24 V dc Input/Output (4 In/4 Out) IC61OMDL103
24 V dc Input/Relay Output (4 In/4 Out)
IC61OMDL104
Thumbwheel InterfaceIC61OMDL105
High Speed CounterIC6lOMDLllO
Module Location
Interface to Field Devices
Up/Down Counter Inputs
Encoder Interface 1
Binary Coded Decimal (BCD) Output
Counter Output
Interface to User Logic
Interface Function Definition
Ouptut Logic
Manual Mode
Counter Mode
Fitter Selection
Fast Response I/OIC61OMDLll!5
Mode Selection
Output Logic - Manual Mode
Output Logic - Fast Response Mode
I/O SimulatorIC61OMDL124
Analog InputIC61OMDL116
6-5
6-6
6-7
6-7
6-8
69
6-10
6111
6-12
6-13
6-14
6-16
6-17
6-18
6-19
6-20
6-22
6-23
6-24
6-26
6-27
6-29
6-31
6-33
6-36
6-39
6-41
6-42
6-43
6-44
6-46
6-48
6-49
6-50
6-53
6-53
6-53
6-55
6-56
6-58
6-58
6-58
6-61
6-62
Content
xii
GEK-90842
Introduction
Hardware Features
Power Requirements
General and Electrical Specifications
I/O Reference Definitions
Sample Ladder Logic
Analog Input Module Features
Selection Of Operating Mode
Analog OutputIC61OMDL166
Introduction
Hardware Features
Power Requirements
Sample Ladder Logic
Analog Output Module Features
UL Listed Products
5-Slot Rack, UL ListedIC61OCHS 111
115 V ac Input Module, UL ListedIC61OMDL135
Relay Output Module, UL ListedIC61OMDL181
115 V ac Output Module, UL ListedIC61OMDL185
115 V ac Input Module (16 Circuits) with
,~
115/230 V ac Output Module (8 Circuits) with
CHAPTER
7.
8.
6-76
6-77
MAINTENANCE
Introduction to Maintenance Procedures
Troubleshooting
Aids
Basic Troubleshooting
Procedure
General Troubleshooting
Procedure
Replacement of Components
Replacing a Rack
Replacing a CPU Module
Replacing I/O Modules
Replacing the Battery
Adding Memory
Spare Parts and Components
Fuse List
CHAPTER
6-62
6-62
6-62
6-62
6-63
6-64
6-66
6-66
6-67
6-67
6-67
6-67
6-67
6-68
6-69
6-70
6-71
6-72
6-73
6-74
6-75
7-1
7-1
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-4
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-7
APPLICATIONS
Application
1 - One-Shots
Application 2 - Flip Flop
Application 3 - Event/I%ne Drum
Application 4 - Cascaded Counters
Application 5 - Coil 374, Power-Up One-Shot
Application 6 - Coil 375, lOHz Clock
Example 1: - Cumulative Timer
Example 2: - Time of Day Clock
Application 7 - Start/Stop Circuit
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-5
8-7
8-7
8-8
8-8
88
8111
Content
GEK-90842
Application 8 - High Speed Counter Applications

Programmable Cam Switch
Cut to Length
Measuring a Random Length
Sample Calculation
Application 9 - Typical Shift Registers
APPENDIX A.
Related Documentation
Introduction
GEK-90477 Series One/Three Data Communications
Manual
GEK-90507 Remote I/O Users Manual
GEK-90825 Series Six PC I/O Link Local Module
Users Manual
GEK90846Portable Programmer Users Manual
GEK-96662 Logicmaster 1 Programmer Documentor
Manual
GFK-0075 Logicmaster 1 Family Programming and
Documentation Software Users Manual
APPENDIX B.
APPENDIX C.
APPENDIX D.
Glossary of Terms
Series One Family of Programmable Controllers Compatibility
Guide
0 t her Programmable Controllers
Series OneTMJunior Programmable Controller
Series ThreeTMProgrammable Controller
Available I/O Types
Series SixTMProgrammable Controller
Programming
Optional Items
Series SixTMPlus Programmable Controller
8-12
8-13
8-16
8-18
8-18
8-21
8-21
A-l
A-l
A-l
A-l
A-2
A-2
A-3
A-4
B-l
Cl
D-l
D-l
D-2
D-2
D-3
D-3
D-4
D-4
Figures
xiv
GEK-90842
Figure
1-l
l-2
2-l
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
29
2110
3-l
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
39
3-10
3-11
3-12
3-13
3114
4-l
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
49
4-10
4111
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
59
5110
Series One/Series One Plus Programmable Controllers

Basic PC Block Diagram
Typical Rack
Typical Hardware
Typical (5 Slot) Rack
Typical (10 Slot) Rack
Expander Cable Installation
Example of Relay Control
Data Communications Unit
Prom Writer Unit
Rack Mounting Dimensions for Proper Heat Dissipation
Recommended Rack Grounding
10 Slot Rack, 19 Inch Mounting Dimensions
I/O Expansion Cable Connection
I/O Addressing Switches in Series One Plus 10 Slot Racks
Examples of Rack Configuration Switch Setting Series One
Plus
Typical Installation Dimensions
CPU Module
Proper Module Insertion
_
Proper Module Removal
Typical Routing of I/O Wiring
Pull Tab on Programmer Cable
Installation of Programmer Cable
Programmer Features
Series Logic (AND)
Parallel Logic (OR)
Volume Control Range Setting
Sample Ladder Diagram Printout
Sample Boolean Printout
Sample Outputs Used Table Printout
Sample Outputs Used Table Printout (continued)
PROM Writer Unit Features
I/O References Per Physical Placement for 5 and lo-Slot
Racks
CPU Scanning Sequence
Programmer for Series One and Series One Plus
Typical Ladder Diagram
Sample Relay Logic (Motor Starter)
Example of Normally Closed Inputs
AND STR and OR STR COMCCtiOIlS
Push-Down Stack Storage Locations

Push-Down Stack Logical Opcmtions
AND SIR/OR STR Example Number 1
l-2
l-5
2-l
2-2
2-3
2-3
2-4
2-5
29
2-10
2-11
2112
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9
39
3-11
3-12
3-12
3113
4-l
4-3
43
4-17
4-20
4125
4-26
4-27
4-28
4-29
4-32
59
5-15
5-16
5-17
5-21
5-22
5-23
5-24
5-24
5125
Figures
XV
GEK-90842
5-11
5-12
5-13
5-14
5-15
5-16
5-17
5-18
5-19
5-20
5-21
5-22
5-23
5-24
5-25
5-26
5-27
6-l
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
6-8
69
6-10
6-11
6-12
6-13
6-14
6-15
6.16
6-17
6.18
6-19
6-20
6-21
6.22
6-23
6-24
6-25
6-26
6-27
6-28
6-29
Q30
6-31
6-32
AND SIR/OR STR Example Number 2

Example of Latching Logic
Example of Master Control Relay Logic
Multiple Master Control Relay Logic
Sample Coil Disabler Logic
Sample of Timer Logic
Example of Timer Logic
Example of Counter Logic
Example of Counters
Example of Extended Counters
Illustration of Sequencer Operation
Example of Sequencer
Typical Sequencer Logic
Typical Shift Register
Example of Shift Register
Example of Shift Register Logic
Data Operation Block Diagram
A. Typical I/O Module
B. High Density Module With
Removable Connector
Typical I/O Terminal Configuration
I/O Interface Cable Wiring List
Example of 16 Circuit I/O References
Wiring for 115 V ac Inputs
Wiring for 230 V ac Inputs
Wiring for 115 V ac Isolated Inputs
Wiring for 24 V ac Sink Inputs
I/O Points VS Temperature
Wiring for 16 CIRCUIT, 25 V dc Sink Input Module
J/O Points VS Temperature
Wiring for 16 Circuit, 24 V dc Sink Load Inputs
Wiring for 24 V ac/dc Inputs
If0 Points vs Temperature Chart
Wiring for 16 Circuit 24 V ac/dc Source Load Inputs
I/O Points vs Temperature
Wiring for 115/230 V ac Outputs
I/O Points vs Temperature Chart
Wiring for 15 V ac Isolated Outputs
YO Points vs Temperature Chart
Wiring for 24 V dc Sink Outputs
x/O Points vs Temperature
Wiring for 16 Circuit 24 V dc Sink Outputs
Wiring for 16 Circuit 24 V dc Sink Outputs
Wiring for 24 V dc 2 Amp Sink Outputs
UO Points vs Temperature
Wiring of 24 V dc 2 Amp Sink/Source Output
Wiring for 24 V dc Source Outputs
I/O Points vs Temwrature
5-26
5-27
5-28
5-29
5-30
5-31
5-32
5-33
5-34
5-35
5-36
5-37
5-38
5-39
5-40
5-41
5-43
6-3
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-7
6-8
69
6-10
6-11
6-11
6-12
6-12
6-13
6-14
6-15
6.16
6.16
6-17
6-17
6.18
818
6-19
6-19
6-20
6-21
6-22
6-22
6-23
6-23
6-24
6-25
6126
Figures
xvi
GEIWO842
6-33
6-34
6-35
6-36
6-37
6-38
6-39
6-40
641
6-42
6-43
6-44
645
6-46
6-47
6-48
6-49
6-50
6-51
6-52
6-53
6-54
6-55
6-56
6-57
6-58
6-59
6-60
6-61
6-62
6-63
6-64
6-65
6-67
7-l
7-2
7-3
7-4
8-l
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
Wiring for 24 V dc Source Outputs

Wiring for 8 Circuit Relay Outputs
Wiring for 16 Circuit Relay Outputs
Wiring for 24 V dc Inputs/Outputs
Typical Wiring Diagram
Sample 24 V dc INPUT/RELAY OUTPUT Circuits
Wiring for Thumbwheel Interface
Thumbwheel Interface Cable Wire List
High Speed Counter Overview
HSC Location in 5-Slot Rack
HSC Connector Pin Definition
Signal Direction
UP/DOWN/RESET
Input Circuit
Encoder with RESET/MARKER
Option Resetting Counter
Once per Revolution of Encoder Shaft
Encoder with RESET Option in Series with Home Limit
Switch Such That Counter is Reset When Both Home
Limit Switch and RESET/MARKER
Pulse are Enabled
Encoder With Limit Switch Resetting Counter and
Photoelectric Cell Inhibiting the Counter Operation
Sample BCD Output Circuit
BCD Output Wiring Diagram
User Load Wiring Diagram
I/O and Counter Function Reference Chart
Filter Selection with Dip Switch
Module Reference NUMBER/LOGIC
Symbol Definition
Fast Response Module Logic Diagram
Wiring for Fast Response I/O Module
I/O Simulator Module Faceplate
Analog Input Module Faceplate
Analog Output Module Faceplate
UL Listed 5-Slot Rack
Wiring for UL Listed 115 V ac Input Module
Wiring for UL Listed Relay Output Module
Wiring for UL Listed 115V ac Output Module
Wiring for 115 V ac Inputs with Removable Terminal
Board
J/O Points vs Temperature Chart
Wiring for 115/230 V ac Output with Removable Terminal
Board
Troubleshooting
Indicators
Battery Location and Connection
Location of Extra Memory Socket
Acccssury Kit for Series One/One Plus
Typical One-Shot Timing
Typical One-Shot Logic
Typical Flip-Flop Timing Diagram
Typical Flip-Flop Logic
.
Evenflime Drum Logic
6-26
6-28
6-30
6-32
6-34
6-35
6-37
6-38
6-40
6-41
642
6-43
6-43
6-44
6-44
6-45
646
6-47
6-48
6-49
6-55
6-57
6-59
6-60
6-61
6-66
6-70
6-72
6-73
6-74
6-75
6-76
6-76
6-77
6-77
7-2
7-4
7-5
7-7
8-l
8-l
8-2
8-2
8-3
xvii
Figures
GE&90842
8-6
8-7
8-8
89
8-10
8-11
8-12
8-13
8-14
8-15
8.16
8-17
8-18
8-19
8-20
8121
Sample Cascaded Counter Logic

Typical Machine or Process Power-Up Inhibit Logic
Cumulative Timer
Sample 24 Hour Time Clock Logic
Time Clock Resetting
Fast Response Start/Stop Logic
Worst Case Timing Diagram
Application System
Programmable CAM Switch Logic Timing Diagram
Programmable CAM Switch
Output No. 1 Logic Diagram
Wiring Diagram
Cut to Length Program
Shift Register Example
Typical Shift Register Logic
8-6
8-7
8-8
89
8-10
8111
8-11
8-12
8-13
8-14
8-16
8-16
8-17
8-18
8-21
8-22
Tables
moo
XVIII
GEK-90842
Table
l-l
l-2
2-l
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
4-l
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
5-l
5-2
5-3
5-Q
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
6-8
6-9
6-10
6-11
6-12
6-13
6-14
6-15
6-16
6-17
7-1
c-1
Series One Family General Specifications

Common PC Terminology
Series One/Series One Plus Catalog Numbers
Series One Installation Specifications
CPU Option Settings
Memory Size
Units of Load Supplied by Rack
Units of Load Used by Modules
Error Code Definitions
PC Operation Sequences
Printer Interface Unit Specifications
Printer Requirements
Format and PC Selection
Ladder Diagram Listing Error Messages and Definitions
Boolean Listing Error Messages and Definitions
Timer/Counter Setpoint Specifications
Series One Model E/One Plus Basic Ladder Diagram
Instructions
Series One Execution Times
Series One Plus Data Operation Instructions
Series One/One Plus Instruction Groups
Summary of References
-Summary of I/O References for 8 Circuit Modules
^
Effect of Coil 376 (Output Disabler)
Data Operation Function Numbers
Maximum Current vs Load Type for Relay Outputs
Number of HSCs vs Discrete I/O Capacity
Manual Mode Output Logic Truth Table
Real Time Comparison Table for Preset Initially > Current
count
Real Time Comparison Table for Preset Initially < Current
count
Output State vs Real Time Comparison Status in Counter
Mode
Output Logic in Counter Mode
Maximum Current vs. Load Type for Relay Outputs
Operating Mode Selection
Truth Table for Output in Fast Response Mode
(S5 or S7 Have Been Enabled)
Analog Input Module Specifications
&!o Poh Iwinition
Analog Output Module Specifications
I/O Point Definition
I/O Module Fuse List
I/O Module Capability/Compatibility Guide
l-4
l-8
2-5
3-1
3-8
38
3-14
3114
4-7
49
4-19
4-19
4-22
4-23
4123
4-33
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-7
58
5-10
5-29
5-46
66
6-27
6-29
6-34
6-42
6-53
6-53
6-54
6-54
6-55
6-57
6-58
6-58
6-63
6-63
6-68
6-68
7-7
c-3
xix
Tables
c-2
c3
cb
D-l
D-2
D-3
D-4
Summary of Progr amming References for Series One

Family of Programmable Controllers
Pv!r amming Function Compatibility Guide
Examples of Valid System Configurations for I/O Points
Series One Junior Capabilities
Series Three PC Specifications
Series Six CPU Capacities
Series Six Plus Combined Memory Configurations
C-4
c5
C-6
D-l
D-2
D-3
D-4
Chapter
m
11
Series One/Series One Plus PC Introduction
?
GEL90842
History of Programmable Controllers

The factory
with a future is here today, with machine and process controls provided by modem
electronic devices. Todays automated factory can provide improved system reliability, product quality,
information flow, reduced costs, efficiency, and flexibility. One of the basic building blocks of such a
factory is an electronic device called a Programmable Controller. This device was first introduced in
1970 and has been refined every 4-7 years as newer electronic components, such as microprocessors, are
made available. Todays Programmable Controllers are designed using the latest in microprocessor
designs and electronic circuitry which provide reliable operation in industrial applications where many
hazards such as electrical noise, high temperature, unreliable AC power, and mechanical shock exist.
Here is where the Programmable Controller is in its element; it was designed for the industrial
environment from its conception.
Advantages Over Other Control Devices

Programmable Controllers, or PCs or PLCs as they are frequently referred to, offer many advantages
over other control devices such as relays, electrical timers and counters, and drum type mechanical
controllers.
These advantages should be considered beyond just price when selecting any control
device:
Improved reliability
Smaller space required
Easiertomaintain
0 Reusable
0 Reprogrammable if requhments change
0 More flexible-performs more fhctions
Series One Programmable Controllers

A complete Series One PC contained in one S-slot rack can have over 1700 words of user logic, up to 64
timer/counters, and up to 64 I/O points in a panel surface area of only 54 square inches. That is less
space than four 4pole relays might occupy. An available lo-slot rack can contain up to 120 I/O points.
By adding additional racks (up to a total of three), the I/O can be expanded up to a total of 112 I/O
points in a Series One PC or 168 points in a Series One Plus PC. Modules can be replaced individually
without disturbing adjacent modules or their field wiring. The VO can be intermixed in many configurations, limited only by the module types available (either 4,8, or 16 circuits per module - see Chapter 6).
Users need only purchase those modules required for their application; there is no fixed mix such as 12
in/8 out or 20 in/l2 out,
The hand-held programmer can be fixed onto the CPU for quick reference, removed and carried in a
pocket for future use, connected to the CPU via a 5 foot (1.5m) cable for flexible temporary use or
mounted on the outside of a panel or console. It is a simple pushbutton and display unit designed for
easy transportation and rugged use. Progr amming can also be done with the Portable Programmer or
with a Workmaster Industrial computer using Logicmaster 1 application software for Series One or
Logicmaster 1F application software for Series One Model E, Series One Plus and Series One Plus
3.7K.
The Series One and Series One Plus PCs are designed
control replacements.
One Plus PCs.
to be very cost effective relay or other sequential

Despite the low cost, there is a lot of capability within the Series One and Series
12I)

GEK-90842
The advantages
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
a
0
a
l
l
0
l
0
l
l
0
0
l
and features offered by the Series One and Series One Plus PCs include:
Small size - (64 I/O points in a 5-slot rack)

Large Memory Capacity Timers/Counters Programming LanguageMaximum I/O Latching relays
&bit Data Registers
Flexible I/O Replaceable I/O Modules
Portable ProgrammerPersonal Password Security
54 in2 panel space, 5 l/2 in. maximum depth, 250 i.19total volume
Up to 1724 wonk of CMOS or PROM
Up to 64 (4 digit, 9999 maximum preset)
Boolean Based Relay Ladder Data Operations
(Series One Plus Only)
112 (Series One) - 168 (Series One Plus)
28 total
64 (Series One Plus), 124 with TC refennces
Anymixingroupsof4,8or16
Weight only 7 02s.
Series One Plus and Series One Model E
(Permits only Authorized Access To Users Programs)
Internal and external indication of low battery

Reliable operation without fan finm 0 to 60 C (convection cooling)
Retentive counters
Shift Registers (128) Built-in
Sequencers Standard - Up to 64, each with up to 1000 steps
Meets or exceeds NEMA ICS3-304 for noise rejection
Self Diagnostics
htemal Power for 24 V dc Inputs
Inexpensive
High Speed Counter
Remote I/O - Saves instalktion and wiring cost
a40793
Figure l-l. Series One/Series One Plus Programmable Controllers
Series One/Series
One Plus PC Introduction
m
13
GEK-90842
Series One Model E Programmable
Controller
The Series One Model E PC is an enhanced version of the Series One PC that offers more capability
while retaining all of the features and functions of the Series One PC. The Model E requires an
Ic610CPUI04
CPU module. The additional features of the Series One Model E are:
Faster Scan Rate.Typical scan times are:
8 mSec for a OSK word program
12 mSec for a l.OK program
15 mSec for a 1.7K word program
Password ProtectionAs with the Series One Plus PC, this is a valuable feature in that it permits only
authorized access to user programs stored in the PC memory. A unique 4digit password is entered by
the user and thereafter access to all functions (except monitor functions) is gained through a LOG ON
sequence entered by the operator. After completion of required operations, a LOG OUT sequence
returns the PC to password protection.
Faster Data Communications.The
Series One Model E PC requires the IC61OCCM.105 Data
Communications
Unit to communicate with external devices. Communications speed is noticeably
faster when communicating with external devices, such as a host computer, than with a Series One PC
using either the older version IC61OCCMlOO or the IC61OCCM105 Data Communications
Unit.
Program upload or download time, and access time to I/O, and timer/counter data is reduced during
I
communications
sessions.
Series One Plus 3.7K

The Series One Plus 3.7K PC is an enhancement of the Series One Plus PC which offers greater memory
capability, while retaining all other features and functions of the Series One Plus PC. The Series One
Plus 3.7K PC uses an IC61OCPU106 CPU module that provides 3700 words of CMOS RAM: or optional
PROM memory (compared to 1700 words of memory available with a Series One Plus with an
IC61OCPU105 CPU module). A typical scan time for a 3.7K word program is 36 milliseconds.
This additional memory capability allows the Series One Plus 3.7K PC to moTe fully take advantage of
programming with the data operations since those ladder logic programs that require numerous data
operations also require more memory than do programs using the basic functions.
The additional
memory in a Series One Plus 3.7K PC provides the user with a great deal of capability in a small
package.
An additional feature of the Series One Plus 3.7K PC is that timers can be programmed to be .Ol second
timers instead of .l second. This is done by setting output 770 (SET 770) to the ON condition. The
timer preset range with a .Ol second duration selected is 0.01 to 99.99 seconds. When selecting timers
to be .Ol in this manner, care must be exercised to prevent your program from resetting coil 770, since
this would cause all timers programmed to then be .l second timers. Timer durations cannot be mixed,
they can all only be .l second or .Ol second in the same program.
Any Timer/Counter accumulate
registers not being used for a Timer/Counter can be accessed and used as data registers as with the
Series One Plus PC. Table l-1 provides a summary of general specifications for both PCs.
(I)
14

I
GEK-90842
Table M. Series One Family General Specifications

Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Humidity (non-condensing)
AC Power Required:
1C610CHS101/110/130
Rack
vohage
FFequency
Maximum Load
output
CwTeen~
Maximum Individual
DC Power Required
IC61OCHS114/l34 Rack
Voltage
Ripple
output
current
Maximum Individual
Maximum, Total (All Voltages)

Typical Battery life * (loaded)
shelf We * (no load)
0 to 60C (32 to 14OOF)

-loo to 7ooc (14O to +lSsF)
5 to 95%
llSV/230 v ac 15%
47-63 Hz
30 VA (CHSlOl/llO)
36.7 VA (CHS130)
1.4 A at 5 V dc, (0.4 A, CHSlOl)
0.8 A at 9 V dc, CHSllO
(1.7 A, CHS130), (0.6 A, CHSlOl)
0.5 A at 24 V dc, (0.2 A, CHSlOl)
20.5 - 30 V dc (100% of capacity used)

18 - 30 V dc (90% of capacity used)
10% of Input Voltage
1.4 A at 5 V dc
0.8 A at 9 V dc, CHS114
(1.7 & cHS134)
0.4 A at 24 V dc, -114
(0.5 A, CHS134)
22 A, CHS114 (2.3 A, CHS134)
2-5 years
8-10 years
*Depends upon operating temperature

Memory Size and Type (16-bit words)
700 words (CMOS) or

1724 words (CMOS or EPROM)
3700 words (Series One Plus 3.7K
(CMOS or EPROM)
Typical Scan Time per K of Memory)

(Only memory programmed is scanned)
20 m&c (O.SK)
Series One
Overhead time must be added to the
40 m&c (l.OK)
65 msec (1X)
logic solution for total real scIu1,
time overhead is typically 4 to 5 m&c.

series one Plus
aadModelE
one Plus 3.7K
Maximum I/O
Intemal coils
special Fbuaction coils
Retintive Coils (Latches)

Timer/Counters
Shift Register Stages
seqrrepcers
Data Rm
(Series One Pius and
Series one Pius 3.7K)
8 mSec (0.5K)
12 mSec (l.OK)
15 mSec (1.7K)
36 m&c (3.7K)
112 (s&es one)

168 (Series One Plus)
144
4
28
64 (Wigit)
128
64atlooOstepseach
64 (&bit), up to 124 with
mused T/C references
l-5

GEK-90842
Programmable Controller Concepts

When using a new product for the first time, there are always new concepts and terms to become
familiar with. Although PCs are relatively easy to install, program, and apply, there are some simple
principles to follow. Figure 1-2 illustrates a general block diagram of a Programmable Controller.
Specific hardware components to illustrate this diagram will be described in Chapter 2.
c
INPUT/
OUTPUT
II
I
1
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
UNIT
PROGRAMMER
1
I
USER SUPPLIED
FIELD DEVICES
L ---B-B---
I
I
1
I
Figure l-2. Basic PC Block Diagram

Programming the Series One and Series One Plus PCs
The programmin g devices are used to enter the specific logic the user desires the PC to follow.
This
logic, to be described in detail in Chapter 5 is what makes the users PC a unique unit, different from all
others unless the identical logic is entered into another unit. Recording and reloading logic from one PC
to another or to itself is also a standard feature with the programmers.
Hand-Held Programmer
The programmer can display any previously entered logic, allow the user to edit it (make changes, add
or delete portions of the logic), or display the current value of any internal timer or counter. It is a very
valuable and powerful piece of peripheral equipment, for entry of logic, control system checkout, and
troubleshooting.
It can be permanently comected to the CPU or removed without disturbing the
operation of the CPU. If removed, one programmer can service several CPUs. The exact quantity of
CPUs is dependent upon the expected rate of usage but typically is between 5 and 20 CPUs.
Portable Programmer
The portable programmer uses a liquid crystal display (LCD) screen to allow ladder
for both the Series One and Series One Plus PCs. New programs can be created,
ladder logic displayed and existing logic edited. An on-line monitor function is
Portable Programmer is used with the Series One Plus. Programs can be transferred
logic programming
previously entered
available when the
to the PCs or stored
16m

GEK-90842
on cassette tape. The program can be printed using a standard parallel or Centronics compatible printer
through the printer port located on the rear of the Portable Programmer.
For detailed information refer
to GEK-90846, which is the Portable Programmer Users Manual.
Logicmaster 1 Family Application Software

Another option available for programmin g the Series One Family of PCs is the Workmaster industrial
computer with Logicmaster 1 Family application software. This software allows you to write, edit,
display, and print programs in ladder diagram format. You can view up to 7 lines of your ladder
diagram program on one screen. Programs can be annotated by assigning names and nicknames to
program elements, assigning labels to coils and adding explanations of program rungs or segments.
Many programs can be stored on a single 3 inch diskette and each program can be assigned a unique
name.
For detailed information on using the Workmaster industrial computer with Logicmaster 1
application software refer to GFK-0075, which is the Logicmaster 1 Family Programming and Documentation Software Users Manual.
Series One Plus Program Protection

The Series One Plus and Series One Model E PCs allow the user to enter a unique password with the
hand-held programmer or the LCD Portable Programmer, which prevents unauthorized users or inadvertent program access. When a password is entered, all programmer functions are disabled except the I/O,
T/C accumulated value and register monitor functions.
In order to have access to all programmer
functions when a password has been entered, a log on sequence must be entered.
i
Function of the Central Processing Unit

The next element of the PC is the Central Processor Unit (CPU). The CPU is the brain behind all
logical decision making. It reads in the status of the control system, makes decisions based upon the
logic it has been provided, and then provides decisions to the actuating portion of the control system.
The CPU also performs self checking of its internal operation to ensure reliable operation. If an error is
detected, it will shut itself down. The logic entered by the programmer is actually stored in the CPU
along with storage for the operation of timers and counters.
Memory Word Length

The memory provided for this storage diction
is normally measured in K words, where K is an
abbreviation for kilo or 1024. Typically, one word is required storage for each function such as a relay
contact, timer preset or timer storage. These words can be of various lengths such as 16 bits, 8 bits, or
even 4 bits, wherein a bit is the most elementary measurement and can have only two states (on or off).
The word length is much like a ruler used to measure wire, sheet steel, or fabric. It can be a yard long
(16 bits) or a foot (8 bits) or an inch (4 bits). Numerical values are for illustrative purposes only and do
not represent exact ratios. Thus when quoting memory in K words (lK, UC, 4K, etc.) always check to
verify the word length. The Series One and Series One Plus PCs use the most common measurement,
16 bits per word.
17-
GEK-90842
Types of Memory for Program Storage

There are several types of memory used in PCs to store both logic and data. Ike two used in the Series
One and Series One Plus PCs are CMOS and PROM. CMOS or CMOS RAM, which is an acronym
for Complimentary Metal-oxide Semiconductor, Random Access Memory, provides a fast, low cost, low
power memory that can be both examined (read) and also changed (written) easily. However, it is
volatile, which means that it can lose its content if power is removed. To avoid reloading memory (and
losing counts and system status) every time power is turned off, the CMOS memory is usually provided
(as it is in Series One and Series One Plus) with a back-up battery to maintain its content (not system
operation) when power fails. Due to the low power drain of CMOS technology, a single new lithium
battery can maintain memory without application of power for up to 2 to 5 years. The battery is not
used when the power is applied and the system is operating normally. Its storage or shelf life is many
years, typically 8 to 20 years.
The second memory is PROM(Programmable
Read only Memory) that again is fast, relatively low cost,
and retentive upon loss of power. However, this memory cannot be easily changed. It can be examined
(read) at anytime, but to change (write) it requires some special action on the part of the user. In this
system, the PROM must be cleared of all previous contents (new PROM, or erased with an intense
ultraviolet light) and then placed into a special loader. A previous logic program developed in CMOS is
then written into the PROM. Finally, the PROM is removed from the loader and placed into the CPU.
Function of the Input/Output Circuitry

The final element of the PC is the Input/output section. Electrical noise such as spikes on the power
lines, inductive kick-back from loads, or interference picked up from field wiring is very prevalent in
industrial applications. Since the CPU operates at relatively low voltage levels (typically 5 volts), this
noise would have serious impact on its operation if allowed to reach the internal circuits of the CPU.
The I/O section, both inputs and outputs, protects the CPU from electrical noise entering via the I/O
modules or wiring. The I/O section is where status signals are filtered to remove noise, voltage levels
are validated, and where decisions made by the CPU are put into operation. Inputs provide their status
to a storage area within the CPU and outputs are driven from similar stored status in the CPU.
In general, the I/O section is modular in design and can accommodate a variety of signals. A complete
discussion of the types and capacities available for both the Series One and Series One Plus PCs is
provided in Chapter 6. The specific type of module (e.g. 115 V ac or 24 V dc) is usually determined by
the field device the user selects. Decisions such as number of 115 V ac solenoids, 24 V dc solenoids,
motor starters, limit switches (their voltages), control panel lamps (what voltage), pushbuttons, and
external relays have a major impact on the configuration of any PC. These parameters should be
established as early as possible in the overall design of the control system. Of course, being a flexible
device, the PC configuration either on paper or in hardware, can be changed if rtQuireirements change.
Typically, the user provides the field devices, wires them to the I/O section, and provides the power
source to operate them.
UL Listed Products
Several Series One family products are available that have been tested and approved by the Underwriters Laboratory (UL). These UL listed products should be used in installations where UL listed products
are required. The UL listed products include the Series One CPU (IC61OCPU101, revision C), 5-slot
18-
Series One/Series One Plus PC Iutroduction

GE&90842
rack (IC610CHSlll),
115 V ac Input module (IC61OMDL135), Relay Output module (IC61OMDLl81),
and a 115 V ac Output module (IC61OMDLl85).
Specifications and wiring information for the UL
listed modules can be found in chapter 6 of this manual.
When installing a system requiring UL approval, do not mix non UL listed products with the UL listed
products.
Communicating With Other Devices

An available Data Communications
Unit (DCU) allows the Series One and Series One Plus to communicate with external devices. The Series One PC uses the IC61OCCMlOO DCU, while the Series One
Model E, Series One Plus and Series One Plus 3.7K PCs use the IC61OCCM.105 DCU. These devices
can be other programmable
controllers, computers, or other smart devices.
User programs and I/O
information in a Series One or Series One Plus PC can be uploaded and downloaded to or from any
master device that supports the Series Six CCM2 protocol as defined in the Series Six Data Communications Manual, GEK-25364.
For detailed information on how to use a DCU in a Series One or Series
One Plus PC system, refer to the Series One Data Communications Manual, GEK-90477.
Remote I/O for Series One and Series One Plus

Another option available for a Series One or Series One Plus PC system is Remote I/O. By using
Remote I/O, I/O modules can be located in a rack convenient to the input sensors or the&output devices
being controlled by the PC at a distance of up to .6 miles (1 km) from the PC. This is accomplished by
installing a Link Local module in the CPU rack, a Link Remote module in the distant I/O rack and
connecting them through a single twisted-pair cable. For detailed information on using Remote I/O in a
Series One or Series One Plus PC system, refer to the Series One Remote I/O Manual, GEK-90507.
PC Terminology
To summarize the preceding discussion of Programmable Controller concepts, table 1-2 provides a
definition of terms discussed above that you should be familiar with, relating to PCs. A more complete
list of terms is provided in a glossary at the end of this manual.
Table l-2. Common PC Terminology

TERM
PC
Programmer
Logic
CPU
Memory
DEFINTTION
Programma&kController or Rogrammable Logic Controller. An indudal control device using
microprocessor technology to perform logic decision maEng with r&y ladder diagram based
programming*
*A device for entry, examdtion and alteration of the PCs memory including logic and storage ~RXS.
A fixed set of respond (outputs) to various external conditions (inputs). All possible situations for
both syncbr~nous and non-synchronous activity must be sped% by the user. Also r&d
to as
the pTo8T8m*
Central Processor Unit - the physical unit in which the PCs intelligence ~lesides. Decision making is
performMi heI&
A physical place to stow information such as programs and/or data.
19m
GEE90842
Table l-2. Common PC Terminology - Continued

TERM
K
word
CMOS
PROM
I/O
Noise
Inau@
outputs
Modules
Field
Devices
DEFINITION
An abbreviation for kilo or exactly 1024 in the world of computers. Usually r&ted to 1024 words of
memory.
A measurement of memory usually 16, 8, or 4 bits long.
A read/write memory that requires a battery to retain content upon loss of power.
A read only memory that requires a special method of loading, but is inherently retentive upon power
loss.
Input/Output - that portion of the PC to which field devices are connected. Isolates the CPU from
electrical noise.
Undesirable electrical disturbances to normal signals genefly of high frequency content.
A signal, typically ON or OFF, that provides information to the PC.
A signal typically ON or OFF, that originates h-am the PC with user supplied power that controls
earnal devices based upon commands from the CPU.
A replaceable electronic subassembly usually plugged in and secured in place but easily removable in
case of fault or system redesign
User supplied &vices typically providing information to the PC (Inputs: pushbutton, limit switches,
day contacts etc.) or performing PC tasks (Outputs: motor starters, solenoids, indicator lights, etc.).
Chapter
Physical Equipment Configuration
21
m
.c
GEK-90842
Rack Description
The Series One and Series One Plus PCs are provided as a family of racks into which modules can be
inserted. Each rack contains a power supply to the right and space for up to either 5 or 10 modules (see
figure 2-1). Racks are available in 6 versions, 5 or lo-slot that accept 115/230 V ac input power, 5 or
lO-slot that accept 24 V dc, a UL listed 5-slot rack, IC61OCHSlll which accepts only a 115 V ac power
source, and a low-cost 5-slot rack (IC6lOCHSlOl)
that does not include an expansion part, 24 V dc
tetials
for external use, or a RUN relay. Each supplies internal power to the modules inserted into
the rack. Mounting is provided by the brackets each with two keyholes at the rear of the rack. All racks
are similar. The differences being the function of the rack as determined by the placement of modules
by the user, the number of modules which may be inserted into a rack, and the input power required.
Figure 2-2 illustrates typical modules for the Series One Family of PCs, illustrating in hardware, the
block diagram concept of figure l-l.
a40535
Figure 24. Typical Rack

Module Location in Rack
The CPU module is always placed adjacent to the power supply in the first ra& it contains the
microprocessor and required memory storage. There is a connector on the CPU to which the programmer is attached when mounted on the rack. As an option, between the CPU and programmer a 5 foot
(1.5m) cable can be installed for more flexible operation. The remaining slots can contain I/O modules
in any mix of inputs versus outputs or voltage levels desired by the user for his particular application.
Ail modules as well as the programmer are secured to the rack by two snap-locks which can be released
by squeezing the module top and bottom toward the center (see Chapter 3 fo+ additional installation
details).
22m

GE&90842
a40019
Figure 2-2. Typical Hardware

Heat Dissipation
The rack is designed to dissipate internal heat through convection
cooling only and does not require a

fan for forced air cooling. However, to ensure efficient operation, free air flow should not be inhibited at
the top and bottom of the unit. A minimum of 3 inches (75mm) is recommended at the top and 4 inches
(1OOmm) at the bottom with 6 inches (15Omm) between racks. Both sides should be free of obstacles to
allow easy removal of the unit, approximately 3 inches (75 mm) from each side excluding the mounting
brackets is recommended. Furthermore, the unit should be mounted horizontally as shown in figure 2-3
and not inverted nor rotated 90.
If not oriented as shown, derating of the maximum ambient
temprature specification would need to be considered. Placements of other sources of large volumes of
heat near the units should also be avoided, especially directly below the rack. For reliable operation, the
air entering the bottom of the rack should not be at a higher temperature than 60C (140. Wiring to the
I/O modules and the power supplies should be placed so as to avoid blocking the air flow, yet provide a
suitable service loop to allow easy removal of modules with wiring attached. Wires should be tied to
maintain their order in the event they must be disconnected during module replacement.
Adding Racks
If more ?/O points a~ required than one rack can contain, additional racks can be installed similar to the
first unit previously discussed (IC61OCHS101 cannot be used as an expansion rack). At the left of each
rack are two connectors used to connect to additional I/O. An 18 inch (46Omm) cable is available to
connect the rack containing the CPU module to the first I/O expansion rack. The ends of this cable are
marked CPU and EXP (Expander). The CPU end is plugged into the bottom connector at the first
rack and the EXP end similarly connected to the second rack using the top connector (see figure 2-S). If
a third rack is used, another cable links the second rack to the third rack, the CPU end is inserted into the
bottom conneztor on the second rack and the EXP end into the top connector on the last rack. Within
these added racks, I/0 modules can be inserted in any order desired, up to five modules in a S-slot rack
and up to 10 modules in a lo-slot rack. No additional CPU modules can be installed, nor are reckred.
.\
23-

GE&90842
a4001 8
Figure 2-3. Typical (5 Slot) Rack

lo-Slot Rack
The 100slot rack provides in a single housing, as shown in figure 2-4, the same number of I/O module
slots as two 5-slot racks. An added advantage of the lO-slot rack is easier and less expensive installation
since fewer racks have to be mounted and wired. A system can be configured in many ways to contain
Refer to Appendix B, which contains examples of valid I/O rack
various quantities of I/O.
configurations.
Rack Mount Brackets

Rack mount brackets (IC610CHS191) are available to adapt the lo-slot racks for mounting in 19 inch
racks. With the brackets assembled on either version of a lo-slot rack, the rack can be mounted on
standard mounting rails in 19 inch cabinets and consoles.
a40792
Figure 24. Typical (10 Slot) Rack
24m

GEK90842
83-pc-3Sm m-4-1 -3 1a
Figure 24. Expander Cable Installation
Programmer Tape Port

The hand-held programmer,
when installed on the CPU module, provides an auxiliary tape port for
memory transfers to peripheral devices. Tape recordings of user programs can be made on virtually any
audio cassette recorder and once made can be used to initialize any CPU to that program.
Thus
programs can be made once and transported to other CPUs without manually being reentered.
Of
course, once entered they can be edited if additional tailoring is required. In the unlikely event that a
CPU fails, a replacement can be installed and quickly reloaded to perform specifically the task its
predecessor was accomplishing, if a tape record was made. The tame recorder functions are discussed in
detail in Chapter 4, PC Operation.
A

A Programmer Mount Assembly (IC610PRG190) is available that can be used to mount and protect the
hand-held programmer on the outside of a panel or console. A hand-held programmer, when mounted
externally, can be used as an operator interface unit to change timer or counter presets, monitor timer or
counter current values, monitor 16 consecutive I/O points, monitor the entire contents of the user
program, and, with a Series One Plus PC, monitor register contents. The programmer mount assembly
includes a mounting bezel, a clear plastic cover, and a cable fastener. In addition to the mounting
assembly, a shielded, round CPU/Programmer cable (Catalog No. IC61OCBLl02), designed specifically
for mounting the hand-held programmer away from the CPU rack must be ordezed separately for use
when installing the hand-held programmer in this manner.
The Programmer Mount Assembly bezel installs on the outside of a panel or console with only four
screws. The hand-held programmer snaps into the bezel using its two snap-locks. A clear plastic cover
then fits over the bezel and programmer, thereby protecting it &om its industrial environment. The
Programmer Mount Assembly can also be used as a table top stand for the hand-held programmer by
250

GEK90842
mounting four rubber feet, which are included with the assembly, on the reverse side of the bezel using
the panel mounting holes.
a401 48
l WHENUSEDASABENW-TYPE
l WHENMOWTEDONARSEL
Figure 2-6. Programmer Mount Assembly

Table 2-1 lists the Series One/Series One Plus PC catalog numbers and nomenclature for the various
For detailed information on I/O module specifications
modules, cables, peripherals, and accessories.
and wiring diagrams, see Chapter 6.
Table 2-l. Series One/Series
One Plus Catalog Numbers
DESCRIPTION
CPU, Series One (700 wonls of CMOS Memory, standad) Version C is UL listed
CPU, Series One Model E (Enhanced Version of CPUlOl)
CPU, Series One Plus (700 words of CMOS Memory, std)
CPU, Series One Plus 3.7K (3700 wads of CMOS Memory)
I/O Expander Cable
Programmer with Keylock
Programmer w/Keybck (Required for Series One Plus)
CPU to Programmer Cable, 5 (1Sm)
CATALOG
NUMBER
1C61OCPu101
IC61OCPU104
IC61OCPU105
IC61OCPU106
IC61OCBLlOl
IC61OPRG100
IC61OPRGlOS
IC61OCBLlOO
26(I

GE&90842
Table 2-l. Series One/Series One Plus Catalog Numbers - Continued

CATALOG
DESCRIPTION
Rack, 115/230 V ac Power Source, 5-&t
Rack, 115/230 V ac Power Source, S-slot (no expansion, 24 V dc Tee,
NUMBER
IC61OCHSllO
or Run Relay)
Rack 115 V ac Power Source, 5-slot, UL listed
IC61OCHSlOl
IC61OCHSlll
Rack w/24 V dc Power Source, S-slot
IC61OCHS114
Rack, 115/230 V ac Power Source, lO_slot
IC61OCHS130
Rack, w24 V dc Power Source, l&slot
IC61OCHS134
Kller Module
24 V dc Sink Input, 8 circuits
IC61OMDLlOO
IC61OMDLlOl
14 V dc Input/Output, 4 Inputs/4Outputs
IC61OMDL103
IC61OMDL104
Z4 V dc Sink Input/Relay Output, 4 Inputs/4 Outputs

humbwheel Interface
Z4 V dc Sink Input, 16 Circuits w/LEDs
L/OInterface Cable 10 (3m)
24VdcSinkLoadI~put,16Circuits
14 V ac/dc SoInput, 8 Circuits
14 V ac/dc Source Input, 16 circuits
115 V ac Input, 8 Circuits
115 V ac Isolated Input, 4 Chuits
230 V ac Input, 8 circuits
115 V ac Input, 6 Circuits (UL listed)
IC61OMDL105
IC61OMDL106
IC61OCBL105
IC61OMDL107
IC61OMDLlll
IC61OMDL112
IC61OMDL125
IC61OMDL126
IC61OMDL127
14VdcSinkOutput,8Circuits
24 V dc 2 Amp Sink Output, 4 Circuits
24 V dc 2 Amp Si&hurce
Output, 4 Circuits
IC61OMDL135
IC6lOMDL151
IC61OMDL153
IC61OMDL154
24VdcSourceOutput,8C!ircuits
24VdcSinkOutput,16CircuitswjLEDs
24 V dc Sink Output, 16 Cixuits
24 V dc Source Output, 16 Cinxxits
115/230 V ac Output, 8 Circuits
115/230 V ac Isolated Output, 4 Circuits
IC61OMDL155
IC61OMDL156
IC61OMDL157
IC61OMDL158
IC61OMDL175
IC61OMDL176
Relay Output, 8 Chuits

Relay Output, 5 Circuits (UL listed)
Relay Output, 16 Circuits
115 V ac Output, 6 Circuits (UL listed)
Hi@ Speed Counter
I/O Interthe Cable (High Speed Counter)
IC61OMDL180
IC6lOMDLl85
IC61OMDL182
IC61OMDL181
IC61OMDLllO
IC61OCBL107
Fast Response &/O

I/O Simulator, 8 Inputs
printer Interface Unit
PROM Writer Unit
IC61OMDLl15
IC61OMDL124
IC61OPER151
IC6lOPER154
IC61OACC120
IC61OACCl50
Accessory Kit
Lithium Battery
PROM Memory (4 Chips), Series
CMOS Memory (4 Chips), Series
PROM Memory (4 Chips), Sties
CMOS Memory (4 Chips), Series
Rack Mount Brackets
One, Series One Junior

One
One Plus
One Plus
IC61OACC151
IC61OACC152
IC61OACC155
IC61OACC156
IC61OCHS191
IC61OPRG190
27I

GEK-90842
Table 2-l. Series One/Series One Plus Catalog Numbers - Continued
DESCRIPTION
CATALOG
Remote CPU/Programmer Cable

I/o Link Local
I/O Link Remote
NUiiiiii~
IC61OCBL102
1C61OCCM105
IC61OCCMllO
IC61OCCMlll
Hardware Requirements
The Series One and Series One Plus PCs are an excellent relay and timer/counter replacer or substitute
for other sequential type control devices, such as drum or stepping switch based systems. However, one
question always arises - how much hardware do I need to buy ? The answer varies extensively based
upon different applications and their attendant complexities.
Areas of concern include amount of
memory, mix of inputs versus outputs, voltages of I/O, and physical size of the Series One or Series
One Plus PC system. The following steps are guides to estimate the requirements of the Series One or
Series One Plus PC system. With a little experience, estimating required components will become
second nature. If you require assistance, please contact your local GE Fanuc Automation distributor
who handles the Series One Family of PCs.
NOTE
CPU Module IC61OCPUlOlA is different from 1OlB and 1OlC in that 1OlA has a 3 digit preset
for Timers and Counters, while the updated modules, 1OlB and 1OlC have a 4 digit preset. The
1OlA method of monitoring the accumulated value of Timers and Counters is also different. With
the 1OlA module, each individual Timer or Counter must be accessed by using the sequence
SHF, 6X, MON for each Timer/Counter to be monitored. With the 1OlB or the 1OlC CPU
module, the keys NXT or PRV will move the monitor display to the next or previous Timer or
Counter.
System Estimating
The Series One and Series One Plus PCs are provided with 700 words of CMOS memory as a standard
feature. Expansion to 1724 words is possible by adding a CMOS memory chip. If the unit is to be
PROM based, the program can be up to 1724 words. The Series One Plus 3.7K PC provides the user
with 3700 words of CMOS memory as a standard feature. For average complexity relay replacement,
700 words should be adequate for up to 64 I/O, and the 1724 should be adequate for up to 168 I/O. If
the logic is conside& more complex than that used as examples in this manual, a representative sample
(10 to 15%) of the logic should be programmed.
From the amount of memory (on paper) the sample
requires, the total memory requirements can be estimated. If in doubt, obtain the optional memory with
your unit to ensure simple system design.
The key to many of the answers (cost, physical size, memory requirements, etc.) is the I/O structure. If
a design exists such as shown in figure 2-7, assume that all the relays and timers are enclosed within a
box; these are the elements to be replaced. This figure is for illustrative purposes only; no indication is
given that it performs any real functions. Passing through this box are wires tirn switches, auxiliary
contacts, overload relays, etc.; these are inputs to the control system. There are wires connecting to
loads or actuating devices such as solenoid valves, motor starters, indicator lights, etc.; these are outputs
280

GEK-90842
from the control system. The power lines (e.g., 115 V ac and 24 V dc) are not considered
important to estimating the number of I/O modules required.
Use the following
steps to estimate rack and module quirements;
I/O, but are
figure 2-7 is used as an example:
1 . Add total number of inputs and outputs separating them by type and voltage.
(5) 24 V dc inputs plus (3) 115 V ac and (1) 24 V dc output).
(e.g. (4) 115 V ac and
2 . Divide each separate category by 8 (assume 8 circuit modules), (e.g. (1) 115 V ac and (1) 24 V dc
input modules and (1) 115 V ac and (1) 24 V dc output modules). See Chapter 6 for I/O that uses 4
or 16 circuits per module.
3 . Add total I/O modules (e.g. 4 I/O modules). One 5-slot rack is required for l-4 I/O modules, two
5-slot racks for 5-9, and three 5-slot racks for 10-14.
4 . If lo-slot racks are used one lo-slot rack is required for 1-9 I/O modules,
lo-slot and a 5-slot rack will contain 1-14 I/O modules.
5.
wo
lo-slot racks or a
Each additional rack also requires an I/O expander cable. Empty slots should be covered by blank
filler plates.
6 . Estimate memory requirements

Total I/O Points
l-64
65-168
as follows:
Estimated Memory
Basic Unit with 700 words
Add 1K Memory Chip
7 . The following optional hardware is available and should be considered

Had-Held Programmer
Portable Programmer
Extender Cable
when configuring
a system:
PROM Writer Unit

Thumbwheel Illunit
Timer/Counter Setpoint Unit (Series One Plus)
If the system has not yet been designed, the same basic technique can be used. Inputs are signals the PC
will require to perform its assigned functions. Any device or person regardless of intelligence can not
respond to events it does not know occurred. Plan to provide the PC all the information you would
require to perform the same function. Make a list of those inputs, including source and voltage level (if
currently defined). Outputs, on the other hand, are devices the PC will use to perform its fimctions.
Again, even if the PC knows it must do something, if it is not given control over these actuating devices,
it can not maintain proper control. Make a list of these devices including their voltage levels and
current/power requirements. Use the above steps with the list of l/O devices. In any case, when
290

GEL90842
estimating system requirements, review the following

define their impact on your control needs:
standard features as discussed in later chapters to
Up to 64 Timers and Counters (4 digits each)

128 Stage Shift Register
Up to 64 Sequencers Each With Up to 1000 Steps
28 Latched Relays
Data Operations (Series One Plus and Series One 3.7K)
64 Sixteen Bit Data Registers (Series One Plus and Series One 3.7K)
- Up to 124 Data Registers are possible when unused T/C references are used as Data Registers.
a421 53
Figure 2-7. Example of Relay Control
Peripheral Devices Supporting Series One Family of PCs

Several peripheral units are available to support a Series One or Series One Plus Programmable
Controller.
A basic description of these units is provided in the following paragraphs. For a more
detailed description of the use and operation of these units, refer to Chapter 4, Operation, in this manual.
2-10

GEK-90842

The Data Communications Unit (DCU), 1C610CCM100/105, provides the ability for external devices to
communicate with the Series One, Series One Model E, Series One Plus or Series One Plus 3.7K PC.
Series One Model E, Series One Plus and Series One Plus 3.7K PCs require the CCM105 DCU. These
devices function as a host to the Series One or One Plus PC and can be other programmable controllers,
computers, or other smart devices. User programs and I/O information in the Series One or One Plus
PC can be uploaded and downloaded to or from any master device that supports the Series Six CCM2
(Communications
Control Module, Version 2) master/slave protocol as defined in GEK-25364, which is
the Series Six Data Communications Manual. The Series One or Series One Plus can only function as a
slave device during a communications
session.
a40537
Figure 2-8. Data Communications Unit
241

GE&90842

The Printer Interface Unit, IC61OPER151, is a compact, easy to use device that attaches to the Series
One, One E, One Plus or One Plus 3.7K PC in the same manner as the programmer.
This peripheral
interfaces to many readily available personal computer printers and provides a means of obtaining a
hard-copy printout of the user program in either boolean or ladder diagram format. Version B works
with Series One, One E and One Plus PCs. A higher revision will be available that will also work with
the Plus 3.7K PC.
a40538
Figure 2-9. Printer Interface Unit
2-12

GEK-90842
PROM Writer Unit

Also available is a PROM Writer unit, IC61OPER154, which allows the user program in CMOS
memory to be transferred to PROM memory, thereby providing a convenient method of non-volatile
(permanent) storage for those programs. The PROM Writer unit is a compact, easy to use unit which
attaches directly to the PC in the same manner as the programmer.
In addition to providing a means of
non-volatile storage, an added advantage of PROM memory is that several PROMS can be programmed,
each containing a different program, for use as required. Version B of this unit replaces version A and
can be used with a Series One Plus PC as well as Series One and Series One Junior PCs. Version B will
not work with the Series One Plus 3.7K PC. A revisedversion will be available that can be used for all
Series One Family PCs.
a40539
Figure 2-10. Prom Writer Unit

PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
series One/OneE
series OIX!Plus/3.7K
PROM
2732A-2
27256-25
Chapter
I
31
Installation
GEK-90842
Specifications for Installation

The Series One and Series One Plus PC can be easily installed in any NEMA panel or similar metal
surface. Figure 3-1 provides details on the mounting of up to three racks except for input voltage
requirements to form a single PC system. Since a completed &lot rack weighs less than five pounds
(lo-slot rack, less than 7 pounds), it can be easily installed by one technician.
Table 3-1 provides
specifications
to be met during installation.
Table 3-l. Series One Installation Specifications

Rack
size
11.4 x 4.7 x 5.5 (290 x 120 x 14Omm)
18.3 x 4.7 x 5.5 (465 x 120 x 14Omm)
S-slot
lo-slot
Completed Rack Weight
(less wiri@
0 to 60C (32 to 14OOF)
Ambient Temperature
Storage Temperature
-10 to 7oOC (14 to 158F)

5-95s (Non-CorKieIlsing)
HUmidiQ
AC Power Required:
1C61OCHS101/110/l30
Vohage
FrequeW
Maximum Load
output
current
Maximum Individual
DC Power Required
IC16OCHSll4/l34
Voltage
Ripple
output
current
Maximum Individual
Maximum, Total
(All vohRges)
Run relay
4.5 lbs (2.0 Kg), 5-Slot

6.5 lbs (2.9 Kg), lo-slot
Rack
115v/230 v ac 15%
47-63 Hz
30 VA, CHSlOl/llO (70 VA, CHS130)
1.4 A at 5 V dc (0.4 A CHSlOl)
0.8 A at 9 V dc, CHSllO (0.6 A, CHSlOl; 1.7 A, CHS130)
0.5 A at 24 V dc, (0.2 A, CHSlOl)
20.5 - 30 V dc (100% of capacity used)

18 - 30 V dc (90% of capacity used)
10% of Input Voltage
1.4 A at 5 V dc
0.8 A at 9 V dc, CHS114 (1.7 A, CHS134)
0-4 A at 24 V &, CHSll4 (0.5 A, CHS134)
2.2 A, CHS114 (2.9 A, CHS134)
250 V, 4 amp, Resistive Load
(Not Present on CHSlOl)
Vibration
MestsJISC0911IIBClass3
Shock
Tested to ML STD 810C Method 514.2

Meets JIS C 0912
Meets NE&IA ICS3-304
Noise Immunity
Installation
GEK-90842
W7.52
*#18.3
(445)
**
C465,
FOR lO-SLOT
CHASSIS
11.41,,
-AL
12 PLACES
MAX:
MIN:
7.2
(183)
4"
4
,3:40,
MIN
MMENsK)(ys
IN PARENTHESES
ARE MI MUMETERS,
OTHERS IN INCHES.
Figure 3-l. Rack Mounting Dimensions for Proper Heat Dissipation
Installation
Unpack each unit candidly and retain any instructions shipped with the units. Two spare fuses are
attached to the top of each rack; they should be removed and retained for future use. The racks can be
installed either with no modules or with modules installed. The following steps will assist in organizing
and simplifying the installation of a Series One or Series One Plus PC System.
1 Using the rack as a template,

l
2 . Drill the four mounting

tapped holes).
ma& where mounting
holes are to be drilled.
holes (l/4 (6mm) if using pass through bolts, or 3/16
3 . Insert top 2 bolts (3/16 X l-1/2

washers, lock washers and nuts.
or 5mm X 4Omm),put unit

,.
CR
in place,
(5mm) if using
and loosely secure with
Installation
GEK-90842
4. Tap holes and insert top two bolts.
Place unit onto mounting
bolts and loosely secure.
NOTE
men inserting the 2 top bolts, attach the green jumper as shown in figure 3-2. This jumper wire
is packed with each rack and provides a method of groundingthe rack when an earth ground
(such as the shield or hard wire in the power cord) is also connected to a mounting bolt.
5. The power supply ground connection is made to one of the mounting bolts (step 3 or 4 above). A
jumper wire is included with each rack to interconnect the mounting brackets. The C terminals
on the power supplies are interconnected when more than one rack is used. Otherwise, the C
terminal is not connected to anything in a single rack system.
a40147
jumper
wtre tncluded
wtth
Ix> base
star washer
to 8n earth ground
Figure 312. Recommended Rack Grounding

6. Complete
the installation of the bottom two bolts and tighten

supplies are shipped installed in each base.
7. If additional racks are to be used, repeat steps l-4 above.

15 .
all mounting
hardware.
Power
If only one base unit is used, go to step
NOTE
When drilling or tapping holes ensure that
work area before installing base units
chips do not enterunit afready installed. clear
8. Obtain flat ribbon cable used to interconnect racks. Locate end marked To CPU, remove dust
cover from bottom connector of first (CPU) rack, and insert cable co~ector (see figure 3-d) fully
into receptacle until locking tabs capture connector.
9. Fold cable as shown on figure 3-7. Remove dust cover from top connector of second rack and insert
opposite end of cable marked To Expander.
10. Secure cable in place with wire wraps or cable ties.
34m
Installation
GEL90842
11 .
a third rack is used, repeat steps 8-10 with CPU end of cable *in bottom connector on second rack
and Expander end in top connector of third and last rack.
If
12 . If a lo-slot rack (IC61OCHS130 or IC61OCHS134)) is to be included in a system, it can be mounted

on standard mounting rails in 19 inch cabinets and consoles by attaching the rack mount brackets.
Two adapter brackets and hardware required for assembly are included in the bracket package,
IC6lOCHS191.
a4021 4
ohmmoNs
IN INCHES,
WLLIMnERS
ARE
W PARENTHESIS
Figure 3-3. 10 Slot Rack, 19 Inch Mounting Dimensions
a40280
Figure 3-4. I/O Expansion Cable Connection

13. Unused rack connectors such as at the top of the CPU unit and the bottom of the last rack should
retain their dust covers.
35m
Installation
GE&90842
14 . Inside each 5-slot rack at the rear of the leftmost module slot is a two position switch. On the CPU
unit, this switch must be positioned towards the left. On the first expander it must be towards the
right. If a third rack is used, the switch must be towards the left again. An exception to the
described switch settings is when a 5-slot rack is used as an expansion rack in a Series One Plus
system, where the CPU rack is a 10.slot rack. In this case, the switch must be positioned to the left
This switch is not included in the IC6lOCHSlOl rack, since it cannot be used as an expansion rack.
All switches must be set properly. The Series One or Series One Plus PC may not function
correctly if any switch is not in the correct position.
15 . The lo-slot racks, IC61OCHS130/134 have two bridge connectors on the back plane which must be
configured. Bridge connector SWl, located between slots 3 and 4, has 2 positions EXP and CPU.
The jumper must be positioned on the corresponding pins to specify whether the rack is a CPU rack
or an Expansion rack. Bridge connector SW2, located between slots 9 and 10, selects the address to
be assigned to slot 10 and the expansion rack slots. The selections are either 100 EXP or 700.
Figure 3-5 shows the location of SW1 and SW2.
a40794
SW2
700 loo
EXP
BRIDGE-CONNECTOR I,
:
s
ml3 : -Bf?IDGE-CONNECTOR 2
Fiire
3-5. I/O Addressing
SW1
EXP CPU
--
IC6lOCHSl30
OR
IC6~OCHSi34
Switches in Series One Plus 10 Slot Racks
360
Installation
GEK-90842
16. Example of SW1 and SW2 settings are shown below in figure 3-6.
a40795
SW2 Ii00 EXP)
SW2 1700 EXPI
SET TO LEFT POSITION
SW2 t100 ExPr
SWI IEXPI
Figure 3-6. Examples of Rack Configuration Switch Setting Series One Plus
37I
Installation
GEK-90842
ET-
Its v&c
Itsv -
MEUT
23ovAC
23OvWEUT
+ 24 VDC
-2uDC
PC
COMMON CONNECTION
'
Figure 3-7. Typical Installation Dimensions

NOTE
Ground Connection should be made to mounting bracket, not to the terminal strip.
CPU
17. Locate the CPU module (see figure 3-8) and set switches and shorting bridge connectors per table
3-2. If additional CMOS or PROM memory is to be installed, now is the time to do it. For detailed
instructions, see Chapter 7.
18. The CPU module must be installed adjacent to the power supply in the first or topmost rack.
38m
Installation
GEK-90842
a40281
s2
Figure 3-8. CPU Module

Table 3-2. CPU Option Settings
SWITCH
1 - POWER
OFF
ON
SWITCH
UP FUNCTIONS
2 - MEMORY
PROM
CMOS
OFF
ON
Clear coils
Retain Coils
TYPE
NOTE
ON is Towards the Faceplate. Factory setting is: Clear Coils and Select CMOS memory. Retain
Coils affects 340-373 only. Copters and Shift Registers are always retentive.
Table 3-3. Memory Size

MEMORY
CONNECT
SIZE
JUMPERS BETWEEN
PINS
ABandDE
B Cad-i?
ABandDE
700 words CMOS

1724 words CMOS
1724 Words PROM
CAUTION
Remove jumper EF before installing PROM. Battery will discharge in a very short time if
is not disconnected.
NOTE
Pin A is towards the faceplate. Factory setting is: 700 words CMOS, 1724 words PROM (same Setting)
Installation
GEK-90842
a40282
Figure 3-9. Proper Module Insertion

19. Tilt the module approximately 10 as shown in figure 3-9. Insert bottom of the large printed circuit
board into the bottom card slot.
20. When the bottom slot is engaged, rotate the module to engage top slot. Slide module into base unit
until it is firmly seated and snap locks engage.
II0
21. Other modules are installed into racks at slot locations as determined
by installation plans.
Follow
steps 19 and 20 above for each I/O module.
22. To remove a module, squeeze the snap locks top and bottom (see figure 3-10) towards the center
and pull the module straight out. Squeeze force should be approxbately 10 pounds (5 Kg) and pull
force 8-12 pounds (4-5 Kg).
a40283
Figure 3-10. Proper Module Removal
3-10
Installation
GEK-90842
Power
Co~ections
23 . AC or DC power connections are made to the terminal strip on the far right of each unit. See table
3-l for power requirements. The minim um recommended wire size for power connections is AWG
No. 18 (lmm).
24 .
Strip 0.4 2 0.1 inches (10 & 2mm) of insulation from each wire (hot, neutral, and ground or + and -)
or place a No. 6 insulated lug (ringed or forked) onto each wire.
25 . Remove plastic cover over terminal strip and retain. Connect the hot wire to the top terminal. The
neutral is connected to either the next (second) terminal for 115 V ac operation or the third terminal
for 230 V ac operation as marked on the base unit. For 24 V dc racks, connect the + and - terminals
to the DC power source.
Do not use the top screw for power connections; it secures the terminal block
connections before applying power.
Verify
26 . Connect an earth ground wire to the rack mounting bracket as shown in figure 3-2. (Typically this
ground wire is the green wire from the ac power source.)
Ensure that aI1 exposed wiring is either under the screw-down plate of the terminals or
insulated by shrink tubing or sleeves.
27 . The terminals labeled +24 V dc and -24 V dc provide 24 V dc @ 100 mA for connection
external sensor (not on IC61OCHSlOl).
to an
28 . The two remaining terminals are used with the RUN indicator.
Use of this standard feature on all

racks is optional. It can be used to drive an external indication of the functional state of this rack.
The Run relay is closed when the CPU is scanning (not on IC61OCHSlOl).
29 . If the Run indication
is desired, it can be wired separately to an external indicator (light, bell,

whistle, etc.) or in series with other racks. Follow steps 24-25 above for guidance on connecting
these wires. Then replace the plastic cover.
If0 Field Wiring

30 . Recommended wire size for connection to the I/O modules is stranded AWG No. 12 (0.65~2mm)
wire. Two wires per terminal are possible with AWG No. 14 (0.65.1.6mm) wire.
31 . Strip 0.3 i 0.05 inches (8 * 1.5mm) from each wire to be connected to the I/O modules or install a
No. 6 insulated lug (ringed or forked). Bare wire co~ections
are recommended
for multiple wire
co~ections
to one terminal.
32 . Carefully remove plastic covers over I/0 terminal
sliding it to right or left.
co~ections
by lifting top or bottom leg and
33 . starting with the lower terminals, connect the field wires to all UO terminals. Power connections
such as those to commons (C) should be made last. No co~ections
are required to unused circuits;
however, screws on unused terminals should be tightened.
Instdlation
3-11
GEK-90842
34. For 16 point I/O modules that connect to I/O through a connector on the faceplate,
connector on the I/O Interface cable to the connector on the module.
secure the
Ensure that wires to the top set of terminals do not extend beyond the screw-down plate.
Any wire exposed before the terminal plate must be covered by shrink tubing or sleeves.
35. Wires should be laced together to leave a service loop adequate for removal of I/O modules without
discoMecting wires. See figure 3-11. After testing of I/O wiring, replace plastic covers.
a4001 7
Figure 3-11. Typical Routing of I/O Wiring

Programmer
36 . The hand-held programmer (catalog no. IC61OPRGlOO or IC61OPRG105) can be placed over the
CPU and power supply for permanent or temporary mounting. Its connector fits into the receptacle
on the CPU and it snap locks onto the power supply.
37 . If an extender cable is used with the programmer, it should be installed next or when required. One
end of the cable has a push tab (see figure 3-12). This end is connected to the programmer (see
figure 3-13). The other end is connected to the 26.pin coMector on the CPU. Both ends m keyed
for proper instaIlation. The red edge of the ribbon cable is installed up at both ends.
Installation
342
GEK-90842
a40163
Figure 342. Pull Tab on Programmer Cable

NOTE
For proper noise immunity, it is recommended that the extender cable be used on a temporary
basis and not permanently installed with the programmer.
38.
TO installthe programmer
of the power supply and
directly onto the CPU, align the programmer

gently push down to engage snap locks.
on the outside dimensions
To ensure proper. CPU operation, it is recommended that the programmer not be connected
nor disconnected with ac power applied.
83-pc-35m m-4-3-3 1a
Figure 3-13. Installation of Programmer Cable
Installation
3-13
39. The Programmer Mount Assembly (catalog no. IC610PRG190) can be used when installing the
hand-held programmer on the outside of a panel or console, or can be used as a table top stand for
the programmer.
Figure 3-14 shows how to install the mounting assembly. The CPU/Programmer
cable must be ordered separately.
a40148
*cABLEwsTBE
OmEREDsEPARAELY
Figure 3114. Programmer Mount Assembly
Power Supply Limitations for Racks

If the power supply in either a CPU or expansion rack should become overloaded, unpredictable system
operation may occur. To ensure that this does not happen, the total current capabilities of the modules
placed in the rack must not exceed the current carrying capabilities of the rack power supply.
Units of Load
The power used by each module is expressed in (units of load), where 1 unit equals 10 mA. Calculations are based on the worst case condition with all inputs and outputs on. Table 3-4 list the units of
load supplied by each rack, and table 3-5 is a list of units of load used by each module.
When
configuring a rack, note the units of load supplied, then add the total units of load used by the modules
you have selected. The total units of load for the modules must not exceed the total units of load
supplied by the rack. If they do, the system should be redesigned.
3-14
Installation
GEK-90842
Table 3-4. Units of Load Supplied by Rack

CATALOG
NUMBER
POWER SUPPLIED IN UNITS OF LOAD

RACK DESCRIPTION
+s v
+9 v
+24v
+24VExtemaI
*If an external sensor is connected to the 24 V + and - terminals on the power supply, the current used
by the sensor (up to the maximum of 100 mA), should be deducted from the available listed units of
load.
Table 3-S. Units of Load Used by Modules
CATALOG
NUMBER
IC6lOCPUlOl
IC61OCPU104
IC61OCPU105
IC61OCPU106
IC610PRGlOO
IC61OPRG105
IC61OMDLlOl
IC61OMDL103
IC61OMDL104
IC61OMDL105
IC61OMDL106
IC61OMDL107
IC61OMDLllO
IC61OMDLlll
IC61OMDLll2
IC6lOMDLll5
IC61OMDL124
IC61OMDL125
IC6lOMDL126
IC61OMDL127
IC61OMDL135
IC6lOMDL151
IC61OMDL153
IC61OMDLl54
IC61OMDL155
IC61OMDLI ,-:
IC61OMDL157
L
MODULE DESCRIPTION
CPU
CPU25
CPU
CPU
Programmer
Programmer
24 V dc Sir& Input (8)
24 V dc In/Out (4/4)
24 v dc In/Relay out (4/4)
Thumbwheel Interhce
24 V dc Sink In wm
(16)
24 V dc Sink Load In (16)
High Speed Counter
24 V dc ac/dc Input (8)
24 V ac/dc Source In (16)
Fmt Resgonse UO (4/2)
m Simllatm (8) Inputs
115 V ac Input (8)
115vacIsolatedIIpt(4)
230 V ac Input (8)
UL, 115 V ac Input (6)
24 V dc Sink Output (8)
24V&2ASinkOut(4)
24 v dc sink/Soum! out (4)
34 V dc Source Output (8)
G. -J dc Sink Out W/WEDS(16)
I 24VdcShkOutw/LEDs(16)
POWER USED IN UNITS OF LOAD

+s v
25
m
25
25
6
6
+9v
+24V
I)
5
5
1
2
20
1
3
3
7
1
13
8
1
1
1
1
1
2
10
7
6
9
24
23
m
6
11
1
0
10
Installation
345
GEL90842
Table 36. Units of Load Used by Modules - Continued

CATALOG
NUMBER
IC61OMDL158
IC61OMDLl75
IC61OMDL176
Ic61oMDL18o
IC61OMDL181
IC61OMDL1.82
IC61OMDL185
IC61OCCM105
IC61OCCMllO
IC61OCCMlll
IC6lOPERlSl
IC61OPER154
IC609CTUlOO
MODULE DESCRIPTION
POWER
USEDINUNITSOF
LOAD
+s v
+P v
+24 V
24 V dc Source Out w/LEDs (16)

115/230 V ac Output (8)
115/230 v ac Isolated OUT (4)
Relay Output (8)
UL, Relay Output (5)
Relay Output (16)
UL, 115 V ac Output (6)
I/Ok&Local
I/O Ihk Remote
PROM Writer Unit
1 unit of load = 10 m4.
Calculations
are based on the worst case, that is, all inputs and outputs on.
Safety Considerations
When planning the layout of a system, safety should be a prime consideration.
System planning should
include procedures and methods to ensure the physical safety of personnel, the Series One or One Plus
Those personnel who are involved in the
system and the equipment or process being controlled.
planning and installation of a system should be familiar with all local and national electrical codes as
well as installation instructions in this manual.
All practices should be followed that are specified by the IEEE (Institute of Electrical
Engineers) Standard 510 which includes tray and conduit spacing and wiring procedures.
standard can be obtained by writing:
and Electronic
A copy of this
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers

345 East 47th Street
New York, NY 10017
Recommended Field Wiring Procedures

The following Drocedures are recommended
_ _ when runnine. field wiring:
Low-level $nal
wires should be separated fkom other yfield wiring.
AC power wiring should be separated from DC field wiring.

.
Wiring should not be routed near devices causing electrical interference.
If severe noise problems are present, additional power supply filtering or an isolation transformer may
be required. Contact your GE Fanuc Automation sales representative if assistance is required.
Proper grounding should be provided to minim& hazards to personnel.
Label all I/O wires. Circuit numbers or other identification can also be marked on the cover over the
wire terminals on each ?!O module.
I/O wires should be no larger than No. 12 AWG.
Chapter
PC Operation
4-l
GEK-90842
Introduction to PC Operation
After completing the installation procedures described in the previous chapter, your Series One or Series
One Plus PC is ready for operation. This chapter describes the operation sequences for those PCs. A
description of the features and functions of the programmer are the basis for the information in this
chapter. The last portion of this chapter describes the operation of peripheral devices that can be used
with the Series One or Series One Plus. The information in this chapter will allow you to become
familiar with the programmer keys and the keystroke sequences required for the various programmer
operations.
Programmer
The hand-held programmer (figure 4-l), when connected to a PC by one of the three methods described
in the previous chapter, can be used for entering a new program, examining a previously entered
program, editing (changing) a previously entered program if required, monitoring the status of input or
output points, displaying the contents of registers, and displaying timer or counter accumulated values.
In addition, with the Series One Plus, a password can be entered with the programmer to protect the
contents of your program from unauthorized or inadvertent entry or changing. Its features and functions
are described in the following paragraphs. For detailed descriptions of the programming functions, refer
to programming, Chapter 5.
a41 927
ADDRESS/
-AlmESSDAlAON OFF
STATUS
DISPLAY
LOGIC
DISPLAY
(r
Le-a
RUN
;R
II I
@++
pM4
7ZR
Sk
Sk
CL
S:T
OlpTAIII
Nib
iii
R:l
R:G
BAT1
( I(
LOGIC
KEYS
DATA
OP ERATION
KEYS
RUN ff?G LOMJ
SHIFTED
FUNCTION
KEYS
T#E
MODE
SWITCH
PERIPHERAL
NXT
cl
JACK 6
Figure 4-l.
b6 EDITING
Programmer
Features
KEYS
42I
PC Operation
GEK-90842
Programmer Features
The programmer features shown in the illustration on the previous page are described in this section.
The descriptions of the features are keyed to the numbers (1 to 8) next to each feature in the illustration.
1 . Mode Switch
This is a three-position keyswitch used for selecting the operating mode of the PC. This switch can
be repositioned at any time as necessary without disrupting AC power. The left position (RUN)
allows program execution with outputs enabled.
The CPU scans its stored logic and allows
timer/counter and relay contacts to be displayed. However, in the Run mode, changes to the logic
are not allowed. In the center (PRG or Program) position, new programs can be entered and
previously entered logic can be altered; however, no solving of the logic is performed.
The right
(LOAD) position connects the programmer to an external device such as a tape recorder through the
adjacent tape port. Logic is not solved while in the LOAD position.
If a version A or B (IC610CPUlOlA OR IC61OCPUlOlB) CPU IS installed, the Series One

programmable controller will always power up in the run (operating) mode unless a
programmer is connected and the programmer is in the program or load mode.
2 . Address Data Display
This is a four digit display used to indicate either the address, in decimal format, of where
display is in the user program stored in the PCs memory or reference data used as a part of
logic. To indicate that addresses are being displayed, periods appear near the bottom and to
right of each digit (for example, 0.1.2.3.). The LED to the top right behind ADR will also be
3 . Status Display
These five LEDs are energized to indicate the following
functions
the
the
the
lit.
or status of the Series One:
ON/OFF When in the Run mode, this LED indicates the status of discrete Eferences (I/O, internal coils, and shift
register stages). It is ON when a refance is energizd and OFF when de-energized..
RUN
ON when in the RUN mode and CPU is solving logic.
BATT
ON when the voltage of tbe intemal lithium battery, which is used for maintaining the program stored in
CMOS memory during no-power conditions, is at a low level and should be r~+placedwithin 10 days - see
Chapter 7. This LED is OFF when battery voltage is OK, or battery is disconnected.
PWR
ON when the internal power supply is producing DC power. If OFF the rack power supply should be
check4 - see Chapter 7.
CPU
ON when internal error checking has detected a fault in internal hardware - see Chapter 7.
The above four LEDs (RUN, BATT, PWR and CPU) duplicate the operation of the indicators on
the CPU when tie programmer is installed.
4 . Logic Display
These sixteen LEDs are used to indicate the type of logic entered into memory. While being
programmed, they reflect the logic selected by the user prior to actual entry into CPU memory. For
definition of the f!irst 12 LEDs fknctions, see key definitions under 5 below. The 4 LEDs to the
right have special functions as follows:
ADR
ON when display is indicating an adchss value. Tbe address is displayed in decimal notation, beginning at
0000 and ending at the last anntess in the user program or a maximum 6f I723 (maximum number of M-bit
words in memory is 1724).
43m
PC Operation
GE&90842
SHF
DAIX
REG
ON when operator has selected the Shift key and is an indication that future key selections will be based
upon the upper key labels. Sbifi function will remain in effect until either the Enter or C&xr key is selected_
(Series One Plus only) On when monitoring the contents of a rqister and the AddxW/Data display contains
the data @digit BCD value) in that register. The contents of 2 consecutive Ilegimers will be displayed.
(Series One Plus only) On when monitoring the contents of a register and the ackkss of the selected register
is displayed. The display can be alternated between REG and DATA by depressing MON.
These sixteen LEDs can also indicate the status of 16 consecutive I/O states when used with the
monitor function discussed later in this chapter. The numerals above the alphabetical characters are
used during this function.
5 . Logic Keys
These twelve keys are used to select the required function and enter logic when in the Program
mode.
The upper labels are used to enter numerical values when preceded by the Shift key.
Numerical values, when entered, are viewed in the Address Data display. The decimal point is used
only for the entry of timer preset values in tenths of a second. The Monitor function will be
discussed below as part of the Upper Case keys. The f&nction of the lower or normal case labels on
these keys is described in the following key discussion.
Places logic such as two contacts or two groups of contacts in series (see figure 4-2). Power flow must be
possible through both elements before it will be passed to the next element.
Places logic such as two contacts or two groups of contacts in parallel (see figure 4-3). Power flow can be
possible through either (or both) elements before it will be passed to the next element.
OR
A-,..,,,,,,,J
L rr--rrr----a
Figure 4-2. Series Logic (AND)
NOT
OUT
Figure 4-3. Parallel Logic (OR)
Begins (Stats) a new group of logic and stores current logic results into a Last h Krst Out (UFO)
pushdown stack.
hverts the state of the refenzxed status to create a normally closed contact. NOT AND results in a normally
closed series e
NOT OR rest& in a norrually ched parallel contact.
Specifiestbe end of a stzing of logic by entering a coil. With a valid reference, such as OUT 19, this coil will
reflect the output of the rung of relay logic by turning ON or OFF as dictated by the pow- flow. Outputscan
be paralleled by enteringadditionalOUT fbnctio~ at the end of a rung of lc-_ ;.
44D
PC Operation
GEK-90842
TMR
Specifies a timer function to end a rung of logic. The timer requires a unique 6XX reference for storage.
Two types can be programmed (seconds and tenths of seconds) depending upon the numerical preset (with or
without decimal point) entered after the 6XX reference. For example, 0.9 or 9.0 seconds can be programmed,
depending on the ciecimal point.
CNT
Specifies a counter fhction to end two logic rungs. The two logic rungs requirtd by this function are count
and reset. Count, being the tap rung of conditional logic. When all programmed conditions permit power
flow, the counter will begin counting. The bottom rung is the reset rung and is programmed with the
conditional logic required for resetting the counter. The counter also requires a unique 6xX reference for
storage. Transition detection is a stand& built-in function.
SR
Specises a Shift Register function to end three logic rungs (input, clock, and reset). The reference used with
SR (for example, SR 410) is the first stage of this shift register. The last stage must be entered immediately
after the SR and its reference. A shift register can contain a total of 128 steps or several shift registers can be
programmed, each with a di&rent number of steps, as long as the total of 128 steps is not exceeded
MCS
The MCS (Master Control Start) key specifies the beginning of a Master Control relay function. This
provides an efficient method of programming for controlling large quantities of coils if a specific permissive
condition is not satisfied_
MCR
The MCR (Master Control Reset) key sped& the end of a Master Control relay function. A similar number
of MCRs must be entered to terminate, one at a time, the Master Control Start functions entered. One MCR
terminates only one p~vious MCS function.
SET
Used with latches, shift registers, and coils. It specifies where latches are to be turned ON (set), shift register
stages set to the ON state, or coils to be turned ON and not affected by internal reference 376 (disable all
outputs).
RST
Performs functions similar to the SET key for latches, shift registers, and coils, except it specifies when these
references will be turned OFF (reset).
6 Editing Keys
These eight keys select the action required to modify either the stored logic within the CPU or the
logic address being displayed. Those keys that can modify previously entered logic (that is, Delete
and Insert) require a confirming key operation to ensure that the operation is to be executed. Thus, if
they are accidentally depressed, the error can be corrected by depressing the CLR (Clear) key
without actually affecting any entered logic. A description of each editing key is as follows:
DEL
When logic is being displayed, tbis key (Delete) when included as the fhst keystroke of a two key sequence,
will cause that single function to be moved (deleted) fium the CPU memory. To be effective, after
depressing Delete, the PRV (Previous) key must be depressed, which executes the delete operation.
INS
This key (Insert) flows logic functions to be inserted between existing logic functions. The function or its
~sthatisafterthelocationatwhichtbeoewfunctionistobeplacedisnisplayed.
Thenthenewlogicis
built followed by the Insert key (not the Enter key) and the conhnhg NXT (Next) key. Ihe new logic that
is inserted by this key sequence will be placed in memory immediately before the displayed function or
addZ&
ENT
The ENT (Enter) key is used to complete the entry of logic when initially building the CPU program or to
replace an e&e single woTdfunction Logic functions are entered typically at the end of the existing logic.
45(I
PC Operation
GEL90842
CLR
The CLR (Clear) key, when select& clears the programmer of previously enuzd commands. If error codes
are displayed, this key will aclmowledge the error and return the programmer to its normal (cleared) function.
When monitoring a program, depressing Clear will cause the display to indicate the memary address in lieu
of logic functions. When the key sequence CLR, SHF, 3,4,8, DEL, MCI is erasred, tbe enth contents of
memory will be cleared.
NOTE
This key sequence should be used with caution, be sure that you want to clear the entire program.
Remember, if single functions or groups of functions are to be cleared, the DEL key, followed by
PRV should be selected for each function to be cleared.
SHF
This key (Shift) locks all other keys to their shifted (upper label) functions and causes the SHF LED to be lit
in the display area. The shift opemtion is ended by selecting the keys Clear or Enter. The SHF key must
precede a numerical key or a group of numerals before selecting the numerical keys. For example to enter an
open contact with input reference 12 as the first contact in a rung of logic, the key sequence would be SIR,
SHF, 1,2, ENT.
SCH
This key (Search) allows the entire program to be searched for specific logic functions. The logic function is
defined by the logic keys (without Enter), then Search is selected. The memory will be searched from the
current location until either a match is found or all memory is searched. Successive depressions of this key
will cause repeated searches with memory wrap-around. An unsuccessful search results in error code E99
being displayed.
PRV
When displaying logic or monitoring I/O state, selecting the PRV (Previous)B key causes the previous logic
function or I/O status to be displayed. Additional depressions of this key cause the display to decrement until
memory address zero is reached.
NXT
When displaying logic or monitoring I/O state, selecting the NXT (Next) key causes the next logic function
or I/O status to be displayed. Additional depressions of this key cause the display to increment until the end
of memory is reachezL
7. Shifted Functions
The Shift key, when selected, causes most keys to change their function to those marked on the face
of the programmer directly above the correspbnding keys. Normal unshifted functions are as placed
Most of the shifted functions are used when entering numerical values
on the keys themselves.
(digits O-9 plus the decimal point). When entering a program, the unshifted functions must be
selected first (AND, OR, NOT, OUT, TMR, etc.), then the SHF is selected to enter the numerical
portion of the program. The use of the other four shifted tictions
are as follows:
MON
When in the Run mode, this fhction allows the user to monitor the m
of I/O ndhxxes in two successive
groups of 8. The specified I/O reference is used to select the fust 8 referezxxs d the next group in
numerical sequence is also shown to provide a total of 16 real time m.
The specified xlefiexenceshould
be the first refhwe in a group of 8, for example, specify 10 to mcmitor the I/O group 10 to 17. If a reference
otherthan~first~inagroupisspecifiedmonitaringoftbeI/Owill&~ttotbefirst~~renceinthe
group. After the refemace (for example 043) is entered and displayed (for example 040) as ristn. the status of
the 8 references in that group (for example 040447) are displayed by the first 8 Ts
(AND, OR, STR, etc.)
in tbe logic display.
W ~lext 8 references (e.g. 050) are also displayed and their status is indicated by tbe last 8 LEDs (MCS,
MCR, SET, etc.). These 16 LEDs will be ON or OFF as the I/O assigned to these dzences is energized or
de-eoergized As the x/o changes, the state of the LEDs changes.
m
46
PC Operation
GE&90842
To display another group of I/O refenxxes, the PRV or NXI key can be selected to decrement (40,30,20,
etc.) or increment (50,60,70, etc.) the group number and its associated refe=nces. Ref&ences up to 577 can
be displayed; there is automatic wrap-around from 570 to 000 (NXT) or 000 to 570 (PRV). The cumznt
values of timers and countem can also be monitored by entering TMR or CNT, SHF, 6n (timer or counter
reference) followed by MON (the Monitor Key).
WRITE
This function operates with an audio tape cassette recorder or certain other peripherals to effect a transfer of
the CPUs logic to the peripheral. Connect the device to the tape port with the audio cable supplied with each
programmer or peripheral. Set the mode switch to LOAD and turn the device ON. To begin the transfer,
select the WRITE key. This starts the writing of the CPU logic onto the cassette or other peripheral. For
more detailed information on transferring data to peripheral devices, refer to the discussion of each peripheral .
READ
This function operates with the audio tape cassette recorder or other peripheral to load a CPUs memory from
the cassette or other storage device. Connect the device to the tape port with the audio cable supplied with
each programmer or peripheral. Set the mode switch to LOAD and select the READ key. To begin the CPU
loading, turn the device ON. This starts the reading of the tape and the loading of the stored program into the
CPU memory.
CHECK
This function operates with the audio tape recorder or other peripheral to verify proper program transfer.
After a transfer is made, it should be & back similar to the READ above; however, the CHECK key must
be selected instead of READ. The Check operation does not alter either the CPU logic nor the data in the
peripheral. A data compare is made between the two sow
of information to ensure that there has been no
error in the nzording process.
1*
WP
Data Operanon Keys

These two keys are used during entering the data operations when programming
the Series One Plus

PC. These keys have no effect when this programmer (Catalog no. IC610PRGi05)
is used to
program a Series One PC. The function of each of these keys is described below.
F
This key must be depressed before a 2digit value corresponding to the data operation or Function to be
performed (for example, F50, F62, F74, F82, etc.). A complete list of the data operations and their Function
number can be found in Chapter 5, Programming. The shift key does not need to be depressed immediately
before the fWction numbers as must be done when selecting other numerical values when programming a
Series One or Series One Plus PC.
Ibis key serves a dual function, in that it is used to select either a data register or a Timer/Counter
accumulated value qister, or a group reference number when programming data operations. A register is
operated on as a word (16 bits) in the Series One Plus PC. When a 3digit data nsgister reference (400 to
577) is specified, two cmsecutive 8-bit registers are actually selected to write data to or read data from. For
example, if R followed by the reference 410 is entered, registers 410 and 411 are selected for that data
operation. If R 6 10 were entered, the accumulated value register for the timer or counter assigned to that
ref&rencewouldbespec&dinadataoperaticm.
UnusedT/Cre~~~,600-673canbeusedasdata
II?giWrs.
A register can be qxified to contain a Timer or Counter preset value. In this case the register reference (R
xxx) is specified immediately following the Timer or Counter reference wkn programming a Timer or
Counter.
A group reference is a 1, or 2 digit r&zence corqxmding
to the first 1 or 2 digits of a group of 8
consecutive dismete references. These references can be ti I/D points, intemal coils, or shift rq&ters. For
example, if the R key followed by 37 is enmwi, the reference is to dixrete points 370 thmgh 377. If R 5 is
entez=& the refemce is to I/O paints 050 tlumgh 067 (W-057 and 060-067).
47m
PC Operation
GEK-90842
9. Peripheral Jack
This is a serial port which allows connection
of an audio cassette tape recorder to record (save) the

user memory, verify the contents of a tape against the contents of user memory,
and load a program stored on tape into user memory. It is recommended that programs entered into
user memory be saved on tape, once they have been verified as being correct. Note that when
recording a Series One Plus program on tape, the contents of the data registers are not saved.
prOgram
Stored
in
Program Checking and Error Codes

When entering ladder logic programs with the programmer, the CPU automatically performs many
checks on the data and operations selected by the programmer.
Functions entered are checked for
proper key sequence, proper range of references entered, etc. Errors detected during these checks ax
indicated in the data display by the letter E followed by a two digit code (01-99). The CPU also
performs a partial program error check any time that the PC is switched to the RUN mode. After
entering a program a manual error check should be performed, which checks the entire program.
Table 4-1 summarizes the meaning of each error code, its cause, and possible methods of clearing the
error. The use of the programmer to enter logic is documented in Chapter 5 as part of programming.
However, there are many other valuable functions it provides which are shown in the following table:
Table 4-l. Error
Code Definitions
Applicable Mode
Code Run Prog Load
X
SigllifiCaIlCe
Cause
Corrective Action
El
E2
Fault inPmgmm Strut- CPU has detected ezror in proture. Series One.
gram when placed into RUN
mode. Example: Input module
reference used as coil
Go to Program mode. Depress

CLR. Address of faulty logic will
be shown. Depress NXT to display contexx
E2
Fault in Program Strut- CPU has detected error in proture. Series One Plus. gram when placed into RUN
mode. Example: Input module
Ileference used as coil.
Go to Program mode. Depress

Address of
CLR-SCH-CLR.
faulty logic will be shown. Depress NXT to display content.
E3
Stack Capacity Exceed- More than eight status levels at- Go to Program mode. Depress
ed
tempted to be stored in pushdown CLR. Programmer will display
location of first 9th STR error.
stack
Examine logic and reprogram as
==ssary*
E5
Duplicate
ence
Incomct opemtion
Operator attempted to perform il- Examine operation.

Depress
legal operation such as changing CLR. Reinitiate proper function.
program in RUN mode.
Coil Refer- Coil (output, intemd, timer, or GO to Program mobe. Depress

c0unter) used as an OUT more CLR. Programmer will display
location of SecOnd coil of pair usthan once.
ing same r&%nce. Enter another
coil retice.
I
48I
PC Operation
GEK-90842
Table 4-l. Error Code Definitions - Continued

Applicable Mode
Code Run Prog Load
SigXliiiClD~
Corrective Action
Cause
E6
Incomplete
Control
E7
Irmmplete Counter or Ail control lines not provided to Go to Program mode.
Master More MCR references than MCS Go to Program mode. Depress

CIR.
Programmer will display
in program.
first unmatched MCR. Correct
program by deleting MCR or adding MCS.
Shift Register.
E8
E9
E21
Incorrect Operation.
Operator attempted to write in- Depress CIR.

struction on second word of a
2-word instruction.
Incomplete Logic.
Relay ladder line not connected to Go to Program Mode. Depress

coil; relay contact(s) left incorn- CLR. Programmer wiIl display
first unfinished logic element.
plete or hanging.
Add logic to tie this element into
stored logic, or delete element(s)
to remove incomplete logic.
Memory Full.
Operator attempting to add logic Depress CLR. Restrucm

program so that lo@ limits will not
to CPU already at limit.
be exceeded.
Parity Failure.
CPU has detected a fault in the Go to Load Mode. Depress CLR.

parity structure of its internal Reload memory from previously
recorded tape or clear entire memmemory.
ory and reload manually.
If
BAIT light not ON and fault cannot be cleared, replace CPU module .
El1
Depress
one or more Counters and/or Shift CLR. Programmer will display
Registers.
errant function. Add required reset, clock or clear lines.
E25
Faulty Comparison.
External device such as tape cas- Depr~s CIR. Verify cornxt prosette has content that does not gram number or tape. If corr~%,
either re-record tape or reload
agree with CPU memory.
CPU.
E28
We& R#zo!rd SignaL
Playback Signal level, such as Adjust volume level on tape refrom tape recorder, is below ac+ corder or other peripheral device.
If ON steady for extended period
ceptable level.
of time, restart function to obtain
reIiable operation.
unsuccessflll search,
Search function has reviewed all Depress CIR. To cause an addimemory 8nd has not located re- tional search, re-enter fun&or
andquirea
E99
Operation Sequences
An understanding of the basic PC operation sequences is necessary in order to effectively and efficiently
enter ladder diagram programs. You should be familiar with the use of each key, alone and in sequence
49I
PC Operation
GE&90842
with other keys. The programmer is an excellent tool for program entering, editing and monitoring.
Table 4-2 lists the various operations, the keystrokes required to enter those operations, and the mode or
modes in which the operation can be performed. Each of the modes is indicated by a letter, R (RUN), P
(PROGRAM), or L (LOAD).
Table 4-2. PC Operation Sequences

MODE
Keystrokes or Operation Sequence
OpWt.i0n
bsert or Remove Key
Clear all user memory
CLR SHF 3 4 8 DEL N-XI
Display present address
CLR
Display present function
X
X
Next function
NXT(After previous keystroke)
previous function
PRV
Go to address 0000 in progxam memory
SHF Nxr
Go to specific address
SHF (&dress)
Go to next address
After previous entry NXI
* x
NXT
clear displayed function

Search for a specific function
(Function)
Search for a specific reference number
SHF (Ref. No.) SCH NXT
Insert function before the displayed

function (or address)
(Function)
cancel insert
CLRSHF INS
Delete a function
(address) DEL PRV
Check program for errors. If no error

detected, the next available address is
displayed.
CLR SCH
Turn Timer/Counter ON
Turn Timer/Counter OFF
TMR or CNT SHF 6XX SET

TMR or CNT SHF 6xX RST
x .
Change preset value of a Timer or Counter SHF (p-t
SHF (Ref. No.) SCH NXT
SHF (Ref. No.) INS NXT
value) ENT
Monitor ON/OFF mtus of a ~~QIQof 16 SHF (Beginning Ref. No.) MON

consecutive Iefen33ces (VO, intemal coils,
Shift Register coils
Monitor Timer or Counter accumulated

value
SHF (T/C No.) MON To monitor the previous or next

T/C enter, PRV or NXT
Monitor ON/OFF state of any coil or

contact
TheONOFFr-EDtumsONorOFFtoindicatetbestate
of the displayed Rfmnce.
SET SHF (Ref. No.) ENT Refizrence can be Input,

Output$hift Register, Timer or Counter
by user logic)
v
Force a mfezence ON (will be ovetiti
4-10
PC Operation
GEK-90842
Table 4-2.PC Operation Sequences - Continued
Keystrokes or Operation Sequence
OptXation
Force a reference OFF (will be overridden RST SHF (Ref. No.) ENT
by user logic)
I
Enter a fhnction into program memory
I (Function) SHF (Ref. No.) ElNT
1x1
Editaprogram
I Same as above. Select address and enter change
1x1
Transfer data to tape
( tionalpqram
lop
Load program memory from tape

Verify data on tape or in PROM writer
RAM against program memory
~~
( tionalprogram
lop
(OptionalpIogram
ID) SHF WRITE

ID) SHF READ
ID) SHF CHECK
*
Ix
1 1 -12
I I I
SERIES ONE PLUS ONiY

Monitor contents of Data Registers (1)
Monitor text register
Monitor previous register
Enter or change the contents of displayed
register. A 4 digit BCD value can be
entered (Wbits).
Enter or change a password (2) (3)
Log in sequence (3)
Log out sequence (3)
IR (Register Ref) SHF
MON
l=T
IN=
IxxxxE?NTNxr
ICLR
SHF
9876
DEL
SHF 5678 DEL

(Password) ENT NXT
T CLR
SHF
SHF
SHF 1234 DEL NXT
1x1
1x1
SHF XxXx ENT When the data contents are

displayed, this sequence will overwrite the current
contents of the register
CLR
1x1
I
I
x
xI xI
I I I
lxlxl
1. When the MON key is selected, the ADDRESS DATA display shows the address of the specified
register. To display the data contents of the register, depress the MON key again.
2. 9876 is a f&d sequence. The password (XXXX) can be any numerical value between 0001 and
9999. The value 0000 is equivalent to no password. All programmer functions are operable when
the password is 0000.
3. Password information also applies to the Series One Model E PC.

The above table provides a convenient reference to the programmer keystrokes required for the various
PC operations. A more detailed description of each operation is provided on the following pages or in
Chapter 5, Programming.
Monitor CPU Logic - This sequence of operation provides the steps required in order to observe the
contents of user memory. You can either step forward or backward in user memory. With the
Programmer installed and the mode switch in the Run or PRG (Program) position, observe or perform
the following actions:
1. The programmer will display address zero indicated by four zero digits in the display with decimal
points to the right of each digit (O.O.O.O.),and the ADR LED lit.
2 . Depress the NXI key, the logic content of memory location zero will be shown (beginning of
memory or scan).
PC Operation
4-11
GEK-90842
3 . Successive
4.
5.
6.
7.
depressions of the NXT key will cause the programmer to step through the stored
program in the order that the program is scanned, from address O.O.O.O.to the last address in the
program. At any time, the CLR key can be depressed to display the address of the logic then being
viewed.
An additional depression of the NX key will restore the display to the logic content.
At any time, depressing PRV will cause the logic of the previous (closer to zero) memory location
to be displayed.
Successive depressions of PRV will cause the programmer to step backwards through the stored
program in reverse of the order that the program is scanned. At location O.O.O.O.,PRV has no effect.
If by successive depressions of NXT, the end of the actual program is passed, the display will show
End. With each successive selection (with the NXI or PRV keys) of an unprogrammed or empty
memory word, the address of the new location will flash in the display for l/4 to l/3 of a second
prior to going to End.
Search CPU Logic - In the event that you wish to quickly fkd a particular logic element (programming
step) in user memory, this sequence of operation allows you to do so. After installing the programmer,
with the mode switch in the RUN or PRG position, observe or perform the following actions:
1 . The programmer will display address zero indicated by four zero digits in the display, decimal
2 . Enter the logic function whose location is to be searched for. For example, select AND, SHF, 1, 0,
5 (AND 105). Do not select ENT key.
3 . Select the SCH key to begin the search. If the logic function is not found, error code E99 will be
displayed.
4 . If a match is found, the display will indicate the first memory address containing the desired
function. Depressing NXT will cause the logic at that address to be displayed.
5 . Successive depression of SCH, while the memory address is being displayed, will cause additional
searches to occur from the current location.
6 . As long as one match is found, the search will not stop at the end of memory, but will continue with
memory address zero until a match (possibly the same location) is again detected.
7 . To find the first empty memory word, depress CLR to obtain an address location. Then select SCH
(search for zero content) to begin the search for the first available location.
Alter One Logic Element - This sequence of operation allows you to change the contents of a particular
bcation in user memory. After installing the programmer,
Observe or perform the following actions:
place the mode switch in the PRG position.
1. The programmer will display address zero indicated by four zero digits in the display, with decimal
2 . Move the display to the element to be altered using the NXT or PRV key or Search function.
3 . Enter the new logic element, for example: OR, SHF, 2, and 5 (OR 25).
4 . Select the Enter (ENT) key to cause the change to occur. The new logic element you have entered
will take the place of the previous logic at that memory location.
The next address will be
automatically displayed.
5 . If the new element is not to be entered or an error has been made in its constiction,
depressing the
Clear (CLR) key will cancel the new logic and return the display to the address of the examined
element.
4-12
PC Operation
GEK-90842
Delete One Logic Element - This sequence of operation allows you to remove one logic element from
the program
position.
A
in user memory.
After installing
the programmer,
place the mode switch in the PRG
Observe or perform the following actions:
2 . Move the display to the element to be deleted using the NXT or PRV key or the Search function.
3 . Select the DEL key. Notice that the Address/Data display has a small d in the left digit of the
display.
4 . To confirm that the Delete operation is to be executed, select the PRV key. The next address will be
displayed after the Delete is performed. The remaining user logic will automatically move back one
address location (nearer to 0.0.0.0.) to fill the empty memory.
5 . To cancel the Delete operation, select the CLR key (before selecting DEL). The display will revert
to the element being considered for deletion.
Clear All Memory - This programmin g sequence should only be used when the entire contents of logic
memory m to be cleared. After installing the programmer, place the mode switch in the PRG position.
Observe or perform the following
actions:
2 . Select the key sequence CLR, SHF, 3,4, 8.
3 . Select the DEL key; the display will change to.
4 . To execute the clear function and cause all logic elements to be removed from user memory,
depress the NXT key.
5 . To cancel the clear function, the CLR key can be depressed before depressing NX?.
1
insert One Logic Element - This sequence of operation allows you to insert one logic element between
two existing program steps in the use program. After installing the programmer, place the mode switch
in the Program position. Observe or perform the following actions:
2 . Move the display to the element that will be after the location at which the new element is to be
entered. This can be done by using the NXT or PRV key or the Search function.
3 . Enter the new logic element, for example; AND, SHF, 1, 0, and 4 (AND 104).
4 . Select the Insert (INS) key to cause the change to occur. Notice that the address display has a small
i in the left digit of the display.
5 . A con-g
keystroke is required to ensure that the insert action by the operator is valid. To
co&m
the insert, select the NXT key. After the insert is performed, the display will show the
address of the next logic element.
Monitor r/O Status - This operation sequence allows you to monitor the status (ON or OFF) of
references. A total of 16 I/O references can be monitored at any one time, beginning with the lowest
address in the group with the reference selected by the operator. Each reference is within a group of 8
references. The I/O status of the group containing the selected reference, plus the next higher group of
8, is displayed. After installing the programmer, place the mode switch in the RUN position. Observe
or perform the following actions:
1. The programmer will display the address zero indicated by four zero digits in the display, with
decimal poims iu the right of each digit (O.O.O.O.),and the ADR LED lit.
2. Enter any reference to be .monitored. For example, to monitor the real time status of references
020~027, or any one reference within that group, the following keys can be selected: SHF, 2 and 0.
PC Operation
4-13
GEK-90842
3. Select the Monitor function (MON). Note that the shift is still in effect (selected in previous
step)
causing the RST key to select the monitor function.

4. The display will revert to 1-3 followed by the lowest reference (e.g. 020) in that group. The I/O
references can be for a 4,8, or 16 point module. If the module is a 4-point module, the status of the
first 4 I/O points are real world outputs and their operating s-s
will be displayed. The 4 higher
references cannot be used as real world outputs, but can be assigned to internal coils. The 4 monitor
LEDs normally assigned to the 4 higher references in this group will always be OFF.
The status of an 8 point module (for example, 030 to 037) is indicated by the first 8 LEDs (AND,
OR, STR, .. .. SR) and the next modules status, if an 8 point (for example, 040-047) will be
indicated by the last 8 LEDs (MCS, MCR, SHF....7). In the case of a 16,point module, the status of
all 16 points will be consecutively displayed.
5. Depressing the NXI or PRV keys will cause the address display to increment or decrement to the
next or previous group of 8 statuses or module, if in an expansion rack. All discrete references can
be examined. The display returns to zero after the highest reference has been examined.
Monitor Timer or Counter Status - This operation sequence allows an operator to monitor the current
accumulated value of a timer or counter. After installing the programmer, place the mode switch in the
RUN position. Observe or perform the following actions:
decimal points to the right of each digit (O.O.O.O.),and the ADR LED lit.
2. Enter the timer or counter reference to be monitored. For example, to monitor the operating status
of timer 601, enter SHF, 6,0, 1. If a counter had been assigned reference 601, you would then be
monitoring the status of counter 601. The valid references for timers or counters are 600 to 677.
References 674,675,676,
and 677 are reserved for use with the Thumbwheel Interface unit (Series
One or One Plus) or the Timer/Counter Setpoint Unit (only for Series One Plus). Remember, each
valid reference can be assigned to only 1 timer or 1 counter.
3. Select the Monitor function (MON). Note that the shift selected in the previous step is still in effect
causing the RST key to select the monitor function.
If the selected reference is not used in the
program, error code EOl will be displayed.
4. The display will contain the current content (accumulated value) of the selected timer or counter.
Timer values will be displayed in tenths from 000.1 up to 999.9 and counter values will be 0001 to
9999. The Logic Display will also show the two least significant digits of the timer or counter
reference (for example, 01 for timer or counter 601).
5. The NXT and PRV keys move the display to adjacent timer or counters. Any timer or counter not
actually used in the logic cannot be displayed.
Display a Specific Address - This operation sequence allows you to select and display a specific
memory address (location) and the logic content of that address. After installing the programmer, place
the mode switch in the RUN or PRG position. Observe or perform the following actions:
1. The programmer will display the address zero indicated by four zero digiti in the display, with
decimal points to the right of each digit (O.O.O.O.), and the ADR LED lit.
2. Enter the memory address to be observed. For example, if the logic contained in address 36 is to be
observed, SHF, 3 and 6 would be selected.
3. The NXT key is then selected and the display will contain the selected ad@s$.
To display the
content of this memory address, the NXT key is dep=ssed a second time.
4. At any time, selecting SHF then NXT will cause the display to go to address 0.0.0.0.
4-14
PC Operation
GEK90842
Monitor Data Register Contents (Series One Plus only) - This operation sequence allows an operator
to monitor the current contents of any data register. After installing the programmer, place the mode
switch in the RUN position and perform the following actions:
1 . The programmer will display the address zero indicated by four zero digits in the display, with
decimal points to the right of each digit (O.O.O.O.),and the ADR LED lit.
2 . Enter the reference for the data register to be monitored. Valid data register references are 400
through 577 and 600 through 673. For example, to monitor the contents of data register 452, enter
the key sequence R 4 5 2 MON.
3 . The display will contain the address of the selected data register.
4 . To display the contents of the selected data register, depress the MON key a second time. The
display will now contain the current contents (4digit BCD value) of the selected register.
5 . The NXT and PRV keys move the display to adjacent data registers.
Change Contents of a Data Register (Series One Plus only) - This opemtion sequence allows an
operator to change the current contents of any data register. After installing the programmer, place the
mode switch in the RUN position and perform the following actions:
decimal points to the right of each digit (O.O.O.O.),and the ADR LED lit
2 . Enter the reference for the data register to be monitored, following the steps in the previous
operation.
3 . After depressing the MON key a second time and the current contents of the data register are
displayed, the contents may be changed if desired.
4 . To change the cwTent contents of the displayed data register, enter the sequence SHF m
ENT, where m
is a 4digit BCD value having a valid range from 0000 to 9999. The new value
entered will write over &place) the value originally displayed.
Enter or Change a Password (Series One iMode E and Series One Plus) - This operation sequence
allows an operator to enter a password or change a previously entered password. When a password is
This prevents
entered, all programmer tictions
are disabled, except for the monitor f&nctions.
unauthorized access to the program in a Series One Plus PC. After installing the programmer, place the
mode switch in the RUN or PRG position and perform the following actions:
1. To enter a new password or change a previously
CLR
SHF
9876
DEL
SHF
entered password, use the following key sequence:

ENT
NXI
2. 9876 is a required sequence.

Your password (XXXX) can be any numerical value from 0001
through 9999. The value 0000 is equivalent to no password, all programmer functions are operable
when the password is 0000. If you do not have a requirement for password security, use 0000.
To have access to all programmer functions when a password is in effect, a LOG IN sequence must be
entered by the operator. After performing any necessary operations with the programmer, the operator
must then enter a LOG OUT sequence to prevent any unauthorized access to the program. The LOG IN
and LOG OUT sequences are shown below.
Access to Programmer Functions with Password in Effect(Series One M&l E and Series One Plus)
After installing the programmer on a Series One Plus PC having a password in effect, place the mode
switch in the RUN or PRG position
and perform the following
actions:
1. To LOG IN, enter the key sequence:

CLR SHF 5678 DEL
SHF
2. The numerical value, 5678 is a required entry.

selected by the operator.
ENT
NXT
XXXX is the password
that had been previously
PC Operation
4.15
GEK-90842
3. The operator can now monitor or change the program as required. When not using the programmer,
the operator should then LOG OUT to return the programmer to password security.
4. To LOG OUT, enter the following key sequence.
CLR SHF 1234 DEL
5. verify
that the programmer
functions
NXI
have been disabled.
NOTE
If the user should for any reason forget the password entered into the PC, use of most programmer functions would not be possible. If this should happen, contact the GE FanucAutomation
service center in Charlottesville, Virginia for assistance.
Forcing References - The operation sequences described in this paragraph allow you to force an Input,
Output, Shift Register, Timer, or Counter reference either on or off. Forcing the state of I/O references
provides a convenient method of testing the operation of field devices and debugging the logic in the
user program. If an input or output is forced on or off, it will remain in the forced state for 1 scan of the
CPU. The programmer must be in the RUN mode to force any reference. After installing the
programmer, place the mode switch in the RUN position. Use the following steps to force references.
1. The programmer will display address zero indicated by four digits in the display, with decimal
2. Enter one of the following sequences to force a reference either on or off as required:
l To force a specific reference
ON, enter the sequence: SET, SHF, m
(Reference), ENT
l To force a specific reference
OFF, enter the sequence: RST, SHF, m
(Reference), ENT
3. Repeat the above operation for other references to be forced.
When forcing input points with the set or rst sequence, the actual state of the input may be
overridden. If the forced set or rst occurs in the user logic program before the input is
checked in the same i/o scan, the set or rst state will take precedence and could cause an
output to be turned on or off at the wrong time.
Operation With Peripheral Devices

Several peripheral devices are available for use with a Series One or Series One Plus PC. The
Programmer is required for operation with the tape recorder, when recording user programs. The tape
recorder connects to the Programmer through the Programmers tape port. The tape port is located to
the right of the mode switch and is labeled TAPE. The rest of this chapter describes the operation of
these peripherals, which are listed below:
Audio Tape Recorder
PROM Writer Unit
Various models
Catalog Number IC61OPER151
Catalog Number IC61OPER154
Tape Recorder Operation

Most audio tape recorders with auto-level control can be used with a Series One or Series One Plus PC.
It is recommended that the recorder also be equipped with a counter to allow multiple programs to be
record&Von tape. Units such as General Electric model 3-5148 have been tested and found fully
compatible with the Series One family of PCs. This recorder is packaged with an interface module (not
PC Operation
4-16
I
GEK-90842
required for the Series One or Series One Plus PCs) and can be ordered as Catalog Number 3-5156. The
tape recorder allows three functions to be performed: (1) record a program onto tape, (2) load a CPU or
peripheral from tape, and (3) verify the content of a tape. The operation of each of these functions is
described below in a step-by-step manner. All logic memory is recorded on tape.
Tapes created on Series One, Series One Model E or Series One Plus PCs can be loaded into any Series
One, Series One Model E, Series One Plus or Series One Plus 3.7K PC Tapes created on the Series
One Plus 3.7K PC can only be loaded into another Series One Plus 3.7K PC.
A 2.5 foot (0.75 meter) audio cable (Catalog number IC6lOCBLl51), which is gray with a red tracer, is
supplied with the programmer.
This cable is used only with a tape recorder and connects it to the tape
port on the programmer.
Recording A Program
1 . Install the Programmer
and apply AC power to the PC.
2 . Turn the mode switch on the Programmer
to the LOAD position.
3 . Apply AC power to the tape recorder. Verify presence of the write protect t&b on a cassette and
insert the cassette.
If the write protect tab is not in place, data entered on the tape may be
inadvertently erased.
4 . Adjust the tone control to its highest position.
5 . Connect the Programmer (TAPE port) to the tape recorder (MIC input) with the 2.5 ft. (0.75 m)
audio cable (gray with red tracer).
6 . Rewind tape to the beginning or to the desired record position if multiple programs are to be placed
on one tape. Programs require approximately 1.5 minutes (700 words), 4 minutes (1724 words) or 8
minutes (3.7K words), as applicable, of tape per program.
7 . For identification of a program, if desired, enter a four digit number
mer. When tape is accessed later to load the CPU, this number can
program prior to altering CPU data. If a program number is not
terminate the load operation and get the correct tape without loss
incurred by loading a wrong program. However, this identification
(00009999) on the Programbe used to identify the comet

as expected, the operator can
of existing program nor delay
number is optional.
8 . Begin the tape recorder operation by depressing the RECORD button (and PLAY if required by the
tape recorder).
9 . Depress the WRITE key on the Programmer.
10 . If after following
with batteries.
all instructions,
The record operation will now begin.
reliable operation cannot be obtained, try operating the recorder
11 . When the record is complete, the Programmer will display End in the Address/Data display and the
ON/OFF LED will be off. Stop the recorder and note the counter position so that the amount of tape
used for that program can be determined.
12 . Depress the CLR (Clear) key on the Programmer
to end the record operation.
13 . It is recommended that the tape be rewound to where the record began and that the Verify operation
described below be performed to ensure data integrity.
Verif'yingAProgram
1. Install the Programmer and apply AC power to the PC.
2. Turn the mo&
3. Aply
.:.-=h
on
the Programmer to the LOAD position.
AC power to the tape recorder and insert the cassette containing
the program to be verified.
PC Operation
4-17
GEL90842
4 . Adjust the tape recorders volume control to the maximum
setting.
Adjust the tone control to its
highest setting.
5.
Connect the Programmer

with red tracer).
(TAPE port) to the tape recorder (EAR input) with the audio cable (gray
6 . Rewind the tape to the beginning of the previously recorded program.

blank area prior to the program,
number (if previously recorded).
7.
but not on another program.
Depress the CHECK key on the Programmer
The tape can also be on the

Enter the program identification
to select the verify operation.
8 Start the tape recorder by depressing the PLAY button.

l
The verify operation now begins.
9. Any errors detected during the verify operation are indicated by an error code being displayed on
the Programmers Address/Data display. Error code E21 indicates that the tape has an internal
parity error. E25 indicates a mismatch between the content of the tape and the CPU logic memory.
E28 indicates that the play level is wrong and the verify operation should be stopped, volume
adjusted, and the operation restarted (from step 6 above).
The error code displayed for an
10 . Setting of the volume control is critical for proper operation.
incorrect (low) volume control setting is E28. Figure 4-4 illustrates the area of the volume control
available for a proper setting.
RECOMMENDED
;MyhH&E
VOWME
SECOND RANGE NOT RECOMMENDED) 2
Figure 4-4. Volume Control Range Setting

With some recorders, there are two ranges where the signal level appears to be acceptable, one near
the middle and one near maximum volume. The setting near maximum volume should not be used.
The CPU will indicate that it is acceptable; however, an unacceptable amount of clipping distortion
may occur in this area with some recorders.
11 . Find the correct position for the mid-range of the acceptable volume control during the beginning or
header portion of the tape. Some experimenting may be necessary. The duration of time for the
header is about 12 seconds. It is important to choose the lower of the two ranges for the volume
control setting if they both exist (see 10 above). For the recommended
GE Fanuc Automation
recorder this is at about 8m of the full maximum setting. Mark the proper setting with paint or
some other method of identification.
12 . If the volume control has been correctly set before the end of the header, the programmer display
will be blank, and the lower right number 7 LED will turn on dimly. Before the end of the header
the LED will tum off. A few seconds later, F will be displayed, indicating that theprogram has been
found.
13. During the adjusting process in 11 above, the data from the tape may not be valid if the adjustment
is not performed quickly enough. The tape loading should be repeated with the correct volume
control setting. To clear the CPU to restart the loading, it is necessary to either power-down the
CPU or remove the P-ograrnmer f!iom the CPU, then reattach and depress the Clear key.
4-18
PC Operation
GEK-90842
14.
When the verify is complete without error. the Prommmer will display End in the Address/Data
display.
15. Stop the recorder and depress the CLR (Clear) key on the Programmer to end the verify operation.
16. The verify operation will require approximately the same : time as the record operation.
Loading A Program
1 . Install the Programmer and apply AC power to the PC.
2 . Turn the mode switch on the Programmer to the LOAD position.
3 . Apply AC power to the tape recorder and insert the cassette containing the required program.
4 . Adjust the volume control to the setting determined during the verify operation. Adjust the tone
control to its highest setting.
5 . Connect the Programmer (TAPE port) to the tape recorder (EAR input) with the audio cable (gray
with red tracer).

6 . Rewind the tape to the beginning of a previously recorded program. Tape can also be on the blank
area prior to the program, but not on another program. Enter the program identification number (if
previously recorded).
7 . Select the READ key on the Programmer to establish the load operation.
8 . Start the tape recorder by depressing the PLAY key. The load operation now begins.
% _
If the CPU detects a program number different than the one entereu III step 6, the programmer will
beep and the display will show PA
.
9 . If the wrong program has been selected, the load operation can be aborted by stopping the recorder
and powering-down the CPU or remove the programmer from the CPU, then reattach and depress
the CLR key.
10 . Any errors detected during the load operation are indicated by an error code being displayed on the
Programmers Address/Data display. Error code E21 indicates the tape has an internal parity error.
A steady E28 indicates the play level is wrong and the load should be stopped, volume adjusted, and
the operation restarted (step 6 above).
11 . When the load is complete with no errors, the Programmer will display End in the Address/Data
display and the ON/OFF LED will be off. Stop the recorder and depress the CLR (Clear) key on the
Programmer to end the load operation.
12 . The load operation will require approximately the same time as the record operation.

The Printer Interface Unit (catalog number IC61OPER151) provides an interface between a Series One
or Series One Plus PC and a printer for the purpose of providing a convenient means of obtaining a
hard-copy printout of the program residing in the PCs user memory. It can also be used with a Series
One Junior PC. The format of the printout is switch selectable and can be either Boolean (mnemonic) or
ladder diagram format. Many readily available, inexpensive printers can be used with the Printer
Interface Unit.
A 6 (2m) Printer Interface cable and an external power supply cable are included with the Printer
Interface Unit. Printer Interface Unit Specifications are listed below in table 4-3
PC Operation
4-19
GEL90842
Table 4-3. Printer Interface Unit Specifications

Storage Temperature
Humidity (nomcondensing)
Required Operating Power
DimensiOIlS
weight
Printer Interface
printing Capacity
(maximum)
0 to 60 C (32 to 140 F)
-loo to 700 C (14 to 158 F)
5 to 95%
+5 V dc + 5%, 300 mA (minimum)
(Supplied either intemdly from the CPU or from an
extemal power supply)
5.7 x 4.7 x 1.5 (145 x 120 x 38mm)
11.68 02 (330 g)
Cen~cmics (Parallel)
Ladder Dialpam Listing
13 contacts and 1 coil per line

16 lines per page
Boolean Listing
200 steps per page (4 lines with 50
steps in each line).
700 steps maximum
Table 4-4 lists the requirements that a printer must meet for use with the Printer Interface Unit.
Table 4-4. Printer Requirements

Must have a Centronics interface
Able to generate ASCII charxter code 7CH (Hexadecimal) as a /, (slash).
Must respond to control codes: OE H (SO) - Expanded print ON
OF H (SI) - Compressed print ON
12 H (DC2) - Compressed print OFF
14H(DC4)-ExpandedprintOFF
Must be capable of printing 132 columns; however, if an 80 column printer can respond to the SI (OF H) control
code to allow 132 or more characters per line, it can be used. This type of printer, when used with the Printer
Interface Unit, will print compressed characters. Choice of normal (132 column) or compressed (80 column)
print is switch selectable.
The following printers have been tested for operation and can be used with the Printer Interface Unit.
General Electxic Personal Computer Printer, model 3-8100
Epson model RP-100
Hewlett Packard "hi&jet, model HP 2225C
IBM Personal Computer Graphics Printer
Seiko model GP-500
Hardware Description
The Printer Interface Unit is a compact unit that attaches to the Series One or Series One Plus PC.
Electrical and physical co~ections to the PC are made through a 26.pin connector located on the back
of the Printer Interface Unit. The Printer Interface Unit is attached to the PC by placing its 260pin
connector directly over the mating co~ector on the PC and gently pushing down on the unit until it is
securely in place.
Connection fkom the PrintP,r Interface Unit to the selected printer is made through the Printer Interface
Cable, IC6lOCBLl52 to a 24.pin connector on the FL7nt of tile unit. Power to the unit can be supplied
directly through the rear panel connector fi-om the CPU power supply or fi-om an external power source
PC Operation
4-20
GEK-90842
capable of supplying +5 V dc @ 300 mA. The power source, either internal (INT) or external (EXT) is
selected by a 2position switch located on the rear panel. Connection to an extemal power source is
made through a 3-wire cable supplied with the Printer Interface Unit.
The sequence for operation of the Printer Interface Unit is initiated by depressing pushbutton switches
on the front panel. Two indicator lights on the front panel provide a visual status of the Printer Interface
Unit operation. There are also 2 indicators that provide operating status of the PC. Figure 4-5 is an
illustration of the Printer Interface Unit showing-the features mentioned above.
~- _ -_-_ - ---- _
IroICAIOR
1 IGMlS
co1
@O/I 32
WI
UlEC1Ior w1cn
SVJTI Y srr1uti 1 lolls
c40505
w-
--.
kfftllIA1
mrt A
COrrECroa
f
SUPPLY
fnD
VIE w
ama
VII
Figure 4-5. Printer Interface Unit

Hardware Features
The Printer Interface Unit front panel has two LEDs located in the upper right comer used for visual
indication of system status. The purpose of the indicators is described below.
CPU
ON
OFF
PWR
ON
TheredCPU~isanindicationoftheoperatingstatusof~CPUinthePC. ThisisidenticaltotheCPULED
OOthePc.
CPU failure has been detected.
CPU operation is normal.
The pen PWR IED is an indication of the status of dc power being supplied to the Printer Interface Unit.
If power is being supplied by the Series One or Series One Plus internal power supply, tbis indicates that +5 V dc
is being properly produced by the supply. If the Printer Interface Unit is being powered fkom an extemal SOW,
the +5 V dc being supplied is within the speciki tolerance.
4-21
PC Operation
GEL90842
OFF
5 V dc not being supplied or not in tolerance.
The 24.pin connector located on the lower right of the front panel, provides a connection from the
Printer Interface Unit to the selected printer through the Printer Interface cable, IC61OCBL152.
Immediately to the left of the connector are 4 pushbuttons used to initiate operation of the Printer
Interface Unit to get a hard copy printout. There are also 2 LEDs used as status indicators during the
set-up procedure.
FORM
PROD
PRNT
STOP
This pushbutton is used to select the fomat of the printout, either a ladder diagram or Boolean listing of the user
program. The pushbutton is an alternate fimction switch. Each time it is depressed, tk selected printout fomat
will change.
As the pushbutton is depressed, the color of the LED will alternate between green and IX& The LED, when green,
indicates a ladder diagram printout; when red, indicates a Boolean listing printout.
This pushbutton is also an alternate function switch. Each time it is dep~ssed, either a Series One Junior PC or
the Series One/Series One Plus PC is altemately selected as the program listing source. The select@ must agree
with the PC to which the printer Interface Unit is attached.
As this pushbutton is depressed, the color of the LED will alternate between green and IMI. The LED, when red,
indicates selection of Series One Junior, when green, indicates selection of Series One/Series One Plus.
When depressed, this pushbutton causes the printer to begin printing the user program in the selected fomats.
When depressed, this pushbutton causes the printing operation to stop.
80/132 Column Selection Switch

On the right side-panel is a 2position toggle switch used for selection of either 80 column printing
format (compressed print) or 132 column printing format (normal print). The 80 column compressed
print format is typically used with printers designed for use with personal computers. The selected
printer column format corresponding with the switch position is printed on the right edge of the front
panel, either 80 (towards the top of the unit) or 132 (towards the bottom of the unit). If desired, the 80
column compressed print format can be selected for use with a 132 column printer. The unused space to
the right, beyond the 80th column, could be used for adding comments.

.
A connector located on the lower right side of the unit provides the connections to an external power
supply. A mating 3-pin connector with attached wires which are 3 feet (lm) in length, is provided with
the Printer Interface Unit for connection to the external supply. The color code for the external power
supply cable and specifications for the power supply are as follows:
white
BlnCk
Green
+5 V dc, + 5% (rat& at 300 mA minimum)

Power s@ly logic ground
Common
. system gfound

This is a two-position switch located on the bottom of the unit, directly above the 26.pin connector.
This switch is used for selection of either internal or external dc power for the Printer Interface *Giit.
The top switch position is labeled EXT (External) and the bottom position is labeled INT (Internal). If
the Printer Interface Unit is to be powered by an external +5 V dc power s~ply,
;ix Power Supply
~ .I
Select switch must be set to EXT.
4-22
PC Operation
GEK-90842
As a convenience to the user, instructions for using the Printer Interface Unit are printed on the front
panel of the unit. The sequence of operation is described below. If a Series One Plus program is to be
printed and a password is in effect, the password must be changed to 0000 before mounting the Printer
Interface Unit.
Power-up Sequence
The following power-up sequence should be followed after the Printer Interface Unit has been properly
configured.
1 . Power to be supplied by the internal PC supply or an external power supply.
2 . Place EXT/INT switch in the INT or EXI position as required.
3 . Turn off power to the PC.
4 . Mount Printer Interface Unit onto the PC.
5 . Attach Printer Interface cable from connector on front panel of unit to printer.
6 . Turn on power to the PC.
7 . Turn on power to the external power supply, if used.
User Program Transfer From PC To Printer Interface Unit

Immediately after the power-up sequence has been completed, the user program stored in the PCs user
memory will automatically begin transferring to a buffer memory in the Printer Interface Unit. This
program transfer will take about 1.5 minutes. When the program has been successfully transferred, the
FORM and PROD LED indicators will turn on green. If the program transfer is not successful, the LED
indicators will either flicker on and off red or neither LED will illuminate. If after 2 minutes, neither
LED turns on, repeat the power-up procedure fkom the beginning of the sequence.
Selection of Printout Format and Type of PC

Select the printout format, either ladder diagram or Boolean, and the PC model, either Series One Junior
or Series One/Series One Plus by depressing the FORM and PROD switches as shown in the following
table.
Table 4=5. Format and PC Selection

FORM
PRINTOUT TYPE
Ladder
Ladder
Boolean
B~lf%II
PROD
LED ON
Gmm
Green
Red
Red
PC
series
Series
series
Series
LED ON
one/be Plus
Omt Junior
one/one Plus
Ore Junior
Start Printer Operation

Depress PRNT pushbutton. The ladder diagram or Boolean program listing will begin to print and
continue printing until the complete program has been listed or has been stopped by the operator.
If at any time, the program listing is to be stopped, depress the STOP switch. When this is done during
a ladder diagram printout, the printout will stop. When the STOP switch is depressed during a Boolean
PC Operation
listing printout, the B&lean listing printout will stop, the printer will formfeed, and the complete
OUTPUTS USED TABLE will be printed.
Printing Of Error Messages During Ladder Diagram Listing
If any errors in the printing process are detected by the Printer Interface Unit during printing of a ladder
diagram listing, an error message will be printed and the printing may stop, depending on the type of
error. Table 4-6 lists the error messages and their definitions.
Table 4-6. Ladder Diagram Listing Error Messages and Definitions
ERROR MESSAGE
ROW OVER
COLUMN OVER
STACK ERROR (SR)
STACK ERROR (CNT)
STACK OVER
STACK OVER (MCS)
MC ERROR
PROGRAM ERROR
DEFINITION
One rung of lo@ exceeds 16 lines.
More than 13 cmuit elements in line

Clock or Reset line not proved in Shift Register logic.
Reset line not rogrammed ID Counter logic.
Pushdown staJ: using AND STR and OR SIX functions exceeds 8 levels.
Imels of MCS control exceed 8.
MCR functions exceed MCS functions.
Any error not listed in tbis table.
NOTE
When the ROW OVER or COLUMN OVER error messages are printed, the printout of the
ladder diagram will continue. When any other error messages are printed, a PRINf STOP
message will be printed, paper will feed and printing will stop.
Printing Of Error Messages During Boolean Listing

If any errors in the printing process are detected by the Printer Interface Unit during printing of a
Boolean program listing, an error message will be printed and the printing may stop, depending on the
type of error. Table 4-7 is the Boolean listing emor messages and their definitions.
Table 4-7. Boolean Listing Error Messages and Definitions
ERROR MESSAGE
mSTRUcTIOti_OPERAND
+++~ORff
???
DEFINITION
Not a valid ktruction
IncoHect operand
Cross Reference Printout

When the ladder diagram or Boolean printout of the user program has been completed, the printer will
formfkd, then begin to print a cross reference printout of all outputs. The heading of this printout is,
OUTPUTS USED TABLE. The outputs referenced in the user program (real world oufpufs, internal
relays, shift registers and timers/counters) will have an annotation mark to the right of the reference
number.
The outputs used table will continue printing until all output references have been printed. This printout
cannot be stopped, as can the ladder diagram and Boolean listing printouts.
4-24
PC Operation
Expanded Print Format

When a more complex ladder diagram, using MCS and MCR functions, is to be printed out, an
expanded print format is used. The starting point of each MCS function is denoted by a letter, the first is
A, then B, etc. The letter is carried through to the end of each page and the beginning of the next page,
providing a ready reference to the continuation of the ladder logic within the bounds of each MCS/MCR
control. As multiple MCS functions and the logic under their control are printed, each succeeding group
of logic is shifted to the right. When a group of logic under MCS/MCR control is ended by an MCR
function, (MCR) is printed in the last column to the right and the letter corresponding to that MCS/MCR
logic to its right.
Printout Annotation Explanation

Several items appearing on the printouts in figures 4-6 and 4-7 aze explained for clarification. The ladder
diagram printout in figure 4-6 has a circled number (l-5) next to each annotation, which corresponds to
the number preceding the explanation of each annotation. The circled number 6 appears before an
annotation on the Boolean printout in figure 4-7. The circled numbers (1-6) are for discussion purposes
- only and do not normally appear on a printout.
1 . The type of printout on each page appears on this line, either LADDER DIAGRAM. PRINTOUT,
BOOLEAN PRINTOUT, or CROSS REFERENCE PRINTOUT.
2 This annotation, V X.X, is the version of the system operating software contained in PROM
memory in the Printer Interface Unit.
3 . The model of PC selected by the user as the program listing source will be on this line. The
annotation will be either SERIES ONE JR/SR-10 for a Series One Junior PC or Series One, One
Plus/SR-20, SR-21 for a Series One or Series One Plus PC.
4. The page number of the ladder diagram printout or Boolean printout will appear here as a 4-digit
decimal number, starting with PAGE Oool.
5 . Refers to ladder diagram printout only. This 4-d@ decimal number is the user program memory
address at the start of each rung of logic. The fkst element in the rung is stored at that address. In
the example in figure 4-6, the memory address of the start of the first rung is 0000. The first element
in that rung is a normally open contact referenced as 001 (reference number is printed directly
above the contact). The memory address at the start of the second rung is 0013, the first element in
this rung is a normally open contact referenced as 040.
6 . Refers to Boolean printout only (figure 4-7). The # sign immediately following a numerical value in
the Boolean printout listing, indicates that the value is a reference assigned to an element at the end
of a rung.
7 . A symbol preceding a numerical value in a Boolean printout, indicates that the value is a constant.
l
4-25
PC Operation
GEK-90842
Sample Printout
A sample of each of the previously described printouts is shown in the following group of figures. For
this group of printouts, a program was entered into a Series One Plus PC.
Printer Interfax Unit

LhllERD~PfUKlM
U S E R P R O G R A M LISTXNG
SERlEs oK,M Pl_m-zB,sR-21
v2.2a
kpllxE*B1
0 5 : I I 881
882
883
884
885
8888 i-1 F---l F-1 F---l L-----l
886
887
031
832
833
e34
l---l r-1 F---l c-1 f--l l-l c--l 1 __-______(
lee b
:
i-1
I
I
I
1
841 A 845
:w
8813
I
I
le5 :
)-!
I
I
:
I I
-_---_____I_ -___(
[ - - - - -- - - - - - -
!-I I +]~[+_I
042
-
I[ -
I
l
l
l
I
l
I
l
+] ( ------- -_-_-__-_ ~_--___- -___I-------------(~~-:
8819 :
I
I
I
l
I
1
:16el
6e3
+--) [ ___I_--_-----_ - - - -
8822 I
I
I
1 ml
~--~--~---~_--
t-1 i-
I
I
._ -_~-_-_-.--____-
f:
I
I
I RI-;
-II___--
I
I
I
I
:
----_1__1_
86?7 :---I/[
w - - 1 _ _ . - --
- --csR
867
I _I
I t
---
1
1I
v-p-
-_--_--[
C] _ ;
I
I
I
I
I
I
:e6!i
I
1
11
--____I---
--11__1
:a%
QB32
+-J
-----I RI-1
Fse
[-+---------___
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
t - - - - -
I
I
I
I
I
I
410
1-i 4%
I
I
I
#---
w45
_---[c)(T] _;
t------
II
871
--amx
1
I
F?J
851
------I + ):
t
F6m
--
Figure 4-6. Sample Ladder Diagram Printout
alun )t
510
4-26
PC Operation
GEK-90842
Printer lnterfae hit

lmuN fuNI
USER PROGRAM USilNG
v2. 2
WUES m,ff Plws-28,sR-21
em:
STU
1)891:11)
w&k m
8883: Ml
8884: AMI
8885: m
m6: m
ml?: coo
em: CYI)
fm9: c90
em: m
ml: m
ml2: an
Q)13: SIR
m4: OR
as: IyI)Kn
08l6: ES
8813: SIR
o&8: oul
m9:slR
m:lrR
,
891
002
a03
WEa: ml: m2: -
mm: -
au
mu: m: -
mm: mw: -
Ilbb: Ibci: -
maEi=
0lB:
m87:
me&
ab
aa6
U?
0s
031
032
833
034
1m
w
w
w
4 6m
0021: ae. 0
mw: -
m: m: Ice: ml: m6i2: -
m: 1114: -
mfj: -
6m
m22: SIR mi
071
w3:sTR
m3@
0024: CUT
t 0245
8025:
0e26: mi
$72
007: STR WIT
a67
0028: STR
16
m29: STR
830
we: !a
ml:
136r
(lb6
0032: SIR
9833: BiR
0)
#?I
8034:
m35:
+
67l)
61
IQS:
n37:lnM
dFm
NH:
5m
mmb)y: m: 1)12: amw: m5: 816: mu: ma: 8819: -
a& -
0 mm
m--
us
6
Jaw
Me
a6& -
mmm: m: u?3: (1111: m: we: WI: Ilb: ml%a@#: auk m2: mfkmB4: #a& #w6: m: mlk ammmml: 1)8p: am: m: a&: 8896: m7: 0080: 8885): -
0381: m02: -
mee: we: 0lll: 8112: -8113: mr: em: b116: 8113: 6118: m9: 8120: 8121: 8122: 8123: 9124: -
#lzs:
#lx:
0323:
am:
8m
an@:
m31:
ml?:
8133:
m34:
$336:
em:
M3?:
em
em
awE
Ml:
w2:
m&k
mu:
m45:
ale
w?:
8118:
em
Figure 4-7. Sample Boolean Printout
0.m -
m: 8152: 0353: m54: m5: 0356: 8157: 615%: 8159: em: 8161: m2: 9163: em: am m6: (n67: 6168: am of?& em: -#m:6173: ck174: &rh: em: 8121: 8170: 8139: 0100: tm: ew: 0m3: m4: 0305: 9186: 8107: @#& .am
aw
m:
rrp:
am:
a91:
1)1!k
m6:
em
9130:
9199:
4-29
PC Operation
GE&90842
PROM Writer Unit

The PROM Writer unit (catalog number IC61OPEZR154, version B replaces version A and can be used
with Series One Plus as well as Series One and Series One Junior) is a compact, easy to use device that
connects directly to and mounts on a Series One or Series One Plus PC. When mounted on a PC , the
PROM Writer unit is used to write the contents of user memory to a 2732A-2 PROM (Series One), or a
27256-25 for a Series One Plus, thereby providing a non-volatile means of user program storage. After
being written to, the appropriate PROM can be installed in any Series One or Series One Plus PC as
required. Programs stored in PROM memory will not be lost during no-power conditions.
An additional feature of PROM memory is that merent programs can be stored on individual PROMS
for use as required by various applications. Another function of the PROM Writer unit is to transfer the
user memory contained in a PROM to the CMOS memory in a Series One or Series One Plus.
On a Series One or Series One Plus PC, the PROM Writer unit physically mounts on the right of the
front panel, in the same manner as the programmer. A connector on the lower left rear of the PROM
Writer unit attaches to the connector on the front panel of the Series One or Series One Plus PC. The
source of power for the PROM Writer unit is switch selectable and can be from the internal supply of
the PC or Tom an external source of 5 V dc. Figure 4-10 is an illustration of the PROM Writer showing
the location of its features, which are described in the text following the illustration.
~40506
Figure 4-10. PROM Writer Unit Features
PC Operation
4-30
GEK-90842
Front Panel Features

The front panel has two LEDs in the upper right comer which are visual indicators of system status. The
purpose of the each indicator is described below.
PWR
ON
OFF
CPU
The green PWR LED monitors the status of dc power being supplied to the PROM Writer unit.
If power is being supplied by the CPU rack, this indicates that +5 V dc is being produced by the supply. If the
PROM Writer unit is being powered f!rom an external source, the +5 V dc being supplied is within the specified
tolerance.
5 V dc not being supplied or not in tolerance.
The red CPU LED monitors the operating status of the CPU module. Identical to the CPU LED on the Series
One or Series One Plus CPU module.
ON
CPU failm has been detected.
OFF
CPU operation is normal.
The socket on the lower right of the panel is used to contain the PROM being written to. The socket is a
zero insertion force socket. To insert a PROM into the socket, push the locking handle up, insert the
PROM, then lock the PROM in place by moving the handle down to the horizontal position. The
PROM should be placed in the socket with the notch towards the end of the socket closest to the PWR
LED as indicated by the figure on the panel next to the socket. Even though the spacing of the slots in
the socket allows easy insertion of a PROM, care should be taken to ensure that leads on the PROM are
not damaged.
Immediately to the left of the socket are 4 pushbuttons and their associated LED indicators. These
pushbuttons are used to initiate operation of the PROM Writer unit and the LEDs are indicators for each
part of the operation.
a
BLANK
When depressed, initiates checking of the PROM inserted in the socket for verification that the PROM does not
have any infomation written into it. To initiate a blank check, the pushbutton is depressed. The light will turn
on, then off, indicating a successful blank check. If the light remains on, and the ERR light turns on, the PROM
needstobeerased
The BLANK light will also turn on, then off during the normal operation of writing to a PROM as indicated by
the instructions printed on the lower left of the unit.
WRITE
When depressed, the WRITE pushbutton initiates the sequence of events that causes the user program in the
Series One or Series One Plus CMOS memory to be w&ten to the PROM. When the WRITE pushbutton is
depR3SSedJheBL4ANKlightwilltum on, then off. Next, the WRITE light turn on, program entry is executed,
then tk WRITE light tuxns off. A blank check and verify are performed automatically when the WRITE
pushbutton is dep113sseA
CMPR
During the sequence for writing to a PROM, this light will turn on while the contents of the PROM are being
compared to the contents of user memory in RAM. The CMPR light ~~IIZ off wbea the compare is completed
andisgti IftbecompareisnotgoodtheCMPRlightwill~mainonandtbeBRR~~twilltumon. I n
addition, the contents of a PROM inserted in tbe PROM Writer unit socket can be cumpamd to the contents of
user memory, whether the CMPR pushbutton is depressed.
ERR
This light is a visual indication that the PROM writing operation has not been successfiA If tbe light turns on
during any portion of the operation, an error has occurred If this does happen, depress the ERR pushbutton and
repeat the procedure.

As a convenience to the user, the PROM Writer unit instructions for writing the contents of user
memory to a PROM are printed on the lower left of the tit.
PC Operation
4-31
GEL90842
The sequence of operation for writing the contents of user RAM memory to PROM memory is as
follows:
WRITE OPERATION SEQUENCE
Depnxs WRITE pushbutton
Blank check performed
Write to PROM
Verify contents of PROM with contents of RAM memory
Write sequence successful
INDICATION
WRITE light turn on
WRITE light tums off
BLANK light tums on
BLANK light tums off
WRrE light turns on
WRITE light tums off
CMPR light tums on
CMPR light tums Off
The sequence of operation for transferring the contents of PROM memory to CMOS memory is as
follows (the CMOS memory should be cleared first):
INDICATION
PROM TO RAM OPERATION SEQUENCE

Depress WRITE and CMPR pushbutton at the same time. Contents of
PROM will be transfenzd to RAM memory in the PC.
WRITE light and CMPR light will
Contents of PROM and RAM memory are compared.
WRITE light turns off.
Compaze good. Sequence of operation complete.
CMPRlighttucnsoff *
tllm on.
*If an error is detected during the compare operation, the CMPR light will remain on and the ERR light will turn on..
The error can be cleared by depressing the ERR pushbutton. When this is done, the ERR and CMPR rights will
tum off. If an errof is indicatsd, repeat the operation.

A connector located on the right side of the PROM Writer unit provides the connections to an external
power supply. A mating 3-pin connector with attached wires 3 feet (lm) in length, is provided with the
PROM Writer unit for connection to the external supply. The color code for the external power supply
cable and specifications for the power supply are as follows:
White
Black
Green
+5 V dc,+ 5% (rated
at 0.5 amps)
Power sujply logic ground
common system ground

This is a two-position switch located on the bottom of the PROM Writer unit, directly above the 26.pin
connector. The switch is used for selection of either internal or external dc power for the PROM Writer
unit. The top switch position is labeled EXT (External) and the bottom position is labeled INT
(Internal). When used with a Series One or Series One Plus PC mounted in a high-capacity rack, power
can be supplied internally and the Power Supply Select Switch is set to INT.
If erratic omratitirr is observed when attempting a data transfer using the PROM Writer, it is recommended t&k an external source of 5 V dc be used.
4.32
PC Operation
GEK-90842

The Timer/Counter Setpoint Unit (IC609TCUlOO) provides an alternative method for entering a timer or
counter preset value in a Series One Plus program. This unit can also be used with a Series One Junior.
A Timer/Counter Setpoint Unit mounts on the Series One Plus rack that contains the CPU and plugs into
the same connector as does the hand-held programmer. The Timer/Counter Setpoint Unit can also be
connected remotely by using the 5 foot (1 Sm) remote programmer cable, IC61OCBLlO2. With the unit
mounted on the PC, the hand-held programmer can then be mounted on top of the Timer/Counter
Setpoint Unit, thereby providing a convenient way to monitor the operation of timers or counters. The
physical size of the unit is the same as the Data Communications Unit, Printer Interface Unit and the
PROM Writer Unit.
a41 673
Figure 4=11. Timer/Counter Setpoint Unit

There are four 4-digit thumbwheel switches on the unit, which provides a convenient way to enter a
4digit BCD value into each of 4 specific internal locations in the Series One Plus PC for use as
Timer/Counter preset values. These values are simultaneously entered into data registers (two g-bit
registers for each BCD digit) for use as preset values or for other data operations. When the BCD preset
values have been entered into the PC, they are retained in the PCs memory as presets, even though
power is removed from the PC and the unit is removed.
PC Operation
4-33
GE&90842
Timer/Counter Setpoint Unit Specifications

The following table contains general specifications for the Timer/Counter Setpoint Unit.
Table 4-8. Timer/Counter Setpoint Specifications
Number of Circuits
Register References
BCD digits per chuit)

674, 675, 676, 677
564, 565 n/C 674), 566, 567 (T/C 675)
570, 571 (T/C 676), 572, 573 (T/C 677)
Timer: 0.1 to 999.9 seconds
.Ol to 99.99 seconds
(Series One Plus 3.7 only)
Counter: 1 to 9999 events
0 to 50 (32 to 122OF)
-20 to 85OC (-4 to 185F)
5% to 95%
5 V dc, 40 mA (maximum)
9Vdc,5mA(maximum)
4units@5Vdc
lunit@9Vdc
No conosive gases
4 (4
Preset values
Ambient Temperature
Storage Temperature
Humidity (non-condensing)
Internal Power Consumption
Units of Load
Environment Considerations
Remote Mounting of Timer/Counter Setpoint Unit

A Unit Mounting Bracket, IC61OACC190, is available which allows mounting of the Timer/Counter
Setpoint Unit on the outside of a panel or console. The Unit Mounting Bracket consists of a mounting
bracket, connector clamp and a cable clamp. The Timer/Counter Setpoint Unit mounts on the bracket,
secured by two captive screws on the unit. The unit connects to a Series One Plus PC through the round
5 foot (1 Sm) remote programmer cable, IC61OCBLlO2.
References for the Timer/Counter Setpoint Unit

The Timer/Counter n=ferences for the memory locations into which the BCD values are entered in the
Series One Plus ax 674,675,676 and 677. Each of the references refer directly to a memory location in
the CPU that accepts one 4-d@ BCD value as it is entered with each 4-position thumbwheel switch.
Each thumbwheel position represents one BCD digit, with the least significant digit being the position to
the right.
Each of the register references refers to an &bit data register. Two consecutive registers are required for
each 4-digit BCD number.
Since all four BCD values are read into the PC each scan, discretion must be exercised when changing
any values when the PC is running, since undesired intermediate values could be read by the CPU and
used during one or several scans. It is recommended that the following CAUTION be followed.
CAUTION I
When mounting or removing the Timer/Counter Setpoint Unit, be sure that power is turned
off. If a switch position (vab) is c~qy!d during operation, an incorrect value may
temporarily be read into the CkW.
4-34
PC Operation
GE&90842
Example of Using Thumbwheel Inputs

The following example of a ladder diagram rung shows how the Timer/Counter Setpoint Unit is used to
enter a preset value into a Timer or counter, or to enter data into data q&.ers.
a421 86
SW1
l-674
SW2
20
T674
STR 10
7 ANDNOT TMR 674
TMR 674
I
TIMER 674 USES

TblUh5WtiEEL DATA
FoRrrSpREsETvALUE.
WHEN SWITCH 2 Is CLOSED,
THE THlJhBWHEEL Is READ
INANDSTOREDINASAVE
REGISTER, WHICH IS RSOO
IN THIS EXAMPLE.
CNT 601
THEVALUEMHESAVE
REGISTER (500) IS USED
ASTHEPRESETVALUEFOR
COUNTER 601.
Chapter
51
0
Programming
GE&90842
SECTION 1
Introduction to Programming
General Information
The Series Onem and Series One TM Plus are easy to use small PCs with many advanced features. One
of the advantages of these PCs is the ability to be programmed or tailored specifically to the needs of an
application. Furthermore, if requirements change, the PC can be reprogrammed to fit the new application. This chapter provides the information a user needs to develop or modify the logic within the Series
One or Series One Plus. It will discuss the basics of CPU operation necessary to develop a proper logic
program, the theory behind each function, examples of how that function could be used, and
step-by-step entq of sample programs.
Planning a PC System
When planning a PC system, the first step should be to define the system by writing a description of the
functional requirements for that system. A description would usually consist of block diagrams and
written descriptions of the various parts of the system. Input devices should be defined along with the
process or machines to be controlled. The next step would be to develop the program required to control
the system.
On a sheet of paper, layout each rung of your ladder diagram and assign references to inputs and
outputs. The program can also be written in mnemonic form (Boolean), which is how it will be keyed
into the Series One or Series One Plus when using the hand-held programmer. As an option, programs
can be entered in ladder diagram Format using the Portable Programmer. This applies to both the Series
One and Series One Plus. You can also enter programs with the Workmaster@ industrial computer
using Logicmaster~l application software. For information on using the Wockmaster industrial computer for programming, refer to the Logicmaster 1 Programming manual, GE&96632 for Series One.
For Series One Model E, Series One Plus, and Series One Plus 3.7K, refer to GFK-0075 which is the
Logicmaster 1 Family Programming Manual.
How to Use This Chapter

This chapter is divided into 3 sectiuns. Section 1 is a description of the requirements for programming.
Included, are lists of all of the progr amming functions and a table of programming references assigned
to each slot for 8 point modules. The purpose and types of references are explained, including real
world use and internal use. A basic explanation of the scanning operation of the Series One and Series
One Plus PCs is given. The scanning process is the basis for operation of all PCs and the user should
have a good working knowledge of this operation.
The next 2 sections are devoted to programming. Section 2 describes and gives examples of the basic
ladder diagram functions. Section 3 provides the user with a description -f the data operation functions
for use with a Series One Plus PC. The data operations greatly r=xtend LIpe number and complexity of
applications possible with the Series One family.
520
PrograIIlming
_
GEK-90842
Table 5.1 lists the basic ladder diagram fimctions for the Series One and Series One Plus. A more
detailed explanation of each instruction can be found later in this chapter. Execution times in Table 5.1
are for Series One Model E, Series One Plus, and Plus 3.7K only. Execution times for Series One are
listed in Table 5.2. Note that in the table, VO = I/O points, IR = Internal Relay, SR = Shift Register.
Table 5-l. Series One Model E/One Plus Basic Ladder Diagram Instructions
IIlStruCtiOIl
DdiIlitiOIl
ISTART.
STR
Start rung with a N.O. Normally Open) contact.
1
I
START TIMER.
STRTMR
66
5019
6.6 I/O,IR,SR
I 50.9 Sequencer
Start rung with a N.O. contact referencing a
timer.
START COUNTER.
YrRcNT
Start rung with N..O. contact
referencing a counter.
YIR NOT
START NOT.
contact.
STR NOT TMR

STR NOT CNT
Start rung with a N.C. (Normally Closed)
1START NOT TIMER. Start rung with a N.C. timer contact.
IcontacL
I
START NOT COUNTER.
Start rung with a N.C. counter
Add a N.O. contact in series with the previous contact.
1
1
1
Add a N.O. timer contact in series with the
I
I
ANDTMR
AND TIMER.
10.3
10.3
I
I
I
I
1
91
6115
12.8
12.8
53
612
I
I
I
9.1 IJO,IR,SR
61.5 Sequencer I
112.8
12.8
5.3 I/O,IR,SR
59.1 Sequencer I
previous contacL
ANDCNT
AND COUNTER.
Add a N.O. counter contact in series with
the previous contact.
AND NOT
Add a N.C. contact in series with the previous contact.
AND NOT TIMER. Add a N.C. timer contact in series with
I the previous contact.

~~
AND NOT CNT AND NOT COUNTER. Add a N.C. counter contact in series
I with tbe previous CantacL
OR
_~
Add a N.O. contact in parallel with the previous contact.
-T---OR TIMER.
OR TMR
~~
OR CNT
OR NOT TMR
84
84
84
.
.
84
Add a N.O. timer contact in parallel with the
previous contact
IAdd
I
I
OR COUNTER. Add a N.O. counter contact in parallel with
the pmious
OR NOT
8.4I/O,IR,SR
60.3
Sequencer
I
.
.
I I
I I
I
AND NOT TMR
.
84
ContacL
a NC. contact in parallel with the previous contact.
OR NOT TIMER. Add a N.C. timer contact in parallel with
the previou!L
I
I
91
612
.
91
I
I
9.1 l/O,IR,SR
625 Sequencer
91
.
I
I
Programming
GE&90842
Table 5-l. Series One Model E/One Plus Basic Ladder Diagram Instructions - Continued
Execution Time
(mhoseconds)
For !&&es One Pins
IIlStI=UtiOIl
D&litiOIl
Memory ,
Words Inactive
Active
OR NOT CNT
OR NOT COUNTER. Add a N.C. counter contact in parallel

with the previous contacL
ANDSTR
.
AND STORE. Connects a logic group in series with the
1
38
logic group preceding it.
1
.
OR STORE. Connects a logic group in parallel with the
38
logic group pceding it.
MASTER CONTROL START. Begin control of a block of
1
5.0
logic with a master control relay.
1
MASTER CONTROL RESET. Ends control of a block of
3.0
logic with a master control relay.
.
Defines a coil for a rung of logic, either an external output or
1
75
an intemal coil.
Defines a coil as being latched, the coil will remain on until
1
17.5
tumed off by RST.
IF ON, the coil will remain ON even under control of the
1
10.0
Output Disabler Coil (376).
--1
.
RESET. Causes a coil that had been latched (SET) to be
93
unlatched (Reset).
1
19.3
SET OUT RESET. Defines a coil as being a one-shot (ON
for one scan).(One Plus Only)
27.1 700.0
ITMER. Programs a Timer operation. Times up kom zero
to a preset value. Elapsed time stored in an accumulate
UOJR,SR
458.8 Register
register. Preset time range is 0.1 seconds to 999.9 seconds.
27.1 706.8
COUNTER. Programs an up counter. Counts up from zero
to a preset value which can be 1 to 9999. The cunent count
VOJRSR
465.6 Register
is stored in an accumulate register. Counters are retentive.
Requires 2 rungs of logic; fkst rung enables the counter, the
second rung resets the counter.
53.1 64.1
Sm REGISTER. Programs a shift register which can be
+16.6 For each
128 steps in length or a number of shift registers of varying
lengths (128 bits total). Retentive. Requires 3 rings of logic;
bit shifted
(1) da@ (2) docl& (3) mset. can be pmgrammed to shift
fonwud or bachward.
OR STR
MCS
MCR
OUT
SET
SET OUT
91
.
9.1
RST
SET OUT RST
SR
Note: I/O = I/O Points, IR = Inuzmal Relay, SR = Shift Register
Table 5.2 is a list of execution times for the Series One functions. Execution times are given in
microseconds.
Programming
GE&90842
Table 5.2. Series One Execution Times

-I===
I/O Point Int Relay
IIlSWUCti0n
33.9
36.5
36.3
38.7
40.8
42.0
38.1
38.1
AND NOT
OR
OR NOT
STR
STR NOT
SET
RST
Shift Register Timer Counter

32.7
35.1
34.5
36.9
39.6
432
42.6
42.6
Inactive
Active
36.0
40.8
36
40.8
89.4
97.2
84.0
88.8
84.0
88.8
89.4
97.2
37.5
39.9
43.5
45.6
48.0
50.4
Inactive
Active
MCS
MCR
SET OUT
OUT
35.2
37.8
49.8
43.8
69.6
SR
ANDSTR
OR STR
55.2
34.2
37.8
35.2
37.8
49.8
43.8
115.8
103.5
66.9 + 12.9!/N (1)
34.2
37.8
LnSWUCtiOIl
80.4
11) N = number of bits shifted.

Table 5.3 is a list and description of the data operations that can be programmed, with a Series One Plus,
in addition to the basic ladder diagram functions listed in Table 5.1. A more detailed explanation of
each instruction is provided later in this chapter.
Table 5-3. Series One Plus Data Operation Instructions
Memory
&ion Time
croseconcls)
Active
words
Inactive
6 .3
321.9 I/O,IR,SR
80.7 Register
14.3 constant
DATA STORE 1. Loads the lower byte (least significant) of

the accumulator with the contents of a specified 1 byte
reference.
6 .3
140.9 I/O,IR,SR
63.8 Register
De STR2
e52)
DATA STORE 2. Loads the lower 4 bits of the accumulator

I witMheupper4bitsofa~lbyte~ference.
6 .3
D.STR3
eS3)
DATA STORE 3. Loads the lower 4 bits of the accumulator

I with the lower 4 bits of a spedied 1 byte nsfmnce.
6 .3
Instnrcti0n
DGIR
CW
DGIRl
eS1)
DdhitiOIl
STORE. Loads accumulator with a binary or BCD

I DATA
value which can be a 4 digit castant orthecontentsofa
specified 2 byte reference.
I
I
~~
,172.2 I/OJEZ,SR
95.0 Register
I
Il73.8 I/O,IR,SR
196.6 Register
0
55
Programming
GEK-90842
Table 5-3. Series One Plus Data Operation Instructions - Continued

Execution Time
(microseconds)
Memory .
InstractiOIl
D4&litiOIl
Words badive
Active
DGTRS
(F55)
DATA STORE 5. Loads accumulator with a binary or BCD

value from tbe 2 byte contents of a 16 circuit (high density)
Input Module.
.
63
325.0 16 Point
input
Module
D.OUT
(F6W
DATA OUT. The contents of the accumulator (2 bytes) ~RZ

written to a specified 2 byte refkrence (Output, Internal Relay,
Shift Register Coils, Data Register or T/C Accumulate
Register).
6.3
329.4 I/O,IR,SR
52.6 Register
D.OUTl
F6l)
DATA OUT 1. The contents of the lower byte of the

accumulator are written to a specifkd 1 byte reference (Output,
Intemal Relay, Shift Register or Data Register.
63
.
160.1 I/O.IR,SR
39.1 Register
DeOUT2
(F62)
DATA OUT 2. The contents of the lower 4 bits of the

accumulator are written to the upper 4 bits of a specified 1
byte reference (Output, Intemal Relay, Shift Register or Data
Register).
.
63
116.0 I/O,IR,SR
39.8 Register
D.OUT3
F63)
DATA OUT 3. The contents of the lower 4 bits of the

accumulator are written to the lower 4 bits of a specified 1
byte reference (Output, Internal Relay, Shift Register or Data
Register.
63
108.1 I/o, IR,

SR
55.0 Register
DoOUT
(F65)
DATA OUT 5. The contents of the accumulator (2 bytes) are

written to a specified 2 byte refierence. Must be a 16 circuit
(high density) Output module.
6.3
365.3 16 Point
=<
On@
COMPARE. The contents of the accumulator are compared to

the contents of a specified 2 byte refe=nce (I, IR, SR, or DR)
or a 4 digit BCD constant. Intemal coils turn on to reflect the
result of the comparison.
Act > DataOn 772
Ace = DataOn 777
Act < Data011 774
.
63
354.0 UO,IR,SR
112.8 Register
57.0 constant
+
(F71)
ADDITION (BCD). The contents of the accumulator are

addedtoa4digitBCDconstantorthecontentsofaspecified
2 byte reference which must be a valid BCD number (Input,
Int~mal Relay, Shift Register or Data Registers).
.
63
698.0 I/O,IR,SR
456.8 Register
262.0 Canstant
SUBTRACIION (BCD). The contents of a specified 2 byte

&hence (Input, Internal Relays, Shift Register, or Data
Registers) or a 4 digit BCD constant are s&tract& from the
ca@nts of the accumulator.
6.3
557.0 IfO,IR,SR
3 15.8 Register
275.0 Constant
MULWPLICATION (BCD). The contents of tbe accumulator

zuc multiplied by he contents of a specified 2 byte reference
(Input, Internal Relays, Shift Register, or Data Registers) or a 4
digit BCD COI~SUII~. Ik lower 4 digits of the result remain in
tk accumulator, the upper 4 digits a~ stod in registers 576
and 577 which is the auxilhy accumulator.
6.3
497 to 2851
CYO&SR)
29oto2644
(Register)
223 to 2576
(Constant)
Cnz)
X
(F73)
output
Module
506
Programming
GEK-90842
Table 5-3. Series One Plus Data Operation Instructions -
Continued
Execution Time
(miuosecods)
lIMNCti0n
lMIlitiOIl
Memory .
Words Inactive
Active
DIVISION (BCD). The contents of the accumulator 8lre

divided by the contents of a specifkd 2 byte reference (I, IR,
SR,orDR)ora4digitBCDconstant. Thefirst4digitsofthe
answer are stored in the accumulator and the remainder is
stored in the remainder is stored in the auxiliary accumulator
(registers 576 and 577).
63
.
DATA AND (Logic product). The contents of the accumulator

are logically AND-ed with each corresponding bit of a
specified 2 byte reference (I, Ilk, SR, or DR) or a 4 digit BCD
constant. The result is stored in the accumulator.
.
63
345.0 IJO,IR,SR
103.7 Register
55.6 Constant
.
63
345.0 I/O,IR,SR
103.7 Register
55.6 Constant
SHIFT RIGHT FUNCTION 80, SHIFI RIGHT N BITS. Contents of the

accumulator are shifted to the right by the specified number of
cF80)
bits (l-15). Positions from which bits were shifted are filled
with zleros.
.
63
216 + 13.4/N
of bits shified
SHlFT LEFT
(F81)
FUNCIlON 81, Shill: Lm N BITS. Contents of the

accumulator are shifted to the left by the specified number of
bits (l-15). Positions from which bits were shifted are filled
with zeros.
63
.
DECODE
(F82)
FUNCTION 82, DECODE. Decodes the lower 4 bits of the

accumulator to a decimal number from 0 to 15 and places a 1
in the bit position in the accumulator which comxponds to that
decimal number.
.
63
56.3
ENCODE
(F83)
FUNCTION 83, ENCODE. Encodes a bit in the accumulator

to a binary code representing the position number (0 - 15) and
places the binary code in the lower four bits of the
accumulator.
63
.
282.0
INVERT. The 16 bits of the accumulator a~ inverted; i.e., 1

to 0 and 0 to 1. Example:
1101 1001 0110 0111
inverted to
0010 0110 1001 1000
.
63
30.3
BIN
VW
BINARY. Converts a BCD value in the accumulator to a

binary code.
6.3
412.2
BCD
(F86)
BINARY CODED DECIMAL. Converts a binary code in the

accumulator to a BCD value.
6.3
746.0
6.3
355.3 I/OJR,SR
114.0 Register
722 Constant
F;4)
DdND
(F7S)
DoOR
(F36)
DATA OR (Logic Sum). The contents of the accumulator are

logically OR-cd with each corresponding bit of a specified 2
byte reference (I, IR, SR, or DR) or a 4 digit BCD constant.
The result is stored in the accumulator.
ENTERNAL FUNCIION 2 0 , EKIZRNAL, FAULT DIAGNOSIS. Allows

FAULT
extemal &vices to be monitored for unwanted conditions. If a
DIAGNOSIS
fault occurs a presssigned 4 digit BCD number is displayed on
the programmer. Multiple fault conditions can be monitored.
0)
1218 to 2851
(I/o, IR, SR)
742 to 2645
(Register)
720 to 2577
(Constant
_
220 + 13.4/N
of bits shifted
Programming
?
GE&90842
Programming Fundamentals
This section provides a guide for entering and using each of the instructions. The instructions are
presented in groups that correspond to their functionality. Table 5.4 lists the instructions grouped in this
manner.
Table 5-4. Series One/One Plus Instruction Groups

BASIC INSTRUCTIONS
STR, STR TMR, STR CNT, STR NOT,
STRNOTTMR,S'IRNOTCNT
AND,ANDTMR,ANDCNT,ANDNOT,ANDNOTTMR,
ANDNOTCNT
OR,ORTMR, ORCNT, ORNOT,ORNOTTMR,
ORNOTCNT
ANDSTR, ORSTR
MCS, MCR,
OUT, SET, SET OUT, RST, SET OUT RST (ONE PLUS ONLY)
TMR, CNT, SR
DATA OPERATIONS
SERIES ONE PLUS ONLY

MOVE
DGTR (FSO), D.STRl (FSl), DCIR2 (F52)

D.STR3 (F53), DoSIR (F55)
DaUT (F60), D.OUTl (F61), D+OUT2 (F62)
DKNJT3 (F63),D.OUT5 (F65)
ARITHMETIC
>=< (FIO), + ml), - F72), x F73), f (F74)

DAND (F75), DoOR (F76), INV (F84)
LOGICAL
CONVERT
BIN (F85), BCD (I?86), Shift Right (F80)

shift Left, (F81) Decode (x%2), Elmode (F83)
SPECIAL
Extemal Fault Diagnosis (RO)
Significance of References
Whenever programs are entered into any PC, they must be accompanied by reference numbers. These
references help to tell the CPU which function is specified. For example, which pushbutton controls the
starting of which motor? Which timer are you referring to? Reference numbers are a vital part of
programming, and in the Series One and Series One Plus are octal based; that is, they start at 0 and go
up to 7, then jump to 10; at 77 the next value is 100. They look like traditional decimal numbers, except
the digits 8 and 9 do not exist. Table 5.5 summa&e s the various reference values and their signifkance.
Programming
58
0
GEL90842
Table 54. Summary of References

Octal values
Rt!&THlCeS
000-157
000-157
700-767
770-777
160-337
I/O points (Series One)

I/O points (Series One Plus)
(Series One Plus only)
Special Function Coils (Series 0~ Plus only)
Intemal Coils (Non-retentive)
340-373
374-377
400-577
600-677 (4)
Retentive Coils (Internal)

Special Functions
Shift Registers
Timers and/or
Counters
Data Registers, M-bit (Series One Plus only)
400-577
WQnantits
112 total
168 total
8
112
28
4
128
64
(1)
(1)
(1)
(2)
(1X2)
64 WV
124 Total if T/C references used as data registers

1. Retentive upon power failure.
2. Total maximum number of Timers and/or Counters.
3. Shift @ster and data register references are identical however, shift registers operate on bits, while data registers (located in a
Merent area of memory) operate on bytes.
4. T/C references 600-673 can be used as data registers, if they are not referenced as timers or counters.
Significance of Input/Output References

I/O modules can be placed in any mix desired; however, once installed the exact reference used in
programming is established by their physical placement. In other words, references are assigned to each
location by the operating system in the CPU, and therefore E fixed for each location. As shown in the
example in Figure 5.1, the modules are numbered from zero (adjacent to CPU) towards the left through
all racks until the last module is reached at the left of the last rack. The exact reference is obtained by
appending the circuit number (O-7), to the module number. Circuit numbers depend upon the terminal to
which the field device is wired as discussed in Chapter 6. Table 5.6 summarizes available I/O references
for 8 circuit modules for your convenience. This table can be reproduced locally to form a part of your
system documentation. Notice that whether reference 005 is an input or an output depends upon which
module is inserted into the I/O slot adjacent to the CPU. Refer to the Series One family compatibility
guide in Appendix C for additional valid If0 references per physical location of modules.
Programming
GEL90842
L li
ml
TO
107
070
TO
077
10
040
TO
057
047
150
TO
157
I40
TO
147
-a
&
TO
067
040
a40797
130
TO
137
r
J
030
TO
107
r
TO
057
TO
047
TO
037
020
TO
027
TO
007
150
TO
157
140
TO
147
130
TO
137
120
TO
127
loo
TO
107
-I
CPU
. 5
10 SLOl RACKS
IEXAMPLE SFRYS ONf PLUS)
02
01
20-27
lo-17
120-127
110-117
00
SLOT NUMBER
o-7
vo
12
REFERENCE
'
~
5SLOT RACKS
(EXAMPLE-SERIES ONE)
Figure 5-l. I/O References Per Physical Placement for 5 and lo-Slot Racks
NOTE
The addressing of slot 10 in a lO-slot rack is determined by configuration of the two bridge
connectors on the rack backplane.
S-10
Programming
GE&90842
Table 5-6. Summary of I/O References for 8 Circuit Modules

Mociule No.
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
Circuit No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Reference
au
002
003
005
an
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
010
011
0i2
013
014
015
016
017
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
.030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
040
041
CM2
043
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
050
051
052
853
054
055
056
057
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
045
046
047
061
062
c&3
065
066
c&7
hmut
Device Name
Wire No.
Programming
Table 5-6. Summary of I/O References for 8 Circuit Modules - Continued

Module No.
07
10
11
Circuit No.
Reference
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
070
071
072
073
074
075
076
077
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
13
14
15
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
InOut
Device Name
Wire No.
~-
5-12
GEL90842
Table 5-6. Summsiry of I/O References for 8 Circuit Modules - Continued

Module No.
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
Circuit No.
Reference
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
In/out
Device Name
Wire No.
,~
Programming
5-13
GEK-90842
Internal Coils
The internal coils are control relays that can be used to control logic in the Series One or Series One
Plus user program. However, their status cannot be provided directly to the I/O section. Retentive
relays are specialized internal coils that have their ON or OFF status retained during time periods that
the PC is not operating such as during loss of AC power. They use dual operations (set and reset) similar
to hard-wired latching relays. A switch (Sl) on the CPU module must be set to the ON position in order
for the internal coils, 340 to 377, to be retentive upon loss of power. If the switch is not set properly,
these coils will function as non-retentive coils.
Use of the Special Function Coils

Internal coils 374 through 377 are special purpose coils, in that they always perform specific internal
functions and also provide useful internal system status. Coil 374 is a fist scan reset or power-up
indicator. Coil 375 provides a convenient way to program a 0.1 second clock pulse. Coil 376 can be
used to inhibit all hardware outputs, that is, outputs that are connected to user devices (programmed with
an OUT m instruction). Finally, coil 377 is an indicator of the operating status of the back-up battery
for the CMOS memory devices. This coil could be used as a contact to turn on an output connected to a
light, bell, etc. as a visual warning of a low battery.

A group of references (400 to 577) are used by the shift register. A total of 128 stages are possible and
they can be used as one large shift register or a group of smaller shift registers (for example, 3 @ 30
stages and 2 @ 19 stages) as long as the total number of stages does not exceed 128. Additional details
on all these functions will be provided later in this chapter.
Timer and Counter References

Another group of fixed references (600 to 677) are used with timers and counters. Any mix of timers or
counters totaling 64 can be used in a Series One or Series One Plus PC. Counters provide an additional
function, in that they can also control a sequencer with up to 1000 steps. Counters are retentive upon
power failure. References 600 to 673 can be used as 16.bit data registers if they are not used as T/C
references. T/C references 674-677 are reserved for Thumbwheel Interfaces or Timer/Counter Set Point
use only.
Data Registers
Data registers are available only with a Series One Plus PC. This is a group of sixty four 16-bit registers
which can be used for storage of numerical data. Data can be written to or read from the data registers
for use by the data operation instructions. Additionally data stored in the regkters can be used as
Timer/Counter presets. The references to be assigned to these registers are 400 to 577. Note that these
references are identical to the shift register references. However, shift registers operate on individual
bits (4(X),401,402, etc.), while the data registers operate on bytes and are located in a totally merent
area of memory. A byte in the Series One Plus PC is a group of 8 consecutive bits and each register is 2
bytes in length. By using available T/C references, the total number of data registers references can be
up to 124.
5-14
Programming
Flexibility in Using References

Although references are assigned to specific functions as shown in Table 5.5, there is some flexibility in
their use. I/O references not used by the hardware I/O section (for example, no module inserted into
that slot or circuit not wired up) can be used as internal coils. However, if expansion is planned for the
future, sufficient references to support that expansion should be reserved and not used in the current
programming. Retentive coils can also be used as internal coils if their retentive function is not
required. However, typically the unique value of retentive relays does not justify their sacrifice for a few
internal coils. The shift register references can be used as a source for additional retentive or internal
coils if they are not used for shift registers or sequencers.
Operating Principles
Before discussing the details of programming and the use of references, some details on the internal
operation of the CPU can be useful. The majority of Series One and Series One Plus applications can be
solved and the programs developed without consideration of the internal structure of the CPU. However, some applications can be more efficiently solved if knowledge of the CPU operation is applied
while the program is being developed. The basic operation of virtually all PCs is referred to as a
scanning function. There are many hundreds of decisions to be performed in any program, and the CPU
cannot do all of them simultaneously. Similar to any electronic processor, it performs its operations one
at a time. However, the speed of performance internally, makes the external results appear to have all
operations accomplished at once.
scanning
The term scan is a method of describing how the CPU performs its assigned tasks (see Figure 5.2). It
begins at the first function, such as a relay contact, entered into the beginning of memory (address 0000).
It proceeds sequentially through all memory addresses performing all functions entered by the user (for
example, relay contacts, timers, latching relays, counters, sequencers, shift registers, etc.) until it reaches
either the end of memory (address 1723) or the end of the program as entered by the user.
During the scan the logic sets or resets coils, according to the instructions entered into the logic program
by the user. The status of these coils is immediately available to the next logic function. At the end of
the logic scan, the CPU gets input data from the input modules and provides new data to output
modules.
Next, the programmer, if connected, is serviced by making logic changes and/or updating its display.
After servicing the programmer, the CPU performs a check of its internal hardware and resets the
watchdog timer. The watchdog timer is a hardware timer set at 180 msec (milliseconds) to ensure that
memory or internal circuit faults do not cause the CPU to enter an endless loop because of hardware
failure. If a scan is not completed at least once every 180 msec (typical maximum scan is 60 msec), the
hardware will shut the CPU down turning outputs OFF. Finally, any forced I/O wiIl be entered. With
successful completion of the internal checks, the CPU goes back to the start of the scan and continues its
scanning sequence with the logic function entered at address 0000. This repetitive scanning operation is
performed from the time power is applied to the CPU until it is removed.
Total scan time includes user logic solution time plus overhead. The overhead time includes monitoring
functions, I/O updates and housekeeping tasks. The typical scan times listed in the specifications in
Chapter 1 assume that only basic instructions have been programmed (AND, OR, STR, NOT, etc.), they
do not include overhead. The overhcti time is about the same (4 to 5 mSec) for Series One and Series
One Plus. This time must be added to the logic solution time to obtain the total real scan time.
515
Programming
GEK-90842
In order to achieve the maximum scan time, the monitor function should be disabled for both Series One
and Series One Plus programs, since the monitor function adds about 2 mSec of overhead time when it
is active. Also the overhead of a Series One Plus is increased slightly when communicating through the
DCM, since both the Series One Plus CPU and DCM have been designed to provide a much higher
throughput than the Series One CPU/DCM combination. Additionally, timer and counter instructions in
the Series One Plus are slower than in the Series One because of the ability to use registers for preset
values.
The scanning operation is very basic to PC operation and should not be overlooked. It provides a very
useful verification of the CPUs reliability. For details on troubleshooting, refer to Chapter 7. The
scanning operation also provides a fixed and definable sequence of logic decisions. Functions are solved
in the order programmed. The results of one function (for example, coil, timer, shift register, etc.) are
immediately available internally to the next logic element. In larger complex logic programs, internal
races can be eliminated. The user does not need to be concerned with the time delay relays required to
pull in or activate nor their variations (for example, a 4 pole vs 8 pole relay).
SOLVE
LADDER
MAGRAM
SERVICE
r/o
SERVICE
PROGRAMMER
WATCHDOG
TMER
ADD FORCED Vb
Figure S-2. CPU Scanning Sequence
Programmer Functions
The basic programming language of the Series One and Series One Plus PCs is a simple relay ladder
representation based upon standard Boolean functions (AND, OR, and NOT). Throughout the discussion of programming, examples will be used to illustrate the function described. The illustration of the
Programmer (Figure 5.3) will be used as a reference for these examples and specific key sequences will
5-16
Programming
GEK-90842
be provided so that the user can follow and demonstrate the example. A short-hand notation will also be
provided that is recommended as a simple method to document your program. A complete discussion of
the programmer is provided in Chapter 4. A brief overview of important keys is presented below to aid
the users understanding of the examples.
The keyboard has both upper and lower case functions similar to a typewriter. The numerical keys for
most programming steps are accessed by first selecting the SHF (Shift) key to the upper right. Once
depressed, the SHF LED is lit (display center right) and then the appropriate numerical digit(s) can be
selected. The shift function is latched and will be released only by selection of the ENT (Enter) or CLR
(Clear) key. The SHF key does not have to be held down. The display window in the upper left reflects
either address or data information (not both) as the operation progresses. Typically, as keys are selected,
their resmctive LEDs will light to display the function selected. Other important keys are as follows:
KEY
AND
OR
STR
NOT
OUT
TMR
CNT
SET
MCS
MCR
SR
RST
F
R
FUNCTION
AND referenced status with previously entered logic (Series)
OR referenced status with previously entesed logic (Parallel)
START new rung of a ladder diagram
NOT or invert (i.e. make normally closed) contact referenced
OUTput logic status to a coil, either output or intemal
TIMER is selected as desired function
COUNTER is selected as &s&d function
SET latching relay or shift register status
Master Control Start - begin control of master control relay
Master Control Reset - end control of master control relay
Shift Register - establish range of shift register
RESET latching relay or shift register status
FUNCTION - specifies a data operation (Series On& Plus)
REGISTER - specifies a data qister or group entry (Series One Plus)
a41 939
Figure 5-X Programmer for Series One and Series One Plus
Programming
5-17
_~
GEL90842
Basic Ladder Diagram Format

Figure 5.4 illustrates a typical ladder diagram. Between two vertical power rails to the extreme left and
right, contacts are placed in horizontal strings or lines. Adjacent lines can be connected between
contacts by a vertical line to allow logic to be solved in parallel. The horizontal strings (series) of
contacts anz equivalent to ANDs. For example line 1 can be described as: A and B and C must occur
before coil X is energized; any one reference can prevent the coil from energizing. Similarly vertical
contacts are in parallel and programmed as ORs. Thus, line 2 is described as: D or E or F will energize
coil Y. Any one reference can by itself energize coil Y.
In the Series One and Series One Plus PCs, there is no internal limit on how many contacts can be
placed in series, nor how many in parallel. However, as a practical limit for simple programming and
system documentation, it is recommended that a horizontal string be limited to nine contacts and one
coil; and a vertical array to seven parallel lines.
a42342
E
F
It
OUTPUT f
COIL
RlGuT
POWER
RAIL
LEU
POWER RAIL
Figure S-4. Typical Ladder Diagram
Concept of Power Flow

One key feature of PCs is power flow. This is a conceptual flow of power used to visualize the operation
of coils, timers, counters etc. Referring again to Figure 5.4, the left hand power rail can be envisioned as
hot (connected to 115 V ac or +24 V dc) and the right as its associated neutral (connected to 115
V ac or -24 V dc), The coils (e.g. X and Y) will be energized if there is a path for power flow from the
left leg to the coil placing the full potential across the coil. If there is no power (electron) flow, the coil
will be de-energized (OFF).
Power always flows from the left towards the right and will pass through normally open contacts if their
references are energized (ON) or normally closed with de-energized (OFF) references. Power flow is
also allowed vertically either up or down between adjacent lines where parallel connections are
programmed. However, power can NOT flow from right to left at any time through contacts or
horizontal shunts. I&s feature simpWes programmin g and prevents undesired sneak paths. However,
if hard wired relays are replaced by a Series One or Series One Plus PC, it is possible some adjustments
may be necessary to the logic to either simplify the programming or to add sneak paths that may be a
basis for the relays functioning.
5-18
Programming
GEK-90842
Unlimited References
Another difference between PC programmin g and hardwired relays is that any reference such as an input
or coil can be used on relay contacts as often as necessary. Since references are merely a unique series
of bits in a word of memory, they can be programmed wherever and whenever necessary. Now with
PCs, there is no need to count relay contacts and try to limit individual references to four or less
contacts; no need to plan to use form C relay configurations to squeeze two contacts from one pole. Any
reference can be envisioned as a relay controlling many poles providing both normally open and
normally closed contacts that operate without any time delay from pole 1 (closest to the coil) to pole
1000 (furthest away from coil).
Programming
5-19
GE&90842
2
Basic Instructions
SECTION
Basic Instructions
This group can be considered as the basic building blocks for a relay ladder diagram. The instructions
reference discrete bits that are to be part of an operation, that is, a conditional contact or the end of a
rung, which could be an output or an internal relay.
How to Begin Programming

The easiest way to begin feeling comfortable with programming a Series One or Series One Plus PC, is
to enter one rung of logic with contacts in series that control a single coil. Physically connect input
devices (pushbutton switches, limit switches, etc) and an output device (such as a lamp) to the
corresponding terminals on an input and output module in the PC, turn the inputs on and off, and observe
the result on the output device.
Entering a Rung With Series Contacts

In the following program sequence, a rung of ladder logic is shown, then the keystroke sequence
required for entering the logic. Notice that when entering a numerical sequence, the SHF key must be
depressed before the number or number sequence. In the example, each keystroke is separated by a
comma. Numbers with more than 1 digit are grouped together for ease of interpretation.
Turn the mode keyswitch to the PROG (programmin g) position in order to enter the logic.
Enter wo normally open contacts (1 and 2) in series controlling the state of an output coil (17). Both
contacts must be closed to tum on the output.
a40347
When input devices wired to inputs 1 and 2 are closed, output 17 will tum on. The operating state of the
inputs and outputs, either ON or OFF, can be monitored by observing the LEDs on the Programmers
logic display that correq3ond to the input or output.
Entering the Clear all Memory Sequence

After observing the operation of the series rung, the rung can be deleted by entering the clear all
memory sequence, or the rung can remain in memory, with the next rung starting at the next memory
address. The next memory address, assuming that tEre above rung was entered at address 0000, is 0003.
If you wish to clear tie contents of memory and , start the next rung at address 0000, enter the following
key sequence.
CLR, SHF, 348, DEL, NXI
5-20
Programming
GEK-90842
When the clear all memory sequence has been successfully entered, the rung of logic that had been
entered will be cleared from memory. (Remember, whenever the clear all memory sequence is entered,
the entire contents of memory will be cleared).
NOTE
Be sure that you want to clear the complete contents of memory when using this sequence, there
is no recovery.
Entering a Rung with Parallel Contacts

Continue the simple program entry by entering a normally open contact (4) in parallel with a second
nomally open contact (20) that references the output coil (20). In series with these, add a normally
closed contact (5), then the output coil.
a40347
If an input device, such as a limit switch is wired to input 4, and the limit switch is closed, the output
would turn on. The normally open contact referencing the output would close and become a seal
contact, which would maintain the output in the on state, even if the limit switch wired to input 4 were
then opened. The output could be turned off, in this example, by momentarily closing a switch
connected to the closed contact, reference 5. Since this is a normally closed contact, it would open when
the switch is depressed, and the output would turn off. This logic is commonly used as a motor starter.
Entering a Simple Timer Rung

Next, enter two rungs of logic, the first ending with a timer, having a preset value of 30 secondsThe
second rung has an output controlled by the state of the timer coil. When input 11 is closed, the timer
begins timing up from 0 towards the preset value of 30 seconds. When the accumulated value of the
preset reaches 30, the timer coil will turn on, contact T605 will close, and output 25 will turn on.
a40347
5-21
Programming
Basic Relay Logic (Motor Starter)

With this background on the basics of pro gramming a Series One and Series One Plus PC, Figure 5.5
provides a simple example to illustrate relay ladder programming. The references used were selected for
illustrative purposes and can be adjusted as necessary to meet your application needs. This is a simple
motor starter and seal circuit. An input module is assumed to be installed next to the CPU (005 = start
pushbutton input, and 006 = stop pushbutton). Adjacent to the input module is assumed to be an output
module (010 = output to motor starter). The program does not care whether these input and output
modules are 115 V ac or 24 V dc. The programmer keys to be depressed to enter this logic are also
shown in the figure. The start key begins a new rung of logic; this example and most that follow assume
an empty memory so the example begins at address 0000.
START
KEY
ON LEDS
STR
I
STR SHF
SW
0
STR
STR. SHF
ADR
STOP
IANdl
0001
ADR
DIS PLAY
AND
SHF ]
AND. NOT. SHF
6
I
AND. NOT, SHF
IF]
ADR
OR. SHF
oft SHF
ON LEDS
AND. NOT
5
OR
OR, SW
KEY
DtSPLAY
6
0003
OUT
I SW
OUT. SHF
10
El 1
OUT, SHF
0 0 0.2
00
OUT, SHF
10
ENI
I
ADR
0 0 0 4
Figure 5-5. Sample Relay Logic (Motor Starter)

Motor Starter Logic Description
The first reference is entered (STR, SHF, 5, ENT) and a normally open contact is established since the
NOT key was not depressed. Referring to Figure 5.5, the next function moving from the left (contact
005) to the right along the top line of the logic rung, is a parallel contact referenced as 010. Parallel
logic is represented by the OR function, which is selected followed by the desired reference (10) and the
Enter key to load the memory. Again moving to the right of the top line, the next contact is in series with
the logic completed so far. Thus the ANTI key is selected (for series logic). Since this contact is
normally closed, the NOT key is also selected followed by the reference 6 and the Enter key.
The final element of this logic is the coil or output of the rung. Selecting the Output key does not ensure
a real world output will be generated; it also must refer to an I/D reference and have an output
module inserted in the proper slot. To establish the rung output coil, the output key is selected followed
by the Shift key, the reference (10) and the Enter key. Outputs can be paralleled by entering additional
OUT functions immediately after the initial one.
Programming
5-22
GEK-90842
Normally Closed Input

After completing the logic of Figure 5.5, several features of progr amming should be noticed. First, all
elements of the program are entered directly into CMOS memory as the Enter @NT) key is depressed.
Thus, if power should be interrupted while a program is being entered or altered, it will be totally saved
except possibly for the one element being worked on. Second, there is feedback on the programmer for
all entries. Something happens (LED ON, display changes, error codes appear, etc) for each key
selected. Third, the logic is set up for inputs that are wired normally open. If an input is wired normally
closed, an adjustment must be made to the symbol (NO or NC) used for that input. Referring to Figure
5.6, inputs sense voltage at their field terminals. They can not detect if a voltage is from a normally
open limit switch that is depressed or from a normally closed pushbutton that is not depressed. Cover up
the two field devices wired to inputs 002 or 003. If you were the input module, and both applied voltage
to the field terminals, could you tell which was wired normally closed and which normally open?
Because of this, the programmer or system designer must compensate.
Figure 5-6. Example of Normally Closed Inputs

In a previous discussion, it was stated that inputs are like relays with many poles and you are selecting
which type of pole is to be used when you program. In the lower half of Figure 5.6, coil 002 is shown in
the de-energized position; however it is wired to a normally closed pushbutton. When you want power
to flow if the pushbutton is NOT depressed, which contact type do you choose, NO or NC? The answer
is normally open since coil 002 is always energized except when the pushbutton is depressed. Therefore, in pqGimmin g with the Series One or Series One Plus PCs, a normally open contact is
appropriate. If the stop button of Figure 5.6 were wired normally closed, its internal logic should be
normally open to compensate] However, this concept does not normally cause problems for the
programmer. Since PCs are reprogrammable, if an error is made and discovered when the system is
exercised, it is easy to correct
Programming
5-23
GEK-90842
Push-Down Stack
Two very useful functions are programmed using a 2-key sequence, the AND STR and the OR STR.
The AND STR provides a common series connection between a block of logic and the OR STR
provides a common parallel connection for a block of logic. These instructions provide the connecting
links not allowed with any of the previously mentioned instructions. The logic used with this type of
operation is referred to as a push-down stack. The push-down stack can accommodate up to eight levels
(groups) of logic. A push-down stack can be thought of as a temporary storage area to allow the
combining of elements in series (AND) or parallel (OR) connections. Figure 5.7 illustrates the use of
these functions.
a40545
Figure 5-7. AND STR and OR STR Connections

The following pages contain a more detailed description of a pushdown stack and programming with
the AND SIR/or STR instructions.
Programming
S-25
GEL90842
Rule Number 3: The AND STR or OR SIR instructions logically AND or OR location number 1 in
the stack with location number 2 and writes the result into location number 1. In other words, these
instructions put one group of contacts in series or parallel with another group of contacts. This
instruction also moves the contents of positions 3 through 8 up one location.
Rule Number 4: An OUT Y instruction sets Y to reflect the status of location number 1 in the stack. If
the status of location number 1 is ON (I), output Y will be turned off. If the status of location number 1
is OFF (O), output Y will be turned off.
LOCATKIN
NUMBER
Figure 540. AND STR/OR STR Example Number 1
s-26
Programming
GEK-90842
ED
SIR
4
6
ANDNOT
ORSTR
iEFsTR
20
LOCATION
4Ht -
ANDSTR
our
20
20
;IH'C
Figure 5-11. AND STR/OR STR Example Number 2

Use of Retentive Coils as Latches
All coils referenced so far have not been retentive upon power failure. Thus if a non-retentive coil is ON
when power is removed fkom the CPU, it will be OFF upon reapplication of power (if Switch 1 on the
CPU module is ON). Them axt 28 special coil references (340-373) that axe retained upon power
failure. Thus if they were ON prior to loss of power, they will be ON when power is restored; they will
be OFF while power is OFF since no scanning is being performed. In addition to these 28 references,
latches can be built using shift register references (400-577) that are not being used to perform shift
register functions. Either retentive coils (340-373) or shift registers (400-577) can be used to control
contacts, both normally open and normally closed wherever required. Ikis special retentive function is
derived from their use as coils to complete or store the results of relay logic rungs.
Programming a Latched Relay

Latches require two separate functions or inputs similar to hard-wired relays, a SET (turn ON) and a
RESET (turn OFF). These functions are commonly referred to as latch and unlatch. If both are active,
the last one in the scan will be controlling the state of the coil. To turn on a latch, the function SET
Programming
527
GE&90842
followed by the retentive coil reference (for example, 340-373 or 400-577) is used instead of OUT, plus
the coil number at the end of a logic rung. Once power flows to that coil, it will be energized (turned
ON) and remain ON even if power flow to it should be interrupted.
To turn a latch off (de-energize) separate relay logic should be built ending in a RST (Reset) function
and the [same] coil number. In many applications, it is useful to allow the system to clear (turn OFF)
coils when power fails so that an orderly restart is possible when power is restored, whether that is 2
seconds or several hours, or several days later. Other applications require the control system to
remember the status of key items such as part position, operations completed, elevators up or down, etc.
The Series One and Series One Plus are provided with both standard and retentive coils to allow the user
to tailor the program to fit their requirements.
Figure 5.12 illustrates the programmin g of retentive (latched) relays. Coil 340 is used only as m
example.
The logic to either set or reset a retentive coil can be of any convenient size similar to
standard coil logic. When power flows through the top rung to the SET coil 340 function, it will be
energized and remain ON even if power flow is removed. Anytime the power flows through the lower
rung (regardless of path), coil 340 will be turned OFF. Since the set coil 340 is programmed before the
reset, it is placed in earlier memory locations and the reset function will have overriding control if they
are both energized.
271
132
037
175
340
STR
AND
OR
OR
STR NOT
AND
OR
AND
SET
STR
AND
STR
AND
RESET OR
SET
067
306
036
340
AND NOT
RESET
271
132
135
377
037
175
267
STR
340
067
306
015
307
SfR
036
340
1 1 14 WORDS PER ELEMENT
Figure 5-12. Example of Latching Logic

Master Control Relay Functional Description
To control large quantities of coils on a supervisory basis, a Master Control relay function is provided.
This function allows an efficient method of programmin g to turn off large quantities of coils in case some
major permissive is not satisfied. One approach would be to incorporate a permissive contact in each
rung controlling one of the coils. This may require many contacts and inefficient use of memory.
Another method is to bracket those rungs over which master control is desired; this is similar to
quotation marks around a direct statement (one at each end to define exactly where the statement starts
and where it ends).
The permissive logic is first built starting to the left of the ladder diagram adjacent to the hot power
rail. Then an MC!? (Master Control Start) function is entered, followed by the logic it is to control, and
ending with an MCR (Master Control Reset) function. The MCS and MCR axe like quotations around
the logic to be controlled. When power flows to the MCS, the logic enclosed will operate normally. If
548
Programming
GEK-90842
there is no power flow to MCS, the coils will be forced to the OFF state regardless of the internal logic
conditions, timers will be reset to zero, and counters will stop (frozen) but not reset. The amount of logic
controlled by the Master Control relay function is limited only by the memory provided.
STR
AND
MCS
STR
OR
AND
OUT
152
156
010
271
SPAN Of
CONTROL
~+--+t-++-e
265
+--it---u+
043
STR
AND
AND NOT
OUT
STR
AND
OUT
-MCR
STR
AND
OR
AND NOT
OUT
003
005
007
043
021
052
152
156
010
271
152
027
265
017
012
315
303
043
1 18 WORDS PER ELEMENT
Figure 543. Example of Master Control Relay Logic

Programming a Master Control Relay Function
Figure 5.13 illustrates the use of one pair of MCS/MCR functions. In many cases it is convenient to
view the MCS function as defining a sub-left power rail whose connection to the main power rail is
dependent upon some relay logic. The conditional logic (IO03 - 1125 in this example) is built fkst using
the normal relay logic. The MCS function is entered without any reference to create the beginning point
of the control. Logic is built using normal functions within the control area. Note the duplication of
contact 152, which cost only one memory word, there is no need to count or limit the quantity of relay
contacts used in PCs. To end the master control, the MCR function is entered returning control to the
next power rail to the left and conventional logic can now be built. Unless both references 003 !andA
005 are energized (ON) in this example, coils 052,271, and 265 will be OFF. When these contacts are
passing power, coils 052, 271, and 265 will respond to their normal logic.
Multiple Master Control Relay Functions

Multiple master control functions are possible in any logic program. They can be embedded within the
scope of the first MCS and the last MCR as necessary, as illustrated in Figure 5.14. The f&t group of
coils under the Master Control of references 010 [or] 011 is 204-213 which includes two smaller groups
(207-210 and 212-213). Group 207 and 210 are under the Master Control of 010 or 011 and 015, while
group 212 and 213 are controlled by 010 or 011 and 022. Note the requirement for two successive
MCRs to end both the group 212-213 and the larger group 204-213. To operate correctly there must be
an equal number of MCS and MCR fhnctions in your program.
Programming
5-29
GEK-90842
ST-R
010
011
OUT
SfR
204
012
205
013
AND Not
014
SfR
MCS
STR NOT
i:
Sm
wr
OUT
E
MCA
STR
ANoNof
OUT
STR
MCS
STR
OUT
SfR NOT
ANDNOT
L
r
$i
-MCR
STR
AND
Lbof
Out
I1 22
016
207
012
210
WOROS
023
021
:;:
024
212
025
026
213
030
031
033
032
27:
PER ELEMEN
Figure 5-14. Multiple Master Control Relay Logic

Disabling of Outputs
In addition to Master Control functions, all outputs can be affected by an internal special function coil
referenced as 376. When this coil is energized by user logic, all outputs in the hardware I/O structure
will be turned OFF. Internal coils and statuses will still operate, but only internally. The only exception
is to coils that are programmed as SET OUT functions rather than the OUT function. These will still be
able to provide their normal output status (ON or OFF) to the I/O section.
Figure 5.15 illustrates
the use of coil 376. In this example, when either reference 003 or 056 (inputs,
outputs, or internal depending upon hardware I/O configuration) is energized, coil 376 will also be
energized. This will cause all coils programmed with the OUT function, such as 010, to be turned OFF
at their output module, although they will function normally internally. However, coils driven by the
SET OUT function, such as 011, will not be affected by the status of coil 376. Table 5.7 summarizes the
effectof coil 376 on the OUT and SET OUT functions.
NOTE
It is not recommended that the Output Disabler coil (376) be used with retentive coils (latches).
Table 5-7. Effect of Coil 376 (Output Disabler)

Coil 376 OFF
I
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Coil 376 ON
OFF
ON
5-30
Progra.mming
GE&90842
003
376
II
STR
OR
OUT
STR
OR
ANDNOT
OUT
STR
OR
ANDNOT
SET OUT
056
i
0
005
It
006
#
010
010
I I
005
003
056
370
005
010
006
010
005
011
006
011
006
SET
I11 00 WORDS PER ELEMENT

Figure 5-15. Sample Coil Disabler Logic
Timer and Counter Functional Description
In addition to relay logic, there are a wide variety of functions that are standard with the Series One and
Series One Plus. Timing and Counting are two of the most commonly used non-relay functions. These
functions are special coils using references 600-677. Up to 64 total timers and/or counters can be built
within the Series One or Series One Plus. They end a rung of logic similar to using an OUT function
for relay logic. Unlimited contacts, both normally closed (timed OFF delay) and normally open (timed
ON delay) can be referenced to any timer/counter coil. A preset value is used to indicate how many
seconds, tenths of seconds, or counts, the function should delay before energizing its coil. When the coil
is energized, time or counts continue to be recorded. All presets can be up to four decimal digits (0001
to 9999), which allow timers to be set from 0.1 to 999.9 seconds, and counters from 1 to 9999 counts.
Timers can be set from 0.01 to 99.99 seconds with the Series One Plus 3.7K PC only. Timers are set to
a .Ol second duration by setting output reference 770 (SET 770). Caution must be used when doing this,
since reference 770 being reset in the same program would cause the timers to revert back to .l second
duration.
Special Timer/Counter References

The four references 674-677 obtain their presets from external thumbwheels
via the thumbwheel
interface. Additionally, a Timer/Counter Setpoint unit can be used with the Series One Plus to enter the
preset values. When a preset value is selected with the Timer/Counter Setpoint unit, the values are
simultaneously entered into &bit registers, (two registers for each 4digit BCD value). The registers can
then be used to specify the preset value for any Timer or Counter.
It should be noted that only 1
Thumbwheel Interface unit or 1 Timer/Counter Setpoint unit can be used with a series One Plus PC, not
both at the same time. These four references cannot use internal presets; however, they will count up to
9999 and can be used to drive sequencers without the thumbwheel interface.
Programming Timers
Timers (Figure 5.16) can be programmed in either seconds or tenths of seconds (or hundredths of
seconds with a Series One Plus 3.7K PC) and require only one line of logic to control their operation.
When power flows to the timer coil, it will begin recording time at the rate of one count every 0.1
Programming
5-31
GE&90842
seconds or .Ol seconds as applicable. The timer starts at 0000.0 and records time, towards the preset
value. When the preset value is reached, an event will happen according to what has been programmed.
Also, when the timer reaches the preset value, the timer will continue timing up, until reset by an
interruption of power flow through its conditional contacts, or until it reaches its maximum value of
999.9 or 99.99, as applicable at which time it will stop. If power flow to a timer is interrupted or if the
CPU should stop operating, the timer will be reset to zero. The basic clock driving all timers derives its
accuracy from a crystal within the CPU, it does not depend upon the AC power line frequency.
RELAY LOGIC
Figure 546.
PRESET
Sample of Timer Logic
A timer can be programmed to be self resetting, by pro gramming a closed contact refereficing the timer
coil. If programmed in this manner, when the preset value is reached, the timer coil will tum on, the
closed contact referencing the coil will open and the timer will reset to 000.0 and start timing up again.
Figure 5.17 illustrates the pro gramming of various types of timers. The relay logic is built in the normal
The timer (TMR) function is selected along with a timer/counter
manner up to the coil selection.
reference (600-677). Each timer or counter must have its own unique coil to operate properly. After the
timer is identified, the preset is entered.
In this example, coil 41 will be OFF until 15 seconds after timer 601 is energized. It will remain ON
until either the power flow to 601 is interrupted or the CPU goes through a power up operation. Coil 42
is inverted from 41 in that it stays ON until 15 seconds after power flows continuously to the timer 601,
when it goes OFF. Timer 602 delays 5.5 seconds after reference 27 is energized before it turns its coil
ON, also energizing coil 43.
Specifying Timer Preset Values
The Timer preset value can be either a fixed value entered after the T/C reference, the BCD value
entered with the Timer/Counter Setpoint unit for the special Timer/Counter references (674.677), or the
value in the registers that are assigned to the special Timer/Counter references. These registers are 564
and 565 for T/C reference 614; 566 and 567 for T/C reference 675; 570 and 571 for T/C reference 676;
and 572 and 573 for T/C reference 677.
The preset value information is also valid for Counters.
Programming
5-32
a4001 6
OR
ANDNOT
isrlrlr
STRNOTTMR
Il.17
LEDS
DISPLAY
SIR
STR, SHF
ST-R,SHF
STR, SHF
CY
DtSPUY
LEDS
SHF
SHF
SHF
SHF
OR
OqsHF
oR,SHF
0R, SHF
AND, NOT
AND, NOT, SHF
AND, NOT, SHF 3
AND, NOT, SHF 32
0.0.0.3
6
60
601
0.0.0.4
WORDS
025
026
032
601
15
601
041
601
042
027
602
5.5
602
043
PER ELEMENT]
KEY
6
60
601
0.0.0.6
LEDS
DISPUY
2
27
0.0.1 .o
6
60
602
0.0.1.1
5 ,.
5.
5.5
0.0.1.2
SHF
SHF 6
SHF 60
SHF 601
0.0.0.8
4
42
0.0.0.9
SHF
SHF
6
St-F60
StiF 602
0.0.1.3
4
43
0.0.1.4
Figure 5-17. Example of Timer Logic

Programming Counters
Counters (Figure 5.18) operate similar to timers except that they require two rungs of relay logic to
control their operation. The upper rung controls when the counter is incremented. When this rung goes
from no power-flow to power-flow (OFF to ON), the counter is incremented by one. To cause another
count to be recorded, power-flow must be interrupted and another OFF to ON transition must occur. All
counters count up, starting at zero, towards a preset value. The ability to detect transitions and record
counts is built into the counter function and requires no further programming by the user. The lower
rung of logic (second STR function) controls the reset of the counter function.
Whenever this rung
supplies power flow to the counter, the counter will be reset to zero. If both rungs supply power flow, no
Programming
GEK-90842
counts are recorded

power.
and the counter is forced to zero.
All counters
.
ANY
RELAY LOGIC
t
COUNT
.
C
0
are retentive upon loss of CPU
1b PRESET
ANY
RELAY LOGIC
RESET
E
R
Figure S-18. Example of Counter Logic

Figure 5.19 illustrates the operation of counters. Again, the relay logic driving the counters is built as
separate rungs using normal relay programming
techniques.
Counter 603 will count (increment)
whenever references 015 and 016 are both ON or reference 017 is ON. If one parallel path is energized
while the other is also ON, no additional count is recorded. When the count reaches 35 (its preset), coil
603 is energized, also energizing coil 46. Counting will continue beyond the preset value, and will
continue counting until the counter is reset. Whenever reference 013 is energized, regardless of the
count or top rung status or coil state, counter 603 will be reset to zero and held at that value until
reference 013 is de-energized.
Programming
5-34
GEK-90842
046
1.14 WORDS
KEY
I STR
I SHF
STR. SHF
tri
STR. S-IF
15
[p]
STR. SHF
1 ENfj
ADR
ADR
0001
DISPLAY
LEDS
I CNI
STR.
CNT
SHF
STR.
CNT. SHF
[-q
STR, CNT, SHF
101
STR.
CNT.
SHF
CNT
13j
STR. CN?, SHF
ISHTl
CNT. SHF
I EN?
ADR
161
CNT. SHF
ml
OUT
101
CNT, SHF
AND,
SHF
I OR
OR
ElSW
OR. SW
El
0004
STR
ICNT]
ADR
I
L
OR
OR, SHF
ADR
1
16
0002
Enn
13
ON
I STR
AND, SHF
AND, SHF
KEY
AND
ENT
El
SHF
STR. SHF
STR.
SHF
SHF
El
DISPLAY
--
STR
0 STR
SHF
!ZE]
I
ON LEDS
KEY
STR.
ENT
II
DISPLAY
STR
u
I
ON LEDS
PER ELEMENT
SW
1
17
0.003
ENT
CNT. SHF
ADR
SHF
lJ
SHF
[T]
SHF
IEM]
ADR
6
60
603
0007
OUT, SHF
6:
,;I
OUT, SHF
0005
[7]
OUT, SHF
46
[ENI]
ADR
0.0.0
3
35
0006
Figure 5-19. Example of Counters

Extending the Timer and Counter Range
Timers and countes can be connected in series or cascaded to extend their range beyond four digits.
Figure 5.20 illustrates several techniques to extend preset ranges by utilizing multiple timer/counter
Programming
5-35
GEK-90842
functions.
Timer 611 will record time as soon as references 206 and 225 are energized.
After 800
seconds it energizes its coil and stops recording time. However, timer 612 starts as soon as 611 reaches
it preset and continues for another 950 seconds. This is a total of 1750 seconds from the time T611
started. Whenever reference 206 or 225 is de-energized, timer 611 is reset to zero, de-energizing coil
611, and also resetting timer 612 (if necessary).
7wH
1611
225
STR
1611
1612
4 950
I I
T613
1613
l 1.0
1613
l
CNT
614
306
4 t
052
.
CNT
C615
615
I t
a 500
206
225
611
800
611
612
950
613
613
1.0
613
306
614
750
052
615
615
500
615
307
616
BOO
L.
.
*
1
CNT
616
307
I I
l 750
i I
C615
AND
TMR
w-e
STR TMR
TMR
W-W
STR NOT TMR
TMR
-aSTR TMR
STR
CNT
--w
STR
STR CNT
CNT
W-W
STR CNT
STR
CNT
-a-
*BOO
Figure 5-20. Example of Extended Counters

Another pair of functions are timer 613 and counter 614. Timer 613 is a self resetting timer with a
preset of one second (10 tenths). It produces outputs each one scan long, every second from the time the
CPU starts until it is auned OFF. Counter 614 counts these pulses up to 750 of them (750 seconds) until
reset by reference 106. Since counters are retentive, using timer 613 to produce a one second clock that
is counted by 614, results in a retentive timer. A similar result occurs if the top rung of counter 614
were referenced to intemal coil 375 in lieu of 613. The third example in Figure 5.20 is counters 615 and
616. Counter 615 counts reference 52, up to 500, and then resets itself. Counter 616 records how many
of these groups of 500 counts occur. Since counter 616 has a preset of 900, its coil will be energized
only after 450,000 transitions of reference 52. At anytime, counter 615 has a representation of the small
number of counts (O-499 or least significant portion) and counter 616 the larger values representing
multiples of 500 (5OO-45Oscxx) or most significant portion. Application techniques shown in Chapter
8 illustrate how a low order preset of 1000 can be obtained to produce a more conventional double
precision counter.
5-36
Programming
GEK-90842
Sequencer Operation
All Series One and Series One Plus counters have one other very powerful feature which is applicable to
all counters. They all can be programmed to act as sequencers. Each counter can control a 1000 step
sequencer, which allows any Series One or Series One Plus PC to have sixty four 1000 step sequencers,
each similar to a stepping switch or drum sequencer. Figure 5.21 illustrates the operation of one of these
sequencers. Each sequencer moves fkom one position to the next as directed by some user defined signal
shown here as a pushbutton.
Counters move or are incremented once each time a count is recorded.
Each sequencer starts at zero or home position when the counter is reset, and progresses through its steps
one at a time in numerical order. At any time the position of the sequencer can be determined by the
current count value contained in its storage. Although any sequencer can have up to 1000 steps, many
applications are solved with a smaller number. To limit a sequencer to less than 1000 steps, the preset
on the counter is used. As usual, each step of the sequencer can control any number of contacts.
INCREMENT
Figure 5-21. Illustration of Sequencer Operation

To illustrate the capabilities of the sequencer, refer to the example in Figure 5.22. The sequence map in
this example is in the form of a timing diagram that has an overall cycle of 45 seconds. This time is
subdivided into increments of 5 seconds per the requirements of this application. There are six outputs
to be controlled during the sequence with the desired ON periods shown by horizontal black lines.
Outputs are assigned and step numbers (starting at zero) are entered for each time period. To drive the
sequencer (Figure 5.23), a timer (600) is entered to reset itself each 5 seconds. Input 030 is used to
control the sequencer, which will not be incremented except when this input is energized.
When
energized, timer 600 will produce one pulse every 5 seconds. Counter 601 increments its count once
each pulse, thus stepping the sequencer. Input 031 will reset the sequencer to home (zero) whenever it is
energized, regardless of the count or position of the sequencer. The counter will go up to eight and then
stop waiting for a reset signal.
Programming
5-37
GE&90842
pc-~1-83-0021
TIME (SECONDS)
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
OUTPUT
033
RED LIGHT
OUTPUT 1
034
OUTPUT 2
035
GREEN LIGHT
036
BLUE ffiHT
037
SOLENOID
STEP NUMBER
040
Figure 5-22. Example of Sequencer

The outputs from the sequencer are programmed using relay logic. However, the reference is first to the
counter (601) controlling the sequencer and then to the current value that is going to control that contact.
For example if a reference to counter 601 is desired that will pass power only when that counter has a
current count of exactly one, the value 1 is entered after the reference to 601 on a normally open contact.
In this
and 6.
of step
seal-in
example, output 033 (red light) will be energized during 5 second intervals each for steps 0, 1,
Similarly, output 034 (Output 1) will be energized at step 2, sealed and held until the beginning
5 (end of step 4). The other outputs are controlled using similar logic with parallel contacts or
circuits.
If an output is ON for more steps than it is OFF, normally closed contacts would probably simplify your
logic. Counters can also be used that are driven independently and not with a time base.
Referencing Sequencer Contacts with a Series One Plus PC

When progr amming a Counter or Shift Register in a Series One Plus or Series One Plus 3.7K PC that
has the IC61OCPU105 CPU installed, a Drum Sequencer contact reference should not be used as the first
contact (with a STR or STR NOT instruction) in the COUNT or RESET rung of a counter or the DATA,
CLOCK, or RESET rung of a Shift Register. If a program using the step described above was entered
into a Series One PC having an IC6lOCPUlOl
CPU (this would work correctly) and written to Tape,
then later transferred to a Series One Plus PC with an IC61OCPUlOS CPU or a Series One Plus 3.7K PC
with an IC61OCPU106 CPU, the program would not execute properly.
Do not reference a Drum Sequencer step as the first contact in the rungs as described above. If a Drum
Sequencer step is required
as the first
contact reference for a rung in a Counter or Shift Register, a
programming technique *a~ would work properly is to use the required Drum Sequencer step to tum on
an internal Coil in a Separate rung, then reference that coil as the first contact in the Counter or Shift
Register rung.
PC Operation
4-27
GE&90842
t
USED
TABLE
v2. 2
-1.w-
SmEs MJlE
41:
402:
403:
404:
46:
46:
W?:
YE
W:
W:
!iEk
YM:
5Ei:
!iMk
1lByI:
wu?
ltwsR-2e#a-2l
418:8
411:If
412:8
413:3
414:s
415:8
416:3
4l7: 8
42k 8
421:8
422:3
423:a
424:3
425:8
426:t
427:t
430: t
518:
511:
512:
513:
514:
535:
!i36:
517:
52%:
521:
522:
523:
524:
5a
526:
523:
530:
431: 3
432: s
433: 8
434: 3
435: a
436:
437:
446:
441:
442:
1$3:
444:
445:
446:
447:
540:
541:
53:
532:
542:
533:
543:
534:
536:
544:
545:
536:
546:
537:
547:
63h
63l:
632:
633:
634:
6e
641:
642:
64%
644:
:
645
:
646
.W:
m
6s
am:
458=
45.1:
w:
(1153=
454:
455:
d?&
45%
4%
47l:
472:
!i6Ik
551:
552:
!B
554:
@5:
5&:
559:
F%gure4-8. Sample Outputs Used Table Printout
473:
474:
475:
#6:
477:
571:
572:
57%
574:
5Nk
5E
5n:
.
iF@6n
6721
67%
674:
6%:
:
f116
I
.
PC Operation
GEK-90842
OUTPUf
USED
REGISTERS
000:
881:
002:
913:
M4:
B15:
0Ek
I-ABM
v2.
$rq:
886:
06:
an:
me:
811:
@E.
070:
07l:
072:
833:
074:
mi:
@&
847:
020:
021:
622:
$23:
$24:
@25:
032:
033:
$34:
835:
066:
WI:
042:
813:
M4:
m6:
W:
052:
053:
64:
066:
967:
MTA E6BTER
m
)1:
4aQ:
Wo:
a:
405:
4k
$87:
410z
411:
412:
413:
414:
415:
U6:
117:
420:
430:
148:
421:
422:
423:
424:
425:
426:
427:
431:
432:
433:
434:
435:
436:
437:
441:
442:
443:
444:
445:
446:
u7:
520E
521
HI:
531:
532:
533:
534:
535:
536:
:
537
540:
541:
542:
5113:
544:
545:
51116
srtf
522;
52%
524:
525:
5a6:
527:
450:
451:
452:
453:
454:
455:
456:
457:
!i6k
551:
552:
553:
554:
ak
566:
967:
460:
4%
461:
462:
463:
464:
465:
466z
467:
m:
472:
473:
474:
475:
476:
477:
m
5%
sn:
573:
574:
535:
536:
s??..
Figure 4-9. Sample Outputs Used Table Printout (continued)
Programming
GEK-90842
030
0
1600
T600
0
T600
C601
e-m
*I
It
It
2
034
601
OR
AND
e-s
034
kt5
035
601
H
St1
tw
5
601
IW
6il
it
0
601
t+
036
3+
NOT
03:
601
OUT
STR
03:
601
bk-
SO?
OR
60:
OR
60:
OUT
STR
-we
03:
601
OR
60:
OR
60:
iii
STR
w-s
03:
601
OR
60:
&ii
STR
m-w
03;
601
OR
AND
weOUT
NOT
04:
601
04:
037
Sk
0
03:
601
STR
*
60:
CT
It
6
601
601
OR
it
CNT
s;R
-se
6&
0
030
600
600
6Oi
601
031
601
STRTMR
ANDNOTCNT
STR
4
033
601
4 8
COUNT
601
031
I
m-R
ANDNOTTMR
II
Sk
0
it
6
601
601
I?#
CA0
040
4
Figure 5-23. Typical Sequencer Logic

Shift Register Functional Description
Another powerful feature of all Series One and Series One Plus PCs is the ability to simulate the
operation of shiftregisters.
There are many physical devices that operate similar to shift registers such
as an anchor chain, a conveyor belt, an indexing machine, a line of customers at a refund desk, etc.
Programming
S-39
GEL90842
There are several common features that can be used to describe the generalized features of a shift
register. There is movement in all examples, normally in one direction. This movement can be defined
as a group of fixed increments such as one link, one box position, one operation, or one person. The 2
order 1 of activities (pulling chain in, placing boxes on conveyor, loading parts to be worked on/tested,
or adding people to the line) normally remains the same - first in, first out. In case of power failure in the
plant or building, it is desirable that the shift register retain its content (part position, people order, boxes
on conveyor, etc). However, in many cases it is also desirable that under logic control, the shift register
be cleared such as start up on Monday morning. It is much easier for the user to clear a retentive shift
register than it is to restore a cleared (volatile) content.
t-83-0023
CLOCK
Figure S-24. Typical Shift Register

A shift register is a group of storage locations that are synchronized by a timing or clock signal. Figure
5.24 illustrates the operation of a typical shift register with six stages. Each stage can store a single bit
which can represent a good or bad part, part or no part, ON or OFF, a one or zero, etc. Data is loaded
into the first stage, incremented through the shift register one position per clock pulse, and then out the
other end. When the clock signal goes from OFF to ON, each stage shifts one position towards the
right. The content of stage 6 is unloaded, stage 5 content moves into stage 6, stage 4 into 5, etc. until
stage 1 moves into stage 2. Stage 1 is then cleared, awaiting a load signal from another logic.
Within the Series One and Series One Plus, there are 128 retentive storage locations for use with shift
registers.
Since the Series One family logic functions are easy to use yet provide the user with
unmatched flexibility, they allow many separate shift registers to be built of various lengths as long as
the total quantity of stages does not exceed 128.
Each shift register requires several pieces of information to perform its function. Since it is a serial
operation, there must be a definite beginning and a similar ending. At the start of an operation parts are
put into the machine or boxes are put on the conveyor. A signal is required to indicate when a part is to
be placed into the shift register at stage one. Similarly, there is a signal that indicates when the shift
register should increment or move one position. The third and last signal is one to indicate when the
shift register (all stages) should be cleared to zero or OFF conditions.

The definition of size for any shift register requires the user to define how many stages are desired, and
which references are assigned to this function. The size of the shift register is usually established by the
maximum size of the physical device it is controlling.
For example, how many links are in the chain,
how many boxes can be placed on the conveyor, how many positions has the index machine, or how
many people is there space for? The references to stages of the shift registers within the Series One and
Series One Plus are to the references 400 through 577. Each stage or position of any shift register
should be unique. Storage locations should not be shared between different shift registers. However,
multiple logic functions can be programmed to operate upon one shift register to pruduce bidirectional
5-40
Programming
_ ~
GEK-90842
shift registers, ring counters, First In First Out or Last In First Out stacks. Each shift register reference
can control any number of relay contacts, both normally open and normally closed.
Shift Register Operation

To illustrate the operation of serial shift registers, Figure 5.25 defines a theoretical problem using a
sequential assembly machine. The machine has space for a maximum of 12 parts at any one time. these
parts may be cups or other storage locations physically on the machine. The operations are performed
while the machine is stationary and then all storage locations (cups) are indexed rapidly one position
towards the right. There are three separate operations such as part assembly, welding, clamping, nuts
tightened, painting and label placement, etc. Since it would be a waste of material and machine time to
operate on locations without a part in place, there is a sensor on the first location to detect when a part is
present. To the right is a testing position to determine good parts and bad parts for later separation.
Each position of the machine is assigned a number for later reference to the shift register. Notice that
positions 3, 5, 7, 10, and 12 ale only holding locations to store parts in progress and are related to the
mechanical layout of the machine.
WER
1
OPER
2
OPER
3
TEST
DIVERTER
PART
PRESENT
REJECTS I
Figure 5-25. Example of Shift Register

Figure 5.26 illustrates the logic, including shift register, used to solve this problem. The following I/O
references are assigned for use in this logic and can be changed as necessary to fit your application.
Part Present (Input)
Test OK (Input)
Reset/AU @put)
Operation 1 (Output)
Test (Output)
Diverter (Output)
Shift Permissive (Inted)
045
046
047
130
131
132
133
134
214
The timing of each operation allows the machine to index one position each 3 seconds. Thus timer 631
produces an output every 3 seconds as long as the internal permissive is satisfied. This coil (214) is
developed elsewhere and indicates all operations have been completed and hardware is out of the way,
allowing movement without damaging the machinery.
The shift register itself has three parallel rungs
each of which can be any combination of series and parallel contacts. The f!i.rst is the input signal.
Whenever this is supplying power flow the first stage of the shift register will turn ON and remains ON
Programming
5-41
GEK-90842
even if the input changes. The middle rung is the clock signal controlling the shifting of all stages.
When this signal goes from OFF (no power flow) to ON (power flow), all stages will shift one position.
This shifting is completed before other logic is solved. The bottom rung is the reset signal. Whenever
this signal is supplying power flow, (all) stages of the shift register will be turned OFF (cleared).
The references used by this shift register and thus the number of stages, must be defined. The reference
for the shift register itself is the location of the first stage and immediately following that is the reference
for the last stage of that shift register. In our example, input 045 indicates a part present and loads the
f&t stage (431) of the shift register.
Timer 631 (3 seconds) and coil 214 (permissive to shift) are both required before the shift occurs.
Finally, input 047 is used to clear all shift register stages perhaps at the start of machine operation or
otherwise under operator control. The shift register is built using references 431 through 444 (total 12
stages). The remaining relay logic merely connects the individual stages of the shift register to their
output to exercise proper control. The only exception is the next to the last rung. This rung receives the
test signal and resets stage 440 if the test is passed. Thus when the later stage (443) receives the data, it
will not activate coil 134 to operate the diverter. Therefore, good parts are passed and the diverter
operates only for bad parts, not for empty locations or good parts.
a42154
631
ll.mPARTwIEsw
OrNOPARTOFInrYnPARr
214
631
I
3.0
6TFINQttMFl
awl
WR
w-m
045
1431
STRTam
6R
-a-
631
214
631
3.0
045
631
214
047
431
444
432
130
434
131
436
132
440
133
046
340
443
134
046
443
134
it
Figure 5%. Example of Shift Register Logic
S-42
Programming
GE&90842
Normally many parts will be processed through this machine, continuously moving from input at
position 1 to output from position 12. However, for the purpose of illustration, a single part will be
examined as it moves down the machine. The part is placed in position 1, energizing input 045 and
setting shift register stage 43 1. After three seconds, timer 631 energizes clocking the shift register
causing the ON state for this part to move into stage 432. Then timer 631 will reset itself and stage 431
is cleared. When stage 432 is energized so is output 130 causing operation one to be performed on this
part. An additional three seconds pass and another clock cycle causes the ON to move to stage 433.
Stage 432 will be loaded from 431 which is OFF as long as additional parts are not processed. The
above discussion assumes no delays are experienced with the permissive.
The above operation repeats itself as the part goes through 434 (operation 2), 435 (rest), 436 (operation
3), 437 (rest), and 440 (test) at three second intervals. While at the test position, output 133 is energized
and the test OK input (046) is expected. If the part passes the test, input 046 will reset stage 440 making
the remainder of the shift register act as if no part was present and allowing the part to pass straight on
through. However, if the test is not passed, the ON stage moves to 441,442, and 443 at three second
intervals. At stage 443, it energizes output 134 causing the diverter to push off the defective part into the
reject bin.
Other logic can be added to improve the capabilities of this program.
For example, a timer could
measure the delay from the manual cycle (631 energized) and receipt of the permissive (214). It would
also alarm if this delay was excessive such as 5 or 8 seconds beyond the normal 3 seconds. Counters
could also be installed to record both good and bad parts produced.
This data can be readout and reset
via the programmer whenever desired, such as each shift, day, week, etc.
Forcing I/O References
An invaluable tool in the verification of user logic and field wiring is the ability to force I/O references.
The operation of the I/O forcing operation is dependent on the I/O reference being forced. Inputs
connected to external devices can be forced on or off for one solution of user logic. All other I/O
references can be forced on or off indefinitely, but are overridden by user logic.
The most frequent user of the I/O forcing function is for verification of field wiring of outputs. Since
user logic overrides the I/O forcing function it is recommended that this operation be performed with
user program memory cleared. The key sequences for forcing I/O references are as follows:
l
l
To force a specific I/O reference ON, enter the sequence: SET, SHF, Xxx (I/O) reference),
To force a specific I/O reference OFF, enter the sequence: RST, SHF, Xxx (I/O reference),
WARNING
When forcing input points with the set or RST sequence, be aware that the physical state of
the input may be overridden. If the forced set or RST occurs in the user logic program
before the input is checked in the same I/O scan, the set or RST state will take precedence
and would cause an output to be turned on or off at the wrong time.
ENT.
ENT.
Programming
GEK-90842
3
Data Operation Instructions for the Series One Plus
Programmable Controller
SECTION
Data Operations
The Series One Plus PC has, in addition to the basic ladder diagram functions, a group of instructions
that include data moves, math functions, logical operations, conversion, and external fault diagnosis.
These instructions provide the PC with the capability of performing various data operations. This group
of instructions operate on multiple bits rather than one bit at a time. These instructions are not available
with a Series One PC. For programs requiring many data operations, it is recommended that the Series
One Plus 3.7K PC be used.
All of these instructions require that the data to be operated on be loaded (stored) into a 160bit register
called the accumulator.
The data (numerical value) is processed in the CPU as BCD (Binary Coded
Decimal). Each BCD value is represented by 4 corresponding bits in the accumulator.
A BCD value
can be any of the digits 0 through 9. When the specified operation is performed with the contents of the
accumulator, the result of the operation is stored in the accumulator. This data can then be transferred to
external outputs or stored internally to be used as needed. Additionally, data can be stored in registers
(sixty-four 160bit registers) and those registers referenced when programming the data operations. Each
register can contain a 4digit BCD number.
Figure 5.27 is a block diagram showing how the data
operations are performed.
Registers and the accumulator may also contain binary data, however
performed until the binary values are converted to BCD.
arithmetic
functions
cannot be
a40848
DATA IN,
OONSTANTOR
oF)ouplwEFmcE
\
e
/
ACCUWIATOR
DATA OUT,
TO-
Fiire
5-27. Data Operation Block Diagram
The contents of the accumulator do not change until new data is loaded into it with a D STR instruction
or a computation takes place and the result is stored in the accumulator.
s-44
Programming
GEK-90842
Using References for Data Operations

When entering an instruction for a data operation, the instruction is first specified, then the data
data can be a constant value or a groupreference that contains the data to be used.
The
Entering a Constant Value

a40849
Where m
is a 4-digit BCD number
When a constant (4digit BCD number) is entered as the data value, the bits of the BCD numbers will be
stored in the corresponding position in the accumulator, i.e., the least significant digit in the lower 4 bits
of the accumulator, and the most sign&ant digit in the upper 4 bits of the accumulator.
a40850
4-DIGIT BCD NUMBER
DIGIT
3
I
8~4~2~1~8[4~2~1
4
L
/314/211
I
I
NUMBER
DIGIT Dlcnl
2
I
I
I
3
1
8141211
ACCUMULATOR
Entering a Group Reference
The I/O points, internal coils, and shift registers are treated as 8-bit registers when programming data
operations. The references are then referred to as group references. By selecting the R key before a
value, that value is operated on as an 8-bit or 16.bit register. For example, R 1 5 actually references 8
consecutive I/O points, 150 to 157. This is a convenient way ofreading in data to the accumulator from
input modules, or writing data from the accumulator to output modules for use as required by the user
program. Certain instructions operate on 16 bits, in those cases the data will be read from or written to
16 consecutive references (one 16 circuit module or 2 adjacent 8 circuit modules). The group reference
number for the references mentioned above can be either 1 or 2 digits.
Programming
5-45
GEK-90842
Data Register References

Data registers are referenced as 3digit octal values with a valid range from 400 to 577. Although each
individual register actually refers to one 8-bit byte, most registers a operated on as 160bit words (2
consecutive registers). For example, if the key sequence R 4 0 2 is entered, the data operation uses data
registers 402 and 403. If a 4digit BCD value (for example 1234) were entered into the register, register
402 would contain the 2 least significant digits (34) and 403 the 2 most significant digits (12). A useful
feature of the registers is that they can contain a value to be used as the preset for timers or counters.
Unused T/C references 600-673 can be used as data registers. Each T/C reference operates on a 160bit
register.
The timer/counter
references are also 3digit octal values.
Each of the timer/counter
references
represent a 16.bit register. Valid range for the timer/counter references is 600 to 677. These registers
contain the accumulated value of a timer or counter. It is important to note that the timer/counter
accumulated value is not the same as the accumulator read to or written from when programming any of
the data operations.
Example of Specifying a Group Reference

An example of specifying a group reference
Example: Reference specified is 41.
and how it relates to the accumulator
is shown below.
a4085
42
7
41
0
017
16 BIT ACCUMULATOR
Contents of 41 and 42
(16 bits) are Mod
into
the accumulrtor
NOTE
Discrete bit 410 will be stored in the first position of the accumulator; discrete bit 427 will be
stored in the last position (16) of the accumulator.
Programming the Data Operation Instructions

When a program is entered to perform any of the data operations, the first instruction must have at least
one conditional contact entered immediately before it. To enter any of the data instructions, the F key
must first be selected, then the Function number (F50, F63, F82, etc.) of the instruction. These numbers
are assigned intemally, by the CPUs operating system, to each of the data operation instructions and are
listed in Table 5.8. After the F X X number has been entered, the program address will advance 1 step
and the second word (data entry) should now be entered. The data entry is selected by entering SHF X
X X X, for a constant value, or R X X X for a group lleference.
Programming
5-46
Table 54. Data Operation Function Numbers

Key Sequence
IllSWUCtion
D.STR
D.STRl
DeSTR2
DWR3
DdTR5
DdXJT
D.OUTl
DdWT2
DdWI-3
DaUT5
CMPR
ADDITION
SUBTRACTION
F50
F51
F52
F53
F55
F60
F61
F62
F63
F65
F70
F71
F72
Kv
InstraCtion
seqpe-
hmLTTPLY
DIVIDE
DeAND
DaR
SHIFT RIGHT
SHlFl?W
DECODE
ENCODE
F13
BIN(BCDTOBIN)
BCD (BIB TO BCD)
EXTERNAL FAULT
DIAGNOSIS
F85
F86
F74
F75
F76
F80
F81
F82
F83
RO
The remainder of this chapter lists each of the data operation instructions and the information
for pIDgr amming them. The format used to describe each of the instructions is as follows:
required
Mnemonic name for each instruction.

Function number that must be entered with the programmer (F50, F60, etc.)
Illustration of how each instruction operates in relation to the accumulator.
List of valid references (where required).
Keystrokes required to enter the instruction.

Program example to enhance the description of certain instructions.
Special Function Coils for Data Operations
A group of 6 special purpose internal coils in the Series One Plus ~RZused as indicators of certain
conditions that may occur when some of the data operations are performed. When these conditions
occur, the applicable coil is tumed on as a Flag or indicator that the condition has occurred. These
coils can be included in your program as conditional contacts to tum on an output or perform some
function to indicate that a Flag is on. These special purpose coils and their meanings are:
COIL REFERENCE
772
773
774
775
776
777
FLAG INDICATION
>,GreaterThan
=,ECplto
<,LessThan
Cany or Borrow
Ovedow
S-47
Programming
GEK-90842
D&Ilt
(F50)
DGXR (Data Store) is a 2 word instruction which, when executed, loads the accumulator
BCD constant or the contents of a specified 2 byte reference.
with a 4 digit
NOTE
When loading I/O References or other data, be sure that it is in BCD Format+ If not it should be
converted before using the data for arithmetic fimctions.
a40852
REF+l
REF
17
017
115
01
0 1
VIM
ooo- 014
070 - 075
016 - 036
W-056
400 - 576
600-677
oow
ACCUMULATOR
Group Refefences
I/OPoints
l/O Points
Intefnd Coils
Shift Register Cds
Data Registers (80bit)
T/C Accumulated Value Registers
(1 G-bit)
- 9999
Constant WdiQit BCD)
CONDITIONAL
CONTACT
GROUP
REFERENCE 1
+-+
I--{
DSTR
XXX]-+
4 DIGIT CONSTANT
+---4
BCD VALUE
I
l!EKlclclcl
t_c
PSTR XXxx]-+
S-48
Programming
GE&90842
D6IItl
(F51)
This is a 2 word instruction which, when executed loads the lower 8 bits of the accumulator with the
contents of a specifkd 1 byte referenoe. The upper 8 bits (8-15) will be zeros.
a40853
15
817
01
ACCUMULATOR
Valid Group References

000-015
070 - 076
016-037
w-057
400 - 577
r;l [-i-j r;l
I/O Points
I/O Points
Interrud Coils
Shift Register Coils
+--4 I--{
DSTRl
XXX]-+
GROUP
r REFERENCE 1
rrcl
D.STR2 (F52)
This is a 2 word insmction which, when executed loads the lower 2 bits of the accumulator with the
upper 4 bits of a specified 1 byte reference.
a40854
REF
ACCUMULATOR
I
OOO-01s
070 - 076
016-037
040-057
400-677
GROUP
-I
REFERWCE
v&id Group Rehrenoes

I/0Points
IK)Points
momal coi!s
shm Ragistel Co&
Data Registers(8-m)
5-49
Programming
GEK-90842
D.STR3 (F53)
This is a 2 word instruction which, when executed loads the lower 4 bits of the accumulator
lower 4 bits of a specified 1 byte reference.
with the
a40855
rwi
ACCUMULATOR

000-015
070 - 076
016 - 037
040-057
400- 577
I/O Points
I/O Points
Internal Coils
Data Registers (8-bit)
GROUP
TREFERENCE 1
DdiKIRS(F55)
This is a 2 word instruction which, when executed loads the accumulator
byte contents of a 16 circuit Input module.
with a BCD value fkom the 2
a40856
REF+ 100
REF
17
017
115
817
0 ]
I
r;l
wid
ACCUMULATOR
GroupRefewence
16 Point Input Module
000-005
16 POINT INPUT MODULE
Fl
GROUP
r REFERENCE1
+---I
/--[DSTR5
I
I
X)--+
Programming
540
DoOUT (F60)
DoOUT (Data Out) is a 2 word instruction, which when executed transfers the contents of the
accumulator (16 bits) to a specified 2 byte (group) reference (Output, Internal Relay, Shift Register coils,
Data Registers or Timer/Counter accumulate value register).
a40857
017
15
O]
017
7
REF+ 1
ACCUMULATOR
REF
Valid Group R8f8f8nC8S
I/O Points
l/O Points
Int8m8i COik
T/C Accumulated Value
(16-bit)
000-014
070 - 075
016 - 036
040-056
400 - 576
600-677
GROUP
REFERENCE
R8gisters
D.OUT1 (Fdl)
DoOUT is a 2 word instruction which, when executed will write the contents of the first 8 bits (O-7) of
the accumulator to a specified reference.
a40858
15
817
17
ACCUMULATOR
0 1
REFERENCE
V8lid Group References

000-015
070 - 076
016-037
MO-057
400-577
r;7 F] 1;1
GROUP
rREFERENCE1
110 Points
I/O Points
hltwMl Coils
Shift Re@ter Coils
Data Register (8&t)
+---{ j---{
D-OUT1
xxx)--+
541
Programming
GEK-90842
DaOUT2 (F62)
DoOUT is a 2 word instruction which, when executed will write the contents of the lower (first) 4 bits
of the accumulator to the upper 4 bits of a specified reference.
a40859
15
hiid
DoOUT
ACCUMULATOR
413
REFERENCE
Group References
000-015
070 - 076
016 - 037
MO-057
400 - 577
GROUP
REFERENCE
413
/
I/O Points
I/O Points
Internal Coils
Shift Register Coik
(F63)
DoOUT is a 2 word instruction, which when executed will write the contents of the lower 4 bits of the
accumulator to the lower 4 bits of a specified reference.
a40860
1 15
17
v&d
413
413
01
Fl 131
GROUP
REFERENCE
ACCUMULATOR
REFERENCE
Group Refemnces
ODO-015
070 - 076
016-037
040-057
400-577
17
I/O Points
I/O Points
lntwnal Coils
Shift Register Coik
Data Registers (80bii)
+---I
}--{
D-OUT3 XXX}-+
542
DoOUT
programming
(F65)
D~OUTS is a 2 word instruction, which when executed will write the contents of the accumulator
byte reference which must be a 16 circuit Output module.
to a 2
a40861
115
817
0 1
ACCUMULATOR
017
01
16 POINT OUTPUT MODULE
REF
REF+ 100
[T]
CMPR
Valid Grouo Reference
1 ooo-005
F]
16 Point Output Module
++
17
GROUP
REFERENCE
1-3
DOW5
+-+
(F70)
The contents of a specified 2 group reference or a 4 digit BCD constant are compared to the contents of
the accumulator.
The result of the comparison will cause one of three special purpose i;ltemal coils to
turn on, depending on whether the accumulator value is greater than (>), equal to (=) or less than (c) the
value specified by the reference or constant.
a40862
L
ooo-014
070 - 075
016-036
040-056
500 - 576
600 - 677
I/O Points
I/O Points
Internal Coils
(16-bit)
oooo - 9999
Constant Digit
BCD)
+---I t---_ICMPRxxx 1J-7
r;l r;l r;;l
Ill
I
GROUP
rREFERENCE1
q clclcl
4 DIGIT CONSTANT
l
I-
BCD VALUE
++
t---{cMPR xxxx}-+
Programming
S-53
GEL90842
l
Compare sequence
(4 DIGIT BCD NUMBER)
15
0~0~0~0~1~0~0~~~~~1~1
a40863
0
['lop
p10
ACCUMULATOR
CONTENTS
CMPR
REFERENCE
+ 1
REFERENCE
.7
o_ 7
4
. 0~0~1~1
l
l
l
llO/OlO
0~1~1~1
1
doll11
2 GROUP
REFERENCE
OR
4 DIGIT CONSTANT
a
lo
If Accumulator > Reference, then 772 tums ON.

If Accumulator = Reference, then 773 tums ON.
If Accumulator < Reference, then 774 tums ON.
Pr0gmnming
example,
Compare
1
Addition (+), BCD 4 Digit (F71)
The contents of a 4 digit constant or a specified 2 group reference are added to the contents of the
accumulator.
The result of the addition is stored in the accumulator as a 4 digit BCD number. If the
answer is >9999, the carry flag (Internal coil, 775) will tum on. If the answer is zero, the zero flag (776)
will turn on. The flag coils can be used in a program as references for contacts to tum on an output
connected to a light or other device to provide an indicator of the flag conditions.
Valid
oooa14
070 - 075
016 - 036
040-056
400 - 570
600 - 677
1 oooo-9999
a40864
Group
References
I/O Points
I/O Points
Intem8l Coih
shift RegisterCoil8
Data Registers (8-b&)
T/C Accumulaad Value Registam
FLAGS
cAoRRRy
ZERO
(1&bit)
Constant M-digit BCD)
BORROW
775
xxx]-+
GROUP
REFERENCE
1
r
q clclcl
4 DIGIT CONSTANT
k-4
l-
BCD VALUE
t-c-
xXxX]-+
776
Programming
s-54
GE&90842
l
Addition
sequence
a40865
15
ACCUMULATOR
CONTENTS
+
REFERENCE + 1
17
I
4
8141211
REFERENCE
0b
,
3
8141211
2
8141211
1
8141211
2
81412/l
1
8141211
2 GROUP REFERENCE
OR
4 DIGIT CONSTANT
-c
I
-8[41211
3
8141211
.
.
?
1
+
4 DIGIT BCD
ANSWER STORED IN
ACCUMULATOR
IF ANSWER IS 0000, ZERO FLAG IS ON

IF ANSWER IS >9999, CARRY FLAG tS ON
IF ANSWER IS > 9999 AND THE 4 BCD DIGITS
ARE WOO, BOTH THE CARRY AND ZERO FLAGS
WILL TURN ON.
EXAMPLE :
7777
+ 2223
CARRY FLAG ON
Addition Programming
I&
digits
ZERO FLAG ON
Example
are loaded in accumulator
from Inputs 00304047.
a40866
data from Inputs 00504067.

is stored in the accumulator and alsow1ittentoOutputs0100-0117.
IfD OUTisspecifiedasaData
Register, Intemal coil, etc.; the answer would lx stored at that location for further use in the program.
The mer
545
Programming
GEK90842
Example 2
This example shows more than one constant value entered in the program. By closing the respective
contact, a different number can be selected to be added to the contents of the accumulator.
a40867
EN1
SHF 0
IMCS
El
0STR El
11 I EN7
1 f El5 El0 El I
1
iSTR3
ENT
I STR I SW I
I
I
S-V
El
1258
-a
it
MCR
~~~~~~~-~~~--~~~
-*
I (a-\ *
I STR
SHF
El
SW
El
Elf
SHF
SHF
El
El
ENT
ENT
ENT
i
I
ENT
El
ENT
When 11 is closed, MCS is energized and does not control the logic following it. The number selected
by closing one of the contacts, I2,I3, or 14 is added to the contents of the accumulator (read fkom Inputs
0030-0047). When I5 is closed, the answer will be written to Outputs 0060-0077.
S-56
Programming
Subtraction (I), BCD 4 Digit (F72)

The contents of a specifkd
2 group reference or a 4 digit BCD constant value are subtracted from the
contents (BCD) of the accumulator. If the answer after the subtraction is positive, it is written directly to
the accumulator.
If the answer is negative, the Borrow Flag (775) turns ON, the absolute value is
subtracted from 10000 and the resulting value is written to the accumulator.
If the answer after
subtraction is zero, the Zero flag (776) turns ON.
Valid
070
- 075
I/O Points
016
- 036
Internal
4-DtGIT
Coils
400
Data Registers
600
T/C Accumulated
GROUP
REFERENCE
References
I/O Points
- 576
- 677
040 - 056
t oooo- 9999
Group
ooo - 014
Shift Register
(16-bit)
Constant
(8-bit)
Value
(4diait
BCD)
CONSTANT
k-i
BCD VALUE
t-c+
Registers
Coils
xxtiI-$
Programming
5-57
GE&90842
l
Subtraction
sequence
a40869
15

REFERENCE +1
I7
4
L 8141211
3
8141211
REFERENCE
7
2
s(4~2ll
1
8141211
.
.
, 2 GROUP REFERENCE
OR
1
4 DIGIT CONSTANT
1 4 DIGIT BCD
ANSWER STORED IN
ACCUMULATOR
ACCUMULATOR
CONTENTS
IF ANSWER IS 0000, ZERO FLAG IS ON

IF ANSWER IS NEGATIVE, BORROW FLAG WILL BE ON
Subtraction
Data is entered into the accumulator from Inputs 0040 - 0057.

A constant value (3333) is subtracted from the contents of the accumulator.
The answer is stored in the accumulator and is written to outputs 0150 - 0167.
l
l
programming
example
GEK-90842
Multiplication (X), BCD 4 Digit (F73)

The contents of the accumulator are multiplied by the contents of a specified 2 group reference or a 4
digit BCD constant. The answer can be from 1 to 8 digits. The lower 4 digits of the answer are stored
in the accumulator and digits S-8 are stored in data registers 576 and 577, which are the auxiliary
accumulator. If the answer is zero, the Zero flag (776) will turn ON.
a40870
vdid
t
b
&DUD
ROfOft!M?WS
ooo-014
070 - 075
016 - 036
W-056
400 - 576
600-677
I/O Points
l/O Points
Internal Coils
f/C Accumulated Value Registers
W-bit)
oooo - 9999
Constant (ddigit BCD)
GROUP
REFERENCE
r
1
.
GROUP REFERENCE
1
CONSTANT
VALUE
x!xx}y+
4 DIGIT CONSTANT
++
6CD VALUE
r
Multiplication sequence
(4
15
DIGIT BCD NUMBER)

X
REFERENCE + 1
t
7
8j4lZll
8
8l4/2jl
8]4l2]1
814121
2
8141211
5
1 8141211
REGISTER
REGISTER 577
AUXILIARY ACCUMULATOR
576
9 the &ro
flag (776) is ON.
1
8]4)211
I
.
1 81412j
1 81412!!
SlOlZll
a40871
GROUP REFERENCE
OR
4 DIGIT CONSTANT
8]4121
~lower4digits(1,2,3,4)oftheanswerwillbestoredintbeaccumuratcK.
in the audimy sccumulator (Data Req$sters 576 and 577).
dftheansweris~
4
o -2
SlOjZll
ACCUMULATOR
CONTENTS
REFERENCE
t--xx
ACCUMULATOR WILL COKTAIN

LOWER 4 DIGITS
Tk~pper4digit~(5,6,7,8)~iUbe~m~i
Programming
S-59
GEK-90842
l
Multiplication
programming
example
Multiplying 4 digits by 4 digits with an answer containing
8 digits.
a40872
+I
[sl
[sJ
[T]
piiq
il
IT
[TJ
[XT
I1
[I
I]
11
171
Ls)
[piq
IENTl
ICmm
l
pq
!FII
IRIIII
A 4 digit BCD value is ented

into the accumulator hm Inputs 0050-0067.
A constant value (1375) is entered as the multiplier.
Assume that the answer is an 8 digit BCD number. The lower 4 digits are stared in the accumulator and transfened to
Outputs 0140-0157. The upper 4 digits are stored in the auxiliary accumulator (Data Registers 576,577) and transferred to
outputs 0160-0177.
Division I#, BCD 4 Digit (F74)

The contents of the accumulator are divided by the contents of a specified 2 group reference or a 4 digit
BCD constant.
The 4 digits of the quotient are stored in the accumulator and the 4 digits of the
remainder are stored in the auxiliary accumulator (Data Registers 576,577).
If either the dividend or
divisor are zero, the Zero flag (776) will tum ON. If the divisor is zero, the Overflow flag (777) will also
turn ON.
I
V&id
DOD-014
070 - 075
016-036
040-056
400 - 576
600 - 077
a40873
GmupRsfefemc8s
I/O Points
I/O Point8
IntamrrlCoils
Data Registers(8-bit)
f/C Accumulated Value Rwistws
1 oooo- 9999
Constant iddigit 8CDl
q rm
+-I
t-x+
GROUP
rREFERENCE1
4 DIGIT CONSTANT VALUE

tit-x+
BCD VALUE
xxxx}-+
560
Programming
GEK-90842
Division
sequence
15
0
ACCUMULATOR
CONTENTS
~~1~0~0~0~1~1~0~0]0~1~1~0~~]0~~
REFERENCE + 1
c7
REFERENCE
0
4
. olo~olo
O~Ojl~o
0 ,2
CjllOlO
OjllllO
2 GROUP REFERENCE
OR
4 DIGIT CONSTANT
3c
QUOTIENT
I
2
REMAINDER
1
0~0~0~0
olololo
o~o~o~l~lpp~o
ACCUMULATOR
2
OlllOlO
REGISTER 577
3
olo~o~t
4
OlljOlO
REGISTER 576
AUXILIARY ACCUMULATOR
1
IlO~OlO
I
.
The quotient (0 - 4 digits) will be stored in the accumulator as shown. the remain&r (0 - 4 digits) will be stored in the
auxiliary accumulator (Data Registers 577,576) as shown.
Division programming
example
Division of a 4 digit number by another 4 digit number showing how the quotient and remainder
written to Outputs.
can be
a40875
l
l
l
l
A 4 digit number is entered into the accumulator fkom Inputs 0030 - 0047.
Ihat number is divided by a number spexified by Inputs 0050 - 0067.
TIE 4 digits of the quotient are stored in the accumlata and are also written to Outputs 0110 - 0127.
Ibe 4 digits of the remainder a stored in the auxikuy accumulator (Data Registers 577,576) and are written to Outputs
0130 - 0147.
Programming
5-61
GE&90842
DwWD (DATA AND) (F75)

The contents of the accumulator a~ logically bit ANDed with the contents of a specified 2 group
reference or a 4 digit BCD constant. The result is stored in the accumulator. If the answer is 0000, the
Zero flag (776) will turn ON.
a40876
Valid
&OUD
References
000-014
070 - 075
016 - 036
W-056
400 - 576
600 - 677
l/O Points
I/O Points
Internal Coils
Data Registers (O-bit)
(160bit)
oooo- 9999
Constant W-digit BCD)
I-[
+----f
GROUP
REFERENCE
q uclcl
D-AND xxx]-+
4 DIGIT CONSTANT
l-
BCD VALUE
1
liixlclclu
D*AND Sequence
a40877
ACCUMULATOR
CONTENTS
D*AND
:
*
L
.i
REFERENCE + 1
4
. 7161514
3]2]110
I
1
REFERENCE
7161514
1
312[llO
2 GROUP
REFERENCE
OR
4 DIGIT
CONSTANT
LOGIC PRODUCT
RESULTING
BIT PATTERN
STORED IN
ACCUMULATOR
table for DdND operation

A = Accumulator contents
D = Contents of reference or constant
Truth
A
0
0
1
1
1 RESULT
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
5-62
Programming
GE&90842
Programming
example, DWWD
a40878
l
l
l
l
l
Assume the data entered into the accumulator from Inputs 0040 - 0057 = 1234
Is logically AND-cd with 2222
The resulting answer stored in the acmnulator would be 0220
0220 is written to Outputs 0060 - 0077
Accumulator and refemxe contents for above operation 81leshown below
Programming
5-63
GEK-90842
DoOR (DATA OR) (F76)

The contents of the accumulator are logically bit OR-cd with the contents of a specified 2 group
reference or a 4 digit BCD constant. The result is stored in the accumulator. If the answer is 0000, the
Zero flag (776) will tum ON.
wo - 014
070 - 075
016 - 036
040 - 056
400 - 576
I/O Points
I/O Points
kIternal Coils
Data Registers @-bit)
f/C Accumulated Value Registers
(160bit)
600 0 677
a40879
1
1
i
Constant W-digit BCD)
OOOO - 9999
+---I
III171
GROUP
REFERENCE
Elclucl
ZERO
776
1-L
DOR
4 DlGfT CONSTANT
I-
FLAG
+--1
f----{WR
XXXX J-7
BCD VALUE
1
D*OR Sequence
a40880
15114113[
9 f 8 17 1 6 ] 5 14 13 1 2 1 1 1 0
12lllllOl
ACCUMULATOR
CONTENTS
D.OR
;
4
r
REFERENCE + 1
4
7~6~5~4~3~2~1~0
/8
,
REFERENCE
2
716/5~4j3~2[110
15~~~4113!121111101 91 81 71 61 51 41 3.1 21 11 0
Truth table for DaR
operation.
A = Accumulator contents
D = Contents of reference or constant
2 GROUP
REFERENCE
OR
4 DIGIT
CONSTANT.
s-64
Programming
GE&90842
Prqmmming example, DeOR
Assume data entered into the accumulator fi-om Inputs 0120 - 0137 = 3210
Is logically OR-ed with data from Inputs 0140 - 0157 = 7531
The resulting answer stored in the accumulator will be 7731
7731 is written to Outputs 0160 - 0177
Accumulator and nzfenznce contents for above operation ~RZshown below
Programming
565
GEL90842
Shift Right (F80)

The contents of the accumulator are shifted to the right by the number of shifts (bits) specified by the
instruction. The number of bits shifted can be fkom 1 to 15. The bit positions of bits shifted from the
left are filled with zeros. If a 1 is shifted out of the accumulator as a result of the shift, the Carry flag
(775) will tum on. If after the shift, the accumulator contains only zeros, the Zero flag (776) will turn
on.
a40882
IFI
+----- 1
+-+N
80 Xi}-+
IT015
r
FUN 80, Shift Right sequence (6 shifts in example)
ACCUMULATOR
CONTENTS
BEFORE SHIFT
0~1~1~1~1~0~0~1~0~0~0~1~0~1~0~1
SHIFT RtGHT
6BnS
FUN 80 6
ACCUMULATOR
CONTENTS
AFTER SHIFT.
AU 0 IN THESE POSITtONS
Shift Left (F81)

The contents of the accumulator are shifted to the left by the number of shifts (bits) specified by the
instruction. The number of bits shifted can be fkom 1 to 15. The bit positions of bits shifted from the
right are f3.M with zeros. If a 1 is shifted out of the accumulator as a result of the shift, the Carzy
flag (775) will turn on. If after the shift, the accumulator contains only zeros, the Zero flag (776) will
turn on.
a40883
IFI
~---_I
}-FuN~~
xXl_t
lTO15
mclcl
l FUN
81, Shift left sequence (4 shifts in example)

ACCUMULATOR
CONTENTS
BEFORE
SHIFK
SHIFT LEFT
4BKs
0~1~0~1~1~0~0~0~0~1~1~0~0~0~1~0
FUN81 4
FLAGS
CARRY ZERO
775
776
~0
.
W THESE
PosmoNS
5-66
Progrmming
GEK-90842
Programmin g example using FUN 80 and FUN 81
This example shows a technique that can be used for deleting unnecessary data after it has been entered
into the accumulator.
In the example the fourth BCD digit will be deleted.
a40884
Date entered into accumulator
from Inputs 0020 - 0037.
0
l
0
Shifted right, 4 bits.
0
l
5
Shifted left, 4 bits.
The
fourth digit (5) has been deleted.
a
l
The remaining value is added to the contents of Inputs 0060 - 0077.

accumulator and written to Outputs 0100 - 0117.
The result is stored in the
Programming
S-67
GEK-90842
Decode (F82)
The lower 4 bits (least significant) of the accumulator are decoded to a decimal number from 0 to 15. A
1 is placed in the bit position in the accumulator that corresponds to the decoded decimal number.
The upper 12 bits of the accumulator are disregarded for this operation.
a40885
mmllel
}-{FuN*2]-4
++
FUN 82 Decode sequence

LOWER 4 BKS OF
ACCUMULATOR CONTAIN
1 BCD OfGIl.
WHICH lS DECODED TO
A DECMAL NUMBER.
A 1 WlLL BE PLACED IN
THE ACCUMULATOR POSITlON CORRESPONDING TO
THAT
DECIMAL NUMBER.
AU OTHER POSiTlONS WILL
CONTAIN ZEROS.
If the BCD digit to be decoded is an 8, A 1 will be placed in the accumulator at that position as shown.
Programming
example, FUN 82
0STR
I F
I F
I
I STR
0OUT
F
SHF
El
I
I0
I
I SHF
SHF
El
5
a40886
I 1
El
I
El0
I
3
I
I
I
STR
El
SHF
0OUT I SHF 0
El
171 IEEl
A BCD digit (for example: 6) is loaded into the accumulator (lower 4 bits) fkom the lower 4 bits of the refkrence, Inputs
20,21,22, and 23. The bit pattern loaded in the accumulator would be 0 1 1 0.
The BCD digit is decoded to a decimal number between 0 - 15 (in this example 6).
That number is stored in the corresponding bit position in the accumulator.
0utputs 0040 to 0057 correspond to the 16 bits of the accumuIator. oneoftheoutputswillbeenabledwhenthe
accumulator position has a 1 placed in it. When the contact corresponding to the output reference is closed, a coil 100 117 will tum on.
5-68
Programming
GEK-90842
Encode (F83)
A bit in a position in the accumulator is encoded to a 4-bit code representing the position number (O-15)
in the accumulator.
The resulting 4-bit code is placed in the lower four bits of the accumulator.
a40887
EJ El El
l
FUN 83 Encode sequence
+--{
}-----[
FUN83
(example)
15
ONE BIT IN A
POSITKIN IN THE
ACCUMULATOR
0~0~0~0~0~0~0~0~0~0~1~0~0~0~0~0
v
POSITION 5
FUN 83
1s ENCODED
5
TO A 4-BIT CODE
AND STORED IN
THE LOWER 4 BITS
OF THE ACCUMULATQR
~~0~0~0~0~0~0jol0~0~0~0~0~0~1~0~1
18
1
118
118
118
11
The upper 12 bits of the accumulator will contain zeros after the FUN 83 has been executed
The 16 bits stored in the accumulator
are logically inverted; i.e., 1 to 0 and 0 to 1.

L
p-lF-Jp-1 t---i
l
a40888
t--+4--i
Invert sequence
15
16 BITS STORED IN
ACCUMUCATOR
1~0~0~0~0~~~1~0~0~1~1~0~0~1~1~1
INV
15
0~1~1~1~1~0~0~1~1~0~0~1~1~0~0~0
Programming
LOGICALLY INVERTED
example, INV
SHF
ISTR El
I
l
l
IENT
I F
0 5
I 0
I ENT
I 8
I 4
I ENT
I F
I 7
I 1
0ENT
0 F
I 8
I 4
0ENT
0 F
I 6
i 0
I ENT
ARE
Data entered into the accumulator fbrn Inputs 0030 - 0047 is inverted.
The inverted data is added to data from Inputs 0050 - 0067. The 8nswer is stod
Data is written to 0utputs 0070 - 0107
El
IEEl
in the accumulator, then inverted again.
-_
_
Programming
5-69
GE&90842
BIN (BCD to Binary) (F85)

The BCD value stored in the accumulator
is converted
to a binary code corresponding
to that value.
a40889
Binary conversion
sequence
.
L
5
oploll
OlllOlO
O[O)ljO
00
s
BIN
olo]oplol
l~ofl]o~o~l~o~l~1pp
3
OlOllll
1
,
4BCD
NUMBERS
STORED IN
ACCUMULATOR
ARE
CONVERTED
TO A BINARY
CODE
Progr amming example, BIN
Data is stored in the accumulator fkom Inputs 0040 - 0057.

l Data entered finm Inputs 0060 - 0077 is subtracted from the value in the accumulator.
l Ihe resulting answer is stored in the accumulator, where it is canverted to a binary code.
. The binary c&e is written to Outputs 0700 - 0717.
l
5-70
Programming
GEK-90842
BCD (Binary to BCD) (FW)

A binary code stored in the accumulator is converted to a 4 digit BCD value. If the resulting BCD value
is H999, the overflow flag (777) will tum on. The flag coil can be used to turn on an output device as an
indication
of the overflow.
a40890
BCD conversion
sequence
BINARY CODE
STORED IN THE
ACCUMULATOR
BCD
)
9
Ilojop
Progmmming
7
ollpp
oloplo
1
OlOlOjl
I
I
CONVERTED TO A
4 DtGIT BCD
NUMBER
example, BCD
lx 31
DSTR 3 J
+5
BCD
D-OUT 7
777
I t
130
4,
Data is stod in tbe accumulator fiom Inputs 0030 - 0047.

Data hm Inputs 0050 - 0067 is ad&d to the value in the accumulator.
Ibe rtmking answer is stmed in the accumulator, wbexe it is umverted to a 4 digit BCD number.
The BCD number is writta~ to Outputs 0070 - 0107.
If an OVeIfIOWoczcuIs, the overfjiow Hag 777 will turn on output 130.
Programming
5-71
GEK-90842
External Fault Diagnosis (F20)

This instruction provides a method of monitoring external devices for unwanted conditions such as
switches that should not be on at the same time. When the instruction is programmed, a 4 digit BCD
number is specified as a fault indication number. If the unwanted condition occurs, the 4 digit number
will be displayed on the programmer data display. The 4 digit number can be a constant value or read
from a group reference.
a40891
1-q r;l r;;l

I-
BCD VALUE s-I
l&mud
+--++pN
t
u
More than one FUN 20 instruction can be used in a program

Each condition to be monitored is assigned a different 4
simultaneously, the number displayed will be the one assigned
Registers 574 and 575 will contain the fault indicator number.
programmer, the fault number can be cleared from the display
is recommended that the actual fault be fixed before clearing
Programming
2oxxxx-J--+
INPUTS TO BE MONITORED
for detection of multiple fault conditions.

digit number.
If multiple faults occur
by the last FUN 20 in the program. Data
When a fault number is displayed on the
by depressing the CLR key. However, it
the display.
example, FUN 20
D=OUT 6
a40892
IF I2
I SW I 2
0STR I NOT
ElF 0 5 IO
~~~~coMectedtoI1andI3aFemadeatthesametime,FUN20willbeactive,ll11wilIbedisplayedonthe&~
display on the programmer.
IfdevicesconnectedtOI2andI4aremadeattbesametimethedatartisplavwilldisplay2222.
The indicator nUmberWilIbe stored in 574 and 575 and that number will be written to Outputs 0060-0077.
Fault indicator number display
The physical fault should be cleanxl. Tbtn clear the programmerdisplay with the CIX key.
I)
61
I/O System Introduction

The Input/Output (I/O) of the Series One and Series One Plus PCs is provided on modules (figure 6-1)
each typically with 4,8, or 16 input circuits or 4,8, or 16 output circuits. These modules are inserted
into slots in the racks. Up to 4 modules in a 5-slot rack or 9 modules in a lo-slot rack of any I/O mix
can be placed in the first rack with the CPU. Up to 5 modules in a S-slot rack or 10 modules in a lO-slot
rack, again of any I/O mix can be placed in each of the expansion racks.
The I/O references are assigned to each slot by its physical position (see table 5-5). The only address
switches that need to be set are associated with the racks. In the S-slot rack, a 2 position switch must be
set which specifies whether the rack is a CPU or expansion rack. Series One Plus lo-slot racks have 2
bridge connectors, on the backplane, which must be set to specify whether the rack is a CPU or
expansion rack and the I/O addressing configuration for slot 10 of the CPU rack and all slots in the
expansion rack. Installation and wiring of these modules is discussed in Chapter 3, Installation. This
chapter will discuss the capabilities of these I/O modules, to allow the user to properly design wiring
diagrams and apply these modules.
62m
I/O Specifications and Wiring

GEK-90842
Field Wiring to I/O Modules

Each of the 8 circuit I/O modules, has a terminal block attached to it with 10 screw terminals. The 16
point YO modules, with screw terminals, have a removable socket type terminal board on the front of
the module. The terminal board can be easily removed, which allows modules to be readily removed or
changed without removing the field wiring to the module.
Each of these terminals are capable of
accommodating one AWG No. 12 or two AWG No. 14 stranded wires. A clear plastic cover snaps over
the terminals as a safety precaution. An insert is included with the covers to record circuit identification.
Some of the 16 point I/O modules are connected to field wiring through a connector
faceplate. A description of these modules is on the following page.
mounted
on the
The rest of this chapter provides specifications, wiring diagrams, typical schematics, and sample
reference numbers for each module type. The typical schematics are to provide details for interfacing
and not for maintenance or repair of these modules.
The sample reference numbers should be adjusted by the user to the actual slot in which the modules
will be installed. Every slot is provided with eight references. Those modules that provide eight circuits
still consume 8 J/O references.
When 4 circuit modules are used, the four references not used to
interface to mil world I/O, are available for use as internal references for the users logic program.
A 16 circuit I/O module uses 2 groups of 8 I/O references.
63m

GEK-90842
a41 928
a40287
Figure 6-l. A. Typical I/O Module
B. High Density Module With Removable Connector
a40796
Cl 0
00
20
IO
30
40
50
60
70
00
O2
04
06
0 CB
01
03
05
C2 0
8 CIRCUIT
Fiire
07
CAo
IO
30
50
70
00
20
40
60
16 CIRCUIT
6-2. Typical I/O Terminal Configuration
64-

GEK-90842
16 Circuit I/O Modules with Connectors

Some of the I/O modules providing 16 input or 16 output circuits have a 24-pin connector on the
faceplate. These modules are connected to user supplied input devices or user supplied loads through an
I/O Interface cable which is 10 feet (3m) in length (Catalog Number IC61OCBLlOS). One end of this
cable has a 24-pin female connector which mates with a 2kpin male connector mounted on the faceplate
of the I/O module. The wires on the opposite end of the cable are stripped and tinned for connection to
user devices. Each of the wires is color coded for easy identification. Figure 6-3 is a wiring list for the
I/O Interface cable.
a421 55
BUNE,
Aurd
12
12
321
ORN . .. .... ORANGE
GRA . . . . . SRAY
WHT ... . .. . WHITE
YEL . .. .. .. YELLOW
321
-N=Dl)
81
82
WHT (REDl)
B3
YEL (FtEDl)
84
lm
FWK (REDl)
ow=Da
-E-l-t871
PNK ....... PINK

RED ....... RED
BLK ....... BLACK
ORN (BLKl)
WHfmJw
YEL(BLK1)
PNK(BLK1)
-ww
GRA(BLK2)
ww~)
B8
B9
yw=w
PNK(BLK2)
c=wJw
=u~W
I
I
I A10
BlOI
Bll
10UuW+J
I Al2
812
bWU+I
Figure 6-3. I/O Interface Cable Wiring List
I/O References for 16 Circuit Modules

When using a 16 circuit I/O module, addresses are borrowed from future slots. The illustration in figure
6-4 is used as an example of this concept. For instance, if a 16 circuit module is installed in slot 02, the
I/O references for that module will be 020-027 and 120-127. Slot 12 is then no longer available for use
since its Teferences have been used (borrowed) by the module in slot 02. Additionalexamples of I/O
addressing can be found in Appendix B.
65m
12Sl27
a40797
1
n
loo
TO
107
070
TO
077
TO
10
o[i7
olbl
MO
TO
150
TO
157
047
TO
007
140
TO
147
loo
TO
107
10 SLOT RACKS
EXAMmf
s#MSoNf
must
Figure 6-4. Example of 16 Circuit I/O References

NOTE
When using the maximum number of 16 point I/O modules possible, the slots marked with an X
are no longer available for system use.
I/O Interface Cable Cross Reference List

The following list provides a reference to the available I/O Intetiace
with which they may be used.
cables and the module or modules
Cable Description
Module
IC61OCBL105
24 Pin Connector
10 (3 meters)
IC61OMDLlO5
1C610MDL106
IC61OMDLl56
Thumbwheel Interface
High Density Input
High Density Output
IC61OCBL107
32 Pin Connector
10 (3 meters)
IC61OhdDLllO
High Sped Counter
Description
66I
GEK-90842

Table 6-1 is a list of catalog numbers for Series One/Series One Plus I/O modules.
Table 6-l. I/O Module Catalog Numbers
CATALOG
DESCRIPTION
NUMBER
I/O Modules - Input

115 V ac Input., 8 Circuits
230 V ac Input, 8 Circuits
115 v a.c Isolated Input, 4 Cixuits
24VdcSinkInput,8Cimits
24VdcSinkInput,16Circuits
24 V dc Sink Load Input, 16 Circuits
24 V ac/dc Source Input, 8 circuits
24 V ac/dc Source Input, 16 Circuits
Analog Input, 4 Channels
IC61OMDL125
IC61OMDL127
IC61OMDL126
1C610MDL101
IC61OMDL106 (2)
IC6lOMDL107 (1)
1C610MDL111
IC61OMDL112 (1) (3)
KXlOMDL116
I/O Modules - Output

115/230 V ac Output, 8 Circuits
115/230 v ac Isolated Output, 4 circuits
24 V dc Sink Output, 8 Circuits
24 V dc Sink Output, 16 Circuits
24 V dc Sink Output, 16 Ciraits
24Vdc2AmpSinkOutput,4Circuits
24 V dc 2 Amp Sink/Source Output, 4 Circuits
24VdcSourceOutput,8Circuits
24 V dc Source Output, 16 Circuits
Analog outpu& 2 Channels
IC61OMDL175
IC61OMDL176
IC61OMDL151
IC61OMDL156
IC61OMDLl57
IC61OMDL153
IC61OMDL154
IC61OMDLl55
IC61OMDL158
IcdlOMDLl80
IC61OMDL182
IC61OMDL166
I/O Modules - Special

24VdcI.nput/outpu~4In/4out
24 V dc Sink Input/Relay output, 4 In/4 Out
numbwheel In*
High Speed Counter
Fast Response l/O, 4 In/2 Out
I/o simtior,
8 Input Circuits
I/OModules-ULListed
115VacInput,6Circuits
115VacOutput,6Cimits
1. Ranovable tarnid
(2)
(1)
(1)
(1)
IC61OMDL103
IC6lOMDL104
IC61OMDL105 (2)
1C610nmL110 (4)
IC61OMDL115
1C610MDL124
IC61OMDL135
IC6lOMDL181
IC61OMDL185
board for I/o wiring.
2 Camectsto~thmugh24pinconn~rmfaccplatc.
3.
Thi6modn3.ccm~bcu6eda6a~inpuL
4. CameUstol/Othmugha32pin~~onfr#plate.
Theu6crmu6tprcwidcthepowcr~
to
operate
the
field devices.
67I
I/O Module Specifications and Wiring

The remainder of this chapter describes the available I/O modules for the Series One and Series
One
Plus PCS.
115 V ac Input
IC610MDL125
This module provides 8 circuits each designed to receive a single discqte
(ON/OFF) signal from user

supplied devices. Typical input devices include limit switches, pushbuttons, selector switches, and relay
contacts. The 8 circuits are divided into two groups of 4 circuits each. Each group can be supplied fkom
a separate power source. Power to operate the field devices must also be supplied by the user. Figure
6-5 provides wiring information for this module. Following are specifications for each of the 8 circuits.
Iuput Points
Operating Voltage
AC Frequency
Input current
Input Impedance
ON Level
OFF Level
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Circuit Indicator
Units of Load
Weight
97-132 V ac
47-63 Hz
lSmA@6OHz
11.5 mA @ 50 Hz
9.5K ohms
Above 80 V ac
Below 20 V ac
10-30 ms
lo-60 ms
Field Side
lOmA@9Vdc
lUnit@9Vdc
5 02 (140 g)
T VPICAL
USER
MODULE
WlRlNG
REFERENCES
05c
051
052
053
-
054
055
056
057
WlRtNC
r -....,,q
I
II
I
I8
I
I
I
c-.
-*. c- (C---rm
INPUT
II
I
I
brrmr.--
115 VAC
0-N
(%L-,W,_
\r /
COMMON
TO OTHER
THREE CIRCUITS
COUPLER
SAMPLE
INPUT CIRCUIT
Figure 6-5. Wiring for 115 V ac Inputs
DIAGRAN
m
68
230 V ac Input
IC6lOMDLl27
This module provides 8 circuits, each designed to receive a single discrete (ON/OFF) signal from user
contacts. The 8 circuits are divided into two groups of 4 circuits each. Each of the 2 groups can be
supplied from a separate power source. Power to operate the field devices must also be supplied by the
user. Following are specifications for each of these 8 circuits.
pc-~1-84-0024
Input Points
opercltingvoltrrgc
18@265 V 15:
4763 Hz
18 mA (Za!W, 60 Hz),
Max.
llmA,TypicaI
18Kobms@6oHz
Above 180 V ac
BChW4OVpc
<2mA
5-50 ms
5-60 ms
Field Si&
lOmA,9V&
lUnit@9Vdc
5 02 (140 g)
AC Fhquency
Input current
InpPt Impcdrn=
ON Vdtage
OFF Voltage
OFF currart
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
circuit Indi~tcbrs
InPower chsumption
Units of Luad
Wdght
USER
MODULE
WIRING
TYPtCAL
REFERENCES
060
061
062
063
064
065
066
067
Field connections are made to screw terminals on

a terminal block mounted on the faceplate. Each
terminal will accept up to one No. 12 AWG wire
or two No. 14 wires. The Cl and C2 common
terminals are isolated from each other.
*-
WIRING
INPUT
r _ ___<>=-i.;___
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
180-265
VAC
I
t-1
L --I,---4r9~-rr-r
\ r#
COUPLER
TO OTHER e
THREE CIRCUITS
SAMPLE
INPUT CIRCUIT
Figure 645. Wiring for 230 V ac Inputs
DIAGRAM
69(I

GEIWO842
115 V ac Isolated Input

IC610MDLl26
contacts. Each of these circuits is isolated from the other circuits on this module relative to AC power
source. The tern isolation is not relative to optical-coupler noise and fault isolation which all I/O
modules have. Each input is provided with 2 field terminals allowing separate AC power sources (that
is, different phases) for each of the four inputs. The sources of AC power must be supplied by the user.
Figure 6-7 provides wiring information for this modules.
Although this module consumes 8 discrete references assigned to the I/O slot into which it is inserted,
only 4 are actually used. The other 4 can be used internally as coils, but they cannot be *provided to
hardware I/O modules. Following are specifications for each of the 4 circuits:
Input Points
4
97-132 v ac
4763 Hz
15ma@6OHz
10K0bms@60Hz
12K ohms @ 50 Hz
Above 80 V ac
Below 20 v ac
10-30 ms
10-60 ms
Eeld Side
lOmA@9Vdc
1@9Vdc
42 02 (120 g)
cm-t@
Voltrrge
AC Frequency
Input Current
hlput Iqaiance
ON Level
OFF Level
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Cira& Indicator
Internal Power consumption
Units of Load
Weigtrt
TYPICAL
USER
WIRING
MODULE
REFERENCES
3C
37
32
33
WIRING
I-
___-
115
VAC
TI
b
SAMPLE
Figure
INPUT
OPTICAL
COUPLER
ClfXUlT
6-7. Wiring for 115 V ac Isolated Inputs
DIAGRAM
6-10
GEK-90842
24 V dc Sink Input (8 Circuits)

IC610MDLlOl
This module provides 8 circuits each designed to receive a single discrete (ON/OFF) signal from user
contacts. Power (24 V dc) to sense the state of these inputs is provided by the rack power supply. No
external power source is required with this module. All 8 circuits are powered from this one source.
Figure 6-8 provides wiring information for this module. Following a~ specifications for each of the 8
circuits:
Input Points
Maximum Voltage
36 V tic
TYPICAL
(open Ci=uit)
Input Current
Inpat Impedance
USER
WIRING
18 nA
1.8 K ohms
<3vdc
>3V&
4 to 15 ms
4 to 15 ms
Field Side
ON Level+
OFT Leve!P
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
CircuB Indicator
Maximum OFF Leakage

llainimum ON current
IElterMl Power consumption
REFERENCES
MODULE
046
04:
042
3mA
7mA
043
044
14mAforcachON
CiIwit@24Vdc
lOmA@9Vdc
1@9Vdc
lo@ 24 V &
4.2 02 (120 g)
Units of Load
Weight
045
046
_
* Voltage levels measured between common and input termin&

(across input device).
WIRING
-e
,.f
.
COUPLER
SAMPLE
INPUT CIRCUIT
Figure 6-8. Wiring for 24 V at Sink Inputs
DIAGRAM
047
INTERNAL
CONNECTlOhi
II0 Specifications and Wiring
641
GEK-90842
24 V dc Sink Input (16 Circuits)

IC610MDL106
supplied devices. This module has 16 LED status indicators to reflect the ON or OFF status of each of
the 16 circuits. Typical input devices include limit switches, pushbuttons, selector switches, and relay
contacts.
24 V dc power to sense the state of these inputs is provided by the rack power supply;
therefore, no external power source is required for this module. All 16 circuits are powered from this
one source.
Figure 6-10 provides wiring information for this module. The 16 input circuits a~ connected to user
devices through a 240pin connector. An optional I/O Interface cable, catalog number IC61OCBL105, is
available for use with this module. Following are snecifications for each of the 16 circuits:
Input Points
Maximum Vokage
(open C~cw
Input current
ON Level
OFF Levd
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Maximum OFF Leakage

Minimum ON Current
Circuit Indhtor
Units of Load
Weight
a40566
16
36 V dc
16 nd
ot03vcic
18 to 36 V tic
4 to 15 ms
4 to 15 ms
2mA
5mA
Field side
24 IIA @ 9 V dc, Max.
(16 circuits ON)
210 ltliq @ 24 v tic, Max
(16 circuits ON)
3uIlits@9Vdc
21units@24vcic
42 02 (120 g)
MODULE
TYPICAL
REFERENCES
A
a40548
I6
NUMBER
OF
55%
t I6 CIRCUITS ON)
I3 CIRCUITS ON
it -
clR~~lTS 8 -
10% 20% 30%
40% 50%
60%
AUBIENT TEMPERATURE I%1
Fiire
6-9. I/O Points VS Temperature
r---------
OPTICAL
COUPLER
SAMPLE
INPUT CIRCUIT
Figure 6-10. Wiring foi* 16 CIRCUIT, 25 V dc Sink Input Module
030
031
032
033
034
035
C36
037
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
737
6-12

_
GEK-90842
24 V dc Sink Load Input (16 Circuits)

With Removable Terminal Board
IC6lOMDL107
This module provides 16 circuits, each designed to receive a single discrete (ON/OFF) signal fkom user
supplied devices. This module has 16 LED status indicators to refiect the ON or OFF status of each of
the 16 circuits. Typical input devices include limit switches, pushbuttons, selector switches, and relay
contacts.
24 V dc power to sense the state of these inputs is provided by the rack power supply;
therefore, no external power source is required for this module.
The 16 circuits are divided into 2
groups, with each group having its own common terminal. The 2 common terminals a~ tied together
internally.
Figure 6-12 provides wiring information for this module.
devices through a removable socket type temxinal board.
The 16 input circuits are connected
to user
a40799
Input Points
Maximum VoItage (Open

CbCUit
In t 2 urrent
OIrLtvel l
OFF Level +
OFF to ON Response
ONtoOFFR
Maximum OFF
=YliGge
Minimum ON Current
Circuit Indicator
IntemaI Power Consumption
Units of Load
Wew
16
36 V tic
USER
WlRlNG
MODULE
USER
WIRING
17 mA
otQ3vdc
19to24vdc
3 to 15 ms
TYPICAL
REFERENCES
;~5,s
Field Side
25 mA @ 9 V dc,
Maximum
(16 circuits ON)
14 mA for each ON circuit
@24V&
3units@9v&
23 units
24vdc
6.0 oz (1? 0 g)
lVohqe
levels measured betwtar

teiimbab (across input device).
043
046
140
142
common and input

a40790
144
146
\r
9 CIRCUITSON
10%
20% 3oT
WIRING
DIAGRAM
40% SOT 60%
AMBIENT TEuPERAfURE
I *Cl
Figure 6-11. I/O Points VS Temperature
POWER SUPPLY
047
=3
OPTKAL(__
COUPLER
Figure 6-12. Wiring for 1OrCircuit, 24 V dc Sink Load Inputs
64.3
GEKm842
24
V ac/dc Source Input

IC610MDLlll
This module provides 8 input circuits, each designed to receive a single discrete (ON/OFF) signal from
user supplied devices. Typical input devices include pushbuttons, limit switches, selector switches and
relay contacts. These input circuits can interface to either 24 V ac signals or 24 V dc source-type signals,
thereby allowing the module to interface to input devices that provide their own voltage. Following are
specifications for each of the 8 circuits.
Input
AC INPW
20 to 28 V ac, 50-60 Hz
19 mA (maximum)
13mA Typical
2oto28vac
Oto6Vac
5 to 50ms
Sto6Oms
Field Side
Voltage
Input current
ON Level
OFF Level
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Circuit Indicator
InPower Consumption
Units of Load
weight
DCINPUT
20-28 v dc (Source)
19 mA (maximum)
13mA Typical
2oto28vdc
Oto6Vdc
6 to 30 ms
StchOms
Eeld Side
9 V dc, 10 mA (supplied by rack powa supply)
1@9Vdc
5 02 (140 g)
a42681
USER
User devices are connected to screw terminals on

the faceplate of this module. Each screw terminal will accept up to one No. 12 AWG wire or
two No. 14 AWG wires. The ON/OFF state of
each circuit is indicated by an LED located in the
field side of each circuit. The 8 circuits are
divided into 2 groups of 4, each with its own
common.
The two commons, CA and CB are
isolated from each other intexnally. Each input
can accept either an AC input or a DC input.
a42682
WIRING
.1
AC
1
(CA
CBI
Figure 643. Wiring for 24 T $c/dc hputs
TYPICAL
MODULE
WIRING
OIAGRAM
REFERENCES
03C
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
6-14

GEK-90842
24
V ac/dc Source Input (16 Circuits)

IC610MDLllZ
This module provides 16 input circuits, with LED indicators, each designed to receive a single discrete
(ON/OFF) signal fkom user supplied devices. Typical input devices include pushbuttons, limit switches,
selector switches and relay contacts. These input circuits can interface to either 24 V ac signals or 24 V
dc source-type signals, thereby allowing the module to interface to input devices that provide their own
voltage. In addition, the module can be connected as a sink input. When using the sink configuration,
the user must supply the source of power for the input devices, as when used in the source input
configuration.
Following are specifications for each of the 16 circuits.
Input
VoMage (source or Sink)
Input current
ON Level
OFF Level
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Circuit Indicator
Intemal Power Consumption
ACIWUT
14 to 30 v ac, 50-60 Hz
12mA@24Vac
14 to 30 v ac
oto3vac
5 to 30 Ins
5 to 30 ms
Logic Side
Units of Load
wei%lt
DCKNPUT
20-28 V dc
12mA@24&
14 to 30 v tic
oto3vdc
5 to 25 ms
5to25ms
Logic Side
9 V dc, 130 mA (maximum)
Typical, 25 mA + 4.5 mA for each ON circuit
13
6 oz (170 g)
a40800
User devices are connected to screw terminals on

the removable
connector
mounted
on the
faceplate of this module.
Each SCRW terminal
will accept up to one No. 12 AWG wire or two
No. 14 AWG wires. The On/OFF state of each
circuit is indicated by an LED located in the logic
side of each circuit. The 16 circuits are divided
into 2 groups of 8, each with its own common.
The two commons, CA and CB a~ isolated fkom
each other internally.
Each input can accept
either an AC input or a DC input.
I6 CIRCUITSON
I6
NUMBER
12 -
OF
CIRCUITS
ON
*-
IO CiRC'JiTS
ON
7 CIRCUITSON
5 CIRCbiTSOh
49
IOC
ZOC
AMKENT
I
30%
1
4O'C
1
SOY
!
6O'C
TEMPERATURE ('Cl
Fiiiigure
6-14. I/O Points vs Temperature
chart
6-15
GEK-90842
a40801
USER WIRING
USER WIRING
MODULE
--b
Fb,
14 - 30VAC
NPICAL
REFERENCES
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
111
110
113
112
115
114
117
116
CA
6
7
CB
3
5
7
WIRING
DIAGRAM
INPUT (O-7)
_~__
8
t
I
I
A@
t
DC
OR
$
;
J.
'Y
I
::.:;
.
-r8
.rdr-r-
AC
COMMOC
OPTICAL
(CA, CB)
SAMPLE INPUT CIRCUIT

FIGURE 6 15 WIRING FOR 16 CIRCUIT 24 VAC/DC
LOAD INPUTS
SOURCE
Figure 6-15. Wiring for 16 Circuit 24 V ac/dc Source Load Inputs
6-16
GEK-90842
115&O V ac Output
IC610MDL175
This module provides 8 circuits each capable of controlling user supplied discrete (ON/OFF) loads.
Typical loads include relay coils, motor starters (up to No. 3), solenoid valves and indicator lights. The
8 circuits a~ divided into 2 groups of 4 circuits each. Each group can be supplied from a separate
power source. Power to operate the field devices must also by supplied by the user. Figure 6-17
provides wiring information for this module. Following are specifications for each of the 8 circuits:
t
1 CAUTION ]
If this module is wired incorrectly or the listed specifications are exceeded, any damage
incurred by the module or user devices connected to the module may not be covered by
warranty.
output Points
8
97-265 V x
4763 Hz
1 =lP
1.2 mA
220v, 60 Hz
0.5 IxUi 8 llOV, 60 Hz
0.9v
1 -P
0.W 8 0.5 amp
25 mA
10 amps for 16 ms
5 amps for 100 ms
1 ms
8-10 ms (l/2 cycle)
Logic Side
(2) 5 amp fast blow (one
cmeach
up of 4)
ON
20 mA gkach
ciIalit
9vdc
16@9 % ck
6.4 oz (180 g)
ting Voltage
OE?-Fkquency
A
Maximum Current*
Maximum Leakage Current
ON Vdtage
Drop
Smallest Recommended
Maximum Inrush
Load
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Circuit Indicator
m
(Internal, Soldered)
Power Consumption
Memal
Units OaLoad
Wdght
*Maximum load current is dependent upon ambient

temperature as shown on the chart in @are 6-16.
8 CIRCUITSON AT I AMP EACH
I
ON
MODULE
5 CIt?CUITS
ON
A? 2.5
3 CIi?CUiTS
AT
oh
AYBIEhT
97-265
VAC
054
055
056
057
EACH
AMPS
DIAGRAM
EACH
I ALAP EActr
TEUPEG~TURE ~'Cl
97-265 VAC
0ma
l
m-
Fiire
VAC
053
6-16. I/O Pomts vs Temperature

TO OTHER
THREE ClRCWS
97-265
052
10% 20% 30't 40'::50% 60%

Figure
WIRIfvG
050
WIRING
\\
USER
051
a40555
Cif?CUITS ON AT 0.5 AUPS
..
\\
\\
\\
NUMBER 6
3F
CIRCltITS
TYWCAL
REFERENCES
6.17. Wiring for 115/230 V ac Outputs
6-17
1151230 V ac Isolated Output

IC610MDL176
Typical loads include relay coils, motor starters (up to No. 4), solenoid valves, and indicator lights.
Each of these circuits is isolated from the other circuits on this module relative to AC power source.
The term isolation is not relative to optical-coupler noise and fault isolation which all I/O modules have.
Each output is provided with 2 field terminals allowing separate AC power sources (that is, different
phases) for each of the 4 outputs. These power sources must be supplied by the user. Figure 6-19
provides wiring information for this module. Although this module consumes 8 discrete references
assigned to the slot into which it is placed, only 4 are actually used. The other 4 can be used internally
as coils, but they cannot be provided to hardware I/O modules. Following are specifkations for each of
the four circuits:
PC-Sl-83-0038
Outputs
ting VoWP
T- Frequency
A
Msucimum Current*
lblaximara Leakage Current
4
97-265 V IIC
4763 Hz
2ams
7J@22OV
6oHz
3.5 ITA
11ov
20 ampsY or 16 ms
.8V @ 2 amps
25 IIA
1.0 ms
8-10 ms l/2 Cycle)
Logic SiL
(4) 3 amp fast blow
Maximum Inrush
ONVd
eDrop
Sxnabst ?I ecommended Load
OFT to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Circuit ladiabtor
(In-W
(each circuit, Replaceable)
Inter& Power Consumption
Units of bd
WWt
12 mA
8uni1s
5=(1 f
TYPICAL
REFERENCES
MODULE
60
61
62
9vdc
9Vd.c
g)
63
* Maximum load current is ckpcndcnt upon ambient temperaWe

asshownanthechaftinfi~6-18.
a40549
4 CIRCUITSOn AT 2 AUK EACH
-k\
\
IRCUITSon AT I AMPEACH
\
\
WIRING
10% 20% 30-c

AMWENT
40% 50%
TEMPERATURE
DIAGRAM
jwc
t %I
Figure 6-18. I/O Points vs Temperature

Chart
115
VAC
p&L;______________:::;_____:
Figure 6-19. Wiring for 15 V ac Isolated outputs
USER
WIRING
6-18
24 V dc Sink Output (8 Circuits)

IC6lOMDL151
Typical loads include relay coils, motor starters, solenoid valves, and indicator lights. The 8 circuits are
provided referenced to a single DC power source, that must be supplied by the user. Figure 6-21
provides wiring information for this module. Since current flows from the load into the field tetial
for
each circuit when the output is energized, these circuits are referred to as sink DC outputs. Following
are specifications for each of the 8 circuits:
I
oatput POWS
Operatiqg Vokage
PeakVd
e
MaximumT urrent*
current
MaKLULk
ON VoltageTro p
SmaIkst Recommended Load
MaxbwmInrush
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Circuit India&w
Fuses o[n-)
Power Consumption
Intemal
Units of Load
Weight
8
5-24 V &
45 v dc
0.5 am
TfPlCAL
REFERENCES
4ovcic
0.8V @ d .5 amp
0.65V @ 0.1 amp
1 mA
3 amp for 20 ms
1 amp for 100 ms
100 msec
100 m8cc
Logic Side
(2) 3 =p
(one on each oup of 4:)
USER
MODULE
0.lrn.z
20 mA @ 9 Tic.
3mAforeachON
circuit a24vdc
2uIlits
s vdc
24 V dc
3uIlits
42 02 (e 20 g)
5-24
l
WIRING
VDC
plot
Cl
060
A
061
062
063
064
065
066
067
INTER&AL
CONNECT1Ob
Max. load current is dependent upan ambient temperatures as

shown in fig. 6-20.
a40550
WIRING
8
I
NUFR
CYFTS
DIAGRAM
8 CIRCUITSON AT 0.5 AMPSEACH

y
9 8 CIRCUITSON AT .3S AMPS EACH
\\
\\
\\
1, S CIRCUITSON AT 0.5 AYK EACH
2.

24 VDC
Chart
INTERNAL
POWER SUPPLY
VDC
I
I
3A
I
,
I
OPTICAL
COUPLER
Figure 6-21. Wiring for 24 V dc Sink Outputs
6-19
GEK-90842
24
V dc Sink Output (16 Circuits)

IC610MDL156
This module provides
16 circuits, each designed to be capable of controlling user supplied discrete

(ON/OFF) loads. There are 16 LEDs on the faceplate, which ase status indicators to reflect the ON or
OFF status of each of the circuits. Typical loads include relay coils, motor starters, solenoid valves, and
indicator lights. The 16 circuits are referenced to a single DC power source that must be supplied by the
user. Output switching capacity of this module is 0.5 A ti 24 V dc. The output switching circuitry is
arranged in 4 groups with 4 circuits in each group. Each group is protected by a 3 amp fuse.
The 16 circuits are connected to user loads through an optional I/O Interface cable, Catalog number
IC61OCBLl05, which connects to a 24.pin connector mounted on the module faceplate. Figure 6-23
provides wiring information for this module. Following are specifications for each of the 16 circuits.
16
5-24 v dc
40VdC
0.9 v tic
0.5 amp
1.5 v dc
0.5 amp
0.5 am
0.1 In&@ 40 v dc
3 amp for 20 ms
1 amp for 100 ms
0.1 ms
0.1 ms
3=p&output
Common Line, one for
each
up of 4).
4omjpo@9Vdc,
MaximUm
16 outputs 0
v dc,
66 mA@24
MaximUm
(16 outputs ON)
4units@9Vdc
24vdc
10 units
3.9 02 (1e 0 g)
output Points
p
ical
ON Voltage Drop,
urn
ON Voltage Drop,
Maximum Current*
Maximum Inrush
a&l
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFT Response
Fuse (Iarnal)
Internal
Units
Power Consumption
of Load
Wlaximum
load current is dependent
upon ambient
temperature
8s shown in figure 622

16-+yPC
(16 CIRCUITS
IO% 20%
AYBIENT
Fiire
30%
USER
WIRING
USER
WIRING
MODULE
WIRING
DIAGRAM
OnI a40552
40% 50% 60%
TEMPERATURE
(73
6-22. I/O Points vs Temperature
Chart
24
+r
POWER
VDC
I -
SUQPLY
Figure 6-23. Wiring for 16 Circuit 24 V de Sink Outputs
TYPICAL
REFERENCES
A
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
I/OSpecifications and Wiring
6-20
GE&90842
24 V dc Sink Output (16Circuits)

IC6lOMDL157
This module provides 16 circuits, each designed to be capable of controlling user supplied discrete
(ON/OFF) loads. There are 16 LEDs on the faceplate, which are status indicators to reflect the ON or
OFF status of each of the circuits. Typical loads include relay coils, motor starters, solenoid valves, and
indicator lights. The 16 circuits are referenced to a single DC power source that must be supplied by the
user. Output switching capacity of this module is 0.5 A at 24 V dc. The output switching circuitry is
arranged in 2 groups with 8 circuits in each group. Each group is protected by a 3 amp fuse.
The 16 circuits are connected to user loads through a removable socket type terminal board. Figure 6.25
provides wiring information for this module. Following w specifications for each of the 16 circuits:
output Points
Operating Vokage
Peak Voltage
ON Voltage Drop, Typical
011 Vobage Drop, Maximum
Maximum Current+
Maximum Inrush
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Fuse (Internal)
Units of Load
Weight
16
5-24VdC
4OVdC
1.0 v dc @ 0.5 amp
2.0 V dc @ 0.5 amp
0.5 amp
0.11 mA @ 40 v dc
3 amp for 20 ms
1ampforlCXIms
0.1 ms
0.1 ms
3 amp (In Output Common
L&e, one
for each group of 8)
9 V dc: 3 mA + 2.3 mA for
each ON circuit
24Vdc:dmAforeachON
circuit
4uIlits@9V&
1ouxlits@24vdc
5.6 02 (160 g)
* Maximum load current is dcpcncknt

as shown in figure 6.24.
upon ambient tcmperatwe
a40802
IO'C
2O'C
3C'C
M'C
5O'C
6O'C

Chart
II0 Specifications
6-21
and Wiring
a40803
MODULE
USER WIRING
USER WRING
r---
5-24vDC
056
057
150
152
156
The following
rules should be used when applying this module.
1 . Each group of 8 outputs is limited to 2A total curxnt.

2 . The maximum current for each array of 4 outputs (O-3), (4-7) is:
2 points on - .5 amps each
4 points on - .35 amps each
1 point on - .7 amps,
3 points on - .4 amps each,
VDC
24VDC
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
POWER SUPPLY
_d(~,__.w..0l
OUTPUT
SAMPLE
OUTPUT CIRCUIT
Figure 6-25. Wiring for 16 Circuit 24 V dc Sink Outputs
6-22
24 V dc 2 Amp Sink Output

IC610MDL153
This module provides 4 fused 24 V dc sink output circuits each capable of controlling user supplied
discrete (ON/OFF) loads. Each circuit is rated at 2 amps continuous current. Typical loads include
motor starters, relay coils, solenoid valves, and indicator lights. The circuits on this module are referred
to as sink outputs since current flows &om the load into the field terminal for each circuit when the
output is energized. Field connections are made to screw terminals on a terminal block mounted on the
faceplate. Each terminal will accept up to one No. 12 AWG wire or two No. 14 AWG wires. The
ON/OFF state of each circuit is indicated by a corxqxxrding LED. This module, although having only
4 output circuits, will consume 8 consecutive discrete references.
The 4 references not available as
real world outputs can be used as internal coils. Following are specifications for each of the four
output circuits.
Output Points
Operating Voltage
Peak Voltage
ON Voltage Drop
Maximum Current*
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Circuit Indicator
Fuses, Internal
Internal
Power Consumption
4
5to%V&
45 v &
.15Vdc@larrnp
.6Vdc@4amp
2 amps
<.4mA@4OVdc
.l ms
.l ms
Logic Side
5 amp (1 for each circuit)
Replaceabk
5 mA @ 24 V tic
l2mA@9Vdc
&hits of Load
1unit@24vdc
Waw
2units@9Vdc
4.2 02 (120 g)
*Maximum
load cumnt
TVPICAL
FIEFEREWES
MODULE
is deucndmt
USER
a4055 1
4 CIRCUITS ON AT 2 AMPS EACH

4 CIf?CUITS ON AT I AMP EACH
NuFR
CIRFTS 2 I-
x.3 CIf?CUITS
ON AT
\4AYK EACH
3 CIWUITSONAT2 AMPSEACH
'\
'\'\
'l
.\
'\
1CIR~UWIT'JN
Ai'\,
'\
'\.

Chart
cm ambient tcm~rature
as shown in fiare
6.26.
WlRMG
5A
OPTICAL
OX!
031
VDC
24
70
VDC
OUTPUT
032
5 TO 24
CIRCUITS
033
SAMPLE
SINK
OUTPU?
Figure 6-27. Wiring for 24 V dc 2 Amp Sink Outputs
CtKUlT
V/DC
6-23
GE&90842
24 V dc 2 Amp Sink/Source Output

IC610MDL154
This module provides 4 isolated, fused 24 V dc sink or source output circuits each capable of controlling
user supplied discrete (ON/OFF) loads. Each circuit is rated at 2 amps continuous current. Outputs can
be connected in parallel to increase output cunxsnt capacity. Types of loads that can be controlled by
this module would include motor starters, relay coils solenoid valves, and indicator lights. All 4 circuits
can be referenced to a separate DC source of power. The circuits on this module can be used as either
source outputs or sink outputs, depending on how the load is wired in relation to the load power supply.
Field connections are made to screw terminals on a terminal block mounted on the faceplate. Each
terminal will accept up to one No. 12 AWG wire or two No. 14 AWG wires. The ON/OFF stateof each
circuit is indicated by a corresponding LED on the logic side. This module will consume 8 consecutive
discrete references. The 4 references not used as real world outputs can be used as internal coils in
your program. Following are specifications for each of the four circuits.
a40553
output POWS
oparrting
vow
Peak Vohage
curreut+
Maximum
MsuimumLeakage
ON Vohage Drop
Current
OFT to ON Respouse
ON to OFF Respouse
Circuit Iudicator
Fuse!& Iuterual
Iuterud
Lamp
Power cousumed
bad
should
*Loadament(max.)is
be
4
sto24vdc
45 v dc
2 amps cartinuous
8 amps Maximum Peak
<.4mA@4oVdc
lVdc@damps
~.6 V dc @ 4 amps
.3Vdc@Zamps
, .15 v dc @ 1 amp
~.l ms
.l ms
Logic Side
5 amp (1 for each circuit)
Replaceable
l2mA@9Vdc
3QmA@24VdC
2units@9V&
3units@24vdc
CIRClJITS
ON AT2 AUF'SEACH
4
NslJeER 3
OF
7
'..
\\ .
CIRCUITS
ON
2I
I1
10% a'(: 30%
AT ! AMP
EACH
\
h 2 CIRCUITSON AT 2 AMPS EACH
% .
\
'..
'.
I CIRCUITON Ai*
4AUPS
9 4 CIRCUITSON
\
\
\
\
\
\
'-,\3 CIRCUITSON AT
~4AMf5
EACH
j
I
ro@c 50%
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
60%
i CJ
Figure 6-28. II0 Points vs Temperature

TYPICAL
RLCERLNCLS
USER WmNG
MODULE
pc-~1-84-0023
.8 lDIip6 or less.
dependentonambient
050
temperature 8s shown below.

051
052
5 C
24
dDC
SO@Cf
OS3
Although not shown IS such, the 4 circuits a~ isolated from each other and can be connected to separate power sources.
OPTICAL
SA
OUTPUT
--
COMMON
-
Figure
6-29. Wiring
--
of 24 V dc 2 Amp Sink/Source Output
644
GE&90842
24
V dc Source Output
IC6lOMDL155
This module provides eight 24 V dc source output circuits, each capable of controlling
user supplied
discrete (ON/OFF) loads. Each circuit is rated at 0.5 amps continuous current. Typical loads that can
be controlled by this module are motor starters, relay coils, solenoid valves, and indicator lights. The
output switching circuits on the module are arranged in 2 groups with 4 circuits in each group. Each
group of 4 output circuits is protected by a 3 amp fuse. All 8 circuits should be referenced to a single
source of dc power. Field connections are made to screw terminals on a terminal block mounted on the
modules faceplate. Each terminal will accept up to one No. 12 AWG wire or two No. 14 AWG wires.
The operating state, either ON or OFF, is indicated by a corresponding LED viewed on the modules
faceplate. Following are snecifications for each >f the 8 circuits.
A
Output Points
&berating voltage
Peak Voltage
ON Vokage Drop
Maximum Current*
Smallest Recommended Load
OFF to OX Response
ON to OFF Response
Circuit Indicator
Fuses (Intemal)
Inted
Power Consumption
Units of Load
wwt
a40554
sto24vdc
4OVdc
1.0 v @ 0.5 amp
0.75 v @ 0.1 amp
0.5 amps
O.lmAat24Vdc
1.0 mA
6 CIRCUITSON
1OOcLsec
100 jlsecs
Logic Side
(2) 3 amp (in output
common line,
one for each group of 4
circuits)
3OmAmaximum@9Vdc,
Supplied by rack power
on ambient tempexature
AMBIENT
3O'C 401: 50%
60%
TEMPERATURE Xl
Figure 6.30. I/O Points vs Temperature

Chart
mPplY
3Units@9Vdc
4.2 oz (120 g)
*Maximum load current is dependent

shown in figure 6.30.
10% 20%
as
6125
a40626
TYPICAL
USER
MODULE
REFERENCES
5-24
WIRING
VDC
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
INTERNAL
CONNECTION
WIRING
TO
DIAGRAM
OTHER
3 CIRCUITS
COMMON
CA
OPTICAL
A
_______
3A
5 TO 24
+a
a,,,
I I,
It
VDC
-
I
I
t
TO
I
I
I
CB
LED
o-
--~~~~~~~~~-~
OUTPUT
SAMPLE
OUTPUT
CIRCUIT
Figure 6-31. Wiring for 24 V dc Source Outputs
--_
6-26
GK-90842
24 V dc Source Output (16 Circuits)

IC610MDL158
This module provides sixteen 24 V de source output circuits, each capable of controlling user supplied
discrete (ON/OFF) loads. The output switching capacity of this module is 0.5 amps at 24 V dc. Typical
loads that can be controlled by this module are motor starters, relay coils, solenoid valves, and indicator
lights. The output switching circuits on the module are arranged in 2 groups with 8 circuits in each
group. Each group of 8 output circuits is protected by a 5 amp fuse. All 16 circuits can be referenced to
a single source of dc power or each group of 8 can be referenced to a separate source of power. Field
connections are made to screw terminals on a removable terminal board mounted on the modules
faceplate. Each terminal will accept up to one No. 12 AWG wire or two No. 14 AWG wires. The
operating St&e, either ON or OFF, is indicated by a corresponding LED viewed on the modules
faceplate. Following are specifications for each of the 16 circuits.
a40805
output Points
~pgpitfns
VowiF
Peak Voltage
ON Voltage Drop
Maximum Current+
Maximum Leakage Curnnt
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Circuit Indicator
Fuse!S (Internal)
16
5to24vdc
40VdC
Maximum 1.5 v dc
0.8 v dc
0.5 amp (Ty@al)
0.7
a- v dc 8 0.1 amp (Typical)
us am
MODULE
USER WIRING
?YPlCAL
5-24
10 m R
40 v dc
0.1 I&
csistive
1.0 ms B esistive 1
Logic Side
'(2)
5 amp (in output common
be, one for each group of 8
&Wits)
laterpal Power CcMwumption 12 mA for each ON circuit
Units of Load
Weight
V DC
REFERENCES
CA
0
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
121
120
123
122
125
124
127
126
0
4,
USER WIRING
5-24 V DC
7
I
CB
1
3
*Maximum load current is dependent

shown in figu~ 6.32.
on ambient tcrnpcraturc
-\
a40804
16 CIRCUITS
I6
ON
0.2%
NUMBER
OF
C*REYs
I2
o.sA,,
\\
\
as
5
7
10 CIRCUiTSON
WIRING DIAGRAM
IOT
20%
30%
40%
SO'C
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
60%
I lCI
Fiire 6.33. Wiring for 24 V dc Source Outputs
6-27
GE&90842
Relay Output (8 Circuits)

IC610MDLl80
Typical loads include relay coils, motor starters, solenoid valves, and indicator lights. Since this module
is not designed for a specifk current type such as 115 V ac or 24 V dc, it can be used with a wide variety
of loads and signal types. The 8 circuits are divided into two groups of 4 circuits each. Each group can
be supplied from a separate power source. Power to operate the field devices must also be supplied by
the user. Following are specifkations for each of the eight circuits:
outputs
Operating Voltage
AC Frequency
Maximum Current*
M&mum
Leakage Current
(Across Contacts)
Smakst Recommended Load
MaximumInrush
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Circuit Indhhtor
Fuses (Inteti)
InternskI Power Consumption
Units of Load
weight
8
5 to 265 V ac/dc
4763 Hz
4 amp (resistive)
1mA
5mA
5 amps
5 ms
5 ms
Logic Si&
(2) 10 amp (Replaceable)
(one for each group of 4)
45 II-LAfor each ON
circuit@9vdc
34unit.s@9Vdc
7 02 (200 g)
*Since non-solid state devices are used as the power switching devices, the following bitations
must be observed for z&able operation:
Table 6-2. Maximum Current vs Load Type for Relay Outputs

OPERATING
MAXIMUMCURRENT FOR LOAD TYPE
VOLTAGE
RESISTIVE
220 v ac
22ovac
11ovac
110 v ac
24 v dc
50 v dc
4.0 Amp
1OOVdc
250 V dc
4.0 Amp
SOLENOID
0.5 Amp
.05 Amp
0.5 &np
0.1
Amp
5.0 Amp
0.5
Amp
1.0 Amp
0.1 Amp
05 Amp
0.3 Amp
.05 Amp
.03 Amp
0.5
.05
0.5
0.1
0.5
0.1
.05
.03
Amp
Amp
Amp
Amp
Amp
Amp
Amp
Amp
TYPICAL LIFE
(OPERATIONS)
100,ooo
800,000
150,000
650,000
100,ooo
100,ooo
100,ooo
100,ooo
loads are definedas a X10 inrush with a power factor (PF) of 1.00 and when tumed OFF
a PF of 1.00. Solenoids are defied with a X10 inrush, a PF of 0.65, and when turned
OFF represent a PF of 0.35.
Lamp
represent
648

GE&90842
TYPICAL
REFERENCES
USER
MODULE
WIRING
040
041
042
043
044
045
046
047
WIRING
TO
DIAGRAM
OTHER
5-265 V ac dc
#-__ A EL-,,s,
\ /
.e
\
LED
OUTPUT
-----
SAMPLE
OUTPUT
+__
CIRCUIT
Figure 6.34. Wiring for 8 Circuit Relay Outputs
_ ,:
6-29
GEL90842

IC610MDL182
This module provides
16 circuits each capable of controlling user supplied discrete (ON/OFF) loads.

Typical loads include relay coils, motor starters, solenoid valves, and indicator lights. Since this module
is not designed for a specific current type such as 115 V ac or 24 V de, it can be used with a wide variety
of loads and signal types. The 16 circuits are divided into two groups with 8 circuits each. Each group
can be supplied from a separate Power source. Power to operate the field devices must also be supplied
by the user. The ON/OFF status of each circuit is indicated by an LED, which is located on the logic
side of the circuitry. The 16 output circuits are connected to user loads through a removable socket type
terminal board. Following are specifications for each of the 16 circuits:
outputs
Operating
Vohge
AC Frequency
Maximum Current*
Maximum h&age
Current
(Across Contacts)
Smallest Recommended Load
Maximum Inrush
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Circuit Indicator
Fuses (Recommended, External)
Xnternal Power Consumption
Units of Load
Weight
*Since non-solid
16
5to22ovac
5to3ovdc
4763 Hz
2 amps (Resistive)
8 amps per Common (maximum)
0.1 mA
5InA
2 amps
10 ms
10 ms
Logic Side
2aInpinscIieswithload
30mAforeachONCircuit@9V&
48units
8.5 oz (240 g)
state devices arc wed as the power switching &vices,
the following lhnitakms must be obscned for reliable aperation:
Table 6-3. Maximum Current vs Load Type for Relay Outputs

OPERATING
VOLTAGE
22ovac
22ovac
110 v ac
11ovac
UVaC
MAXIMUM
CURRENT
FOR LOAD TYPE
RESISTIVE
SOLENOID
0.25 Amp
0.03 Amp
0.25 Amp
2bP
2bP
0.05 Amp
2bP
0.05 Amp
1
0.25 Amp
0.25 Amp
0.03 Amp
025 Amp
6!5o,ooo
025 Amp
TYPICAL
iJFE
(OPERATIONS)
100,ooo
800,000
100,ooo
100,ooo
NOTE
Lamp loads are defined as a X10 inrush with a power factor (PF) of 1.00 and when tumcxl OFF
represent a PF of 1.00. Solenoids are defined with a X10 inrush, a PF of 0.65, zmd when tumed
OFF represent a PF of 0.35
6-30

GEK-90842
a40806
MODULE
USER WIRING
I
USER WIRING
TYPICAL
REFERENCES
011
013
015
016
017
110
112
114
116
1
WIRING
DIAGRAM
TO OTHER SEVEN CIRCUITS
OllTPUT
2A
_-_____~J-\r*___+___-:
SAMPLE OUTPUT CIRCUIT
Fiire
6-35. Wiring for 16 Circuit Relay Outputs
6-31

GEK-90842
24
V de Input/Output (4 In/4 Out)

IC610MDL103
This module provides a dual function since it provides 4 input circuits each designed to receive a single
discrete (ON/OFF) signal from user supplied devices and 4 output circuits each capable of controlling
user supplied discrete (ON/OFF) loads. Typical input devices include limit switches, pushbuttons,
selector switches, and relay contacts. Typical loads include relay coils, motor starters, solenoid valves,
and indicator lights.
24 V dc power to sense the state of the inputs is provided by the rack power supply. The 4 output
circuits are referenced, through their respective loads, to a single DC power source. The ON/OFF state
of each input and output circuit is indicated by an LED. Figure 6.36 provides wiring information for this
module. Following are specifications for each of the 4 input and 4 output circuits:
INPUT
CIRCUITS
Input Points
Maximum Voltage (Open
Cm)
Input Current
ON Level
OFF Level
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFT Response
Maximum OFF Leakage
Midmum ON Current
4
36 V dc
18 mA
o-3 v dc
18-36 V tic
4-15 ms
4-15 ms
3rd
7mA
OUTPUT CIRCUITS
output Points
opvpting v0-e
Peak V&age
Maximum Cnrrent
Maximnm Leakage Current
ON Voltage Drop (Typkal)

ON Vdtage Drop (Max)
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Fuse (InteraaI)
Inputs
outputs
Units of Load
7a&s@24Vdc
Wdgbt
4
5-24 V dc
45 v &
0.5 amp
0.1mA@40v&
0.8 V & @ 0.5 amp
0.65V&@
.lamp
15 v dc @ 0.5 8mp
0.1 ms
0.1 ms
3WP
(In Output common line)
2OmA@9Vdc
14mAforcachQXircuit
3 mA for each On circuit
2units@9Vdc
4.6 oz (130 g)
6-32

GEK-90842
USER
WIRING
USER
INPUTS
MODULE
WIRING
OUTPUTS
E I::
TYPICAL
REFERENCES
G30
031
032
033
034
035
03t?
337
WIRING
24
DIAGRAM
VDC
TO
OTHER
CIRCUITS
OUTPUT
SAMPLE
OUTPUT
CiRCUlT
l?iiiire 6m36. Wiring for 24 V dc Inputs/Outputs
6-33
GEK-90842
24 V dc Input/Relay Output (4 In/4 Out)

IC6lOMDL104
This module provides 4 dc input circuits and 4 relay output circuits. The 4 input circuits are each
designed to receive a single discrete (ON/OFF) signal from user supplied devices such as limit switches,
pushbuttons, and relay contacts. The 4 relay output circuits are each capable of controlling user supplied
discrete (ON/OFF) loads. Typical loads include relay coils, motor smrs,
and indicator lights. Since
the relay output circuits were not designed for a specific current type, such as 24 V dc or 115 V ac, they
can be used for a wide variety of loads and signal types. The ON or OFF state of each input and output
circuit is indicated by an LED. Figures 6.37 and 6.38 provide wiring information for this module.
Following are specifications for each input and output circuit.
Input Points
Maximum Voltage
Input current
ON Level
OFF Levd
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Maximum OFF Leakage
Minimum ON Current
RELAY
OUTPUT ClRCUIlS
outpts
oP@=tb
v0-e
AC Frquency
Maximum chrentt
(Across Contacts)
Smdlcst Recommended Load
MaximumInrpsh
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
arca
IDdiakt0r
Fuse (In Output Common Line+
Replaceable)
Iuternal Power Consumption
Untts of Locrd
6uuits@24Vdc
*Since non-solid
operation:
4
36 V tic
18 mA (max)
o-3 v tic
18-36V tic
4-15 ms
4-15 ms
3mA
7mA
statedevices are wed as dhe pcnwczM
4
5 to 265 V a&c
47-63 Hz
4 amp (resistive)
l&i
5mA
5amps
5 ms
5 ms
Logic Sick
10 8mp
45 mA for each ON
C~t@9Vdc
2ounits@9Vcic
&vices, the limitations listed
in table 64
must be observed for reliable
6-35
TO OTHER
OUTPUT
_----
SAMPLE
24
RELAY
OUTPUT
VDC
TO
F
THREE
OTHER
CIRCUITS
INTERNAL
POWER
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L--drrC
_J
CIRCUIT
COMMON
r
I
I
+___
m*
SUPPLY
INPUT
,-r--e
SAMPLE
INPUT
COUPLER
CIRCUIT
Figure 6-38. Sample 24 V dc INPUT/RELAY OUTPUT Circuits
6-36

GE&90842
Thumbwheel Interface
IC6lOMDL105
This module provides an interface between the Series One or Series One Plus PCs and up to four sets of
user supplied thumbwheels.
Each set of thumbwheels will allow the operator to control the preset on a
timer or counter. In fact, these timer/counters (references 674 to 677) will not function without this
interface module. The power (24 V dc) to sense the state of these thumbwheels is provided by the
power supply in the CPU base unit. This interface module must be installed in the same base unit as the
CPU and can only be located in slots 2 through 5. Only one interface module is allowed per system.
The thumbwheels and their associated wiring must be supplied by the user. The thumbwheels are
standard BCD coded and diode isolated, a standard option available with most thumbwheels.
The
following is the required setting for each digit of the thumbwheel:
Digit
switch
4
Value
ClOSUXT?
2
(X=Closed)
1
0
X
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Whenever the interface is installed in the CPU base unit, eight discrete references are assigned to this
module slot. These references have no significance relative to the operation of the interface. They can
be used as internal coils, but not as status to other hardware I/O. All four presets are read into the Series
One or Series One Plus PC each scan. Figure 6.39 illustrates the wiring for the 20 terminals on the
interface module. No special terminations are required for circuits that are not being used.
One thumbwheel
is read into the CPU every scan assuring rapid response to new values.
Care should be
used when changing the value on the thumbwheels, since intemW&te values can be brought in and used
during a scan or for several scans. For example, if the thumbwheel is set for the value 095 and the new
value 105 is desired, altering the hundreds digit first results in 195 being detected and used by the CPU,
until the tens digit is changed fkom 9 to 0. Normally, higher values are more acceptable than lower
values and the natural tendency to enter new values fkom the left or high order digit will result in larger
values. However, if the tens digit is changed first, the value 005 could be read prior to the 105 being set.
The exact results depend upon the application and the specific logic entered.
Intemal Power Consumption
9OmA@24Vdc(9unitsofload)
lOmA@ 9Vdc(l
mitofload)
6-37
GEK-90842
.
,
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
COlvrvECwR
su)QufD
WlfH
INTERFACE
4L
THUMBWHEELS
SHOULD HAVE EACH MDlvIDuAL
SGkAL (E G. 800) DiODE ISOLATED AND 6uSSED TO WuTERFACE QG.
P!h 681 COUOwrrVC
TC(UMBWHEELS
SCb!EMATtCAUY
SHOWS GROUPS OF FOUR HDWOUAL
WINS FOR SMQLIClTY
TmuSAmS
L
COMMONS
WNDREDS
*
4675)
o-9
o-9
TENS
w
O-9
A
ATEACH
TrmMBWnEEL
UwTS
.m
a
es
DIODES
ARE TYPE
Iw 148. OR EQUAL
RECOMMENDED
AWGNO
23
WIRE
IN91 4.
SJZE IS
MAXIMUM
OfSTANCE TO FLJRTHEST
GROUP
OF THUMB-S
IS 10 FEET (3 METERS)
H -Y
-0
-MACE
EIwRONMENTS.
USE
WIRE GROUNDED Af
AN I0 -ACE
CA&E
fm
t,#SEHmnMTSEL
IUTERFACf
is AVAILAbLE.
?MT~wn6tOC#~O5A
.
c
Figure 6-39. Wiring for Thumb wheel Interface

GEK-90842
Thumbwheell-c8bbe
Wife List and Ifstallati0rr Diagram
Pm No.
W~cdaCUk
Bll
naaJnmcwd*
Bl2
notcxmmctw
OFIN (eucsr
i
Figure 6-40. Thumbwheel Interface Cable Wire List
Gcu(Bu(3)
6-39

GEK-90842
High Speed Counter

IC610MDLllO
The High Speed Counter module (HSC) allows a Series One or Series One Plus PC to monitor and
control a number of process variables (position, velocity, flow rate) that the CPU cannot control due to
timing constraints.
A logical relationship between the counters seven inputs, the preset, and current
value determines the status of its own two external outputs as well as others through CPU user logic.
Figure 6.41 illustrates this concept.
The module can be installed in any of the first 4 I/O slots adjacent to the CPU, and uses 8 I/O and 2
counter references to interface with user logic. Indicators on the front face of the module give output
and count status.
General
Increment (Up) Count

Decrement (Down) Count
Reset/Marker
PIeset value (0 - 9999)
Current Value (0 - 9999)
Two Discrae DC (5 - 24 V)
Current Value (BCD)
< 100 Microseconds Between Pulse
Received and Transition of Output
up/Down counter Inputs
up/DOWn
COMW
specifications
OUtpUtS
Reaction Time
Environmental
Humidity, Non-Condensing
Power Consumption from Internal Supply
Pulse Rate
we
Minimum Pulse Width
OFF-
0 to 6o c
5 to 95 %
70mA@9Vdc
Without Filter < 10 Hz
With Filter < 500 Hz
(Filter selection by thee dip
switbes on module, see page 6-69)
0 to 9999 Binq bled Dhnal(BCD)
25 mS
+25@=4
6-41

GEK-90842
Module Location
The High Speed counter module (HSC) can be installed in any one of the four I/O slots adjacent to the
CPU slot in the CPU chassis. In figure 6.42, these slots are shown (A, B, C and D) for a 5-slot rack. In
a lo-slot rack, the HSC must also occupy 1 of the 4 slots adjacent to the CPU. Also shown in this figure
are the I/O references used by the HSC to intetiace with user logic. Note how an HSC located in Slot A
uses I/O references associated with both Slot A (O-3) and Slot A (100-103).
Since each slot in a Series One or Series One Plus PC I/O system corresponds to a special group of eight
I/O references, an HSC in Slot A eliminates Slot A from the I/O system. Likewise an HSC located in
Slot B eliminates Slot B from the I/O system. In summary, an HSC physically occupies one YO slot,
but requires two slots worth of I/o references to interface with user logic (Refer to table 6.5).
pc-sl -84-QOO 1
/ll-knIIlII
I
67
57
!
i
ONE
SERIES
47
F&we 6-42. HSC Location in 5-Slot Rack
6-42
Table 6-5. Number of HSCs vs Discrete I/O Capacity

NUMBER OF HIGH SPEED
COUNTER MODULES IN SYSTEM
REMAINING DISCRETE
I/O CAPACITY
seriesone
Seri~OnePlUS
112
96
168
152
136
120
104
80
64
48
Interface to Field Devices

A 32 PIN Connector
(Refer to figure 6.43) on the faceplate of the HSC is the interface between the
module and its associated field devices which include:
1. Counting mechanism
encoder).
which controls the Up/Down
counter (typically
a bidirectional
2 . Four digit binary coded decimal (BCD) display of counters current value.
3 . Two 5 to -24 V dc loads under control of tvvo counter outputs.
Zoo0
@CD)-
1000
400
100
i-1
RESn
MARKER
BCD)
BCD)
@CD,
40
(BCDI
10
fBCD1
@CD)
MD)
(+I
(-1 SVDC 2 5- OR
12VDCZlD%
RESFf
(+I
MARKER
5 VDC = 5- OR
12VDCzlo;
1
(-1
DECREMENT
f-1
INCREMENT
COWTER
COWTER
i+b
DECREMENT
(+I INCREMENT
COUNTER
COUPTER
Figure 6143. HSC Connector Pin Definition

In the interestof claritythe specifications for each field device are addressed separately.
incremental
6-43

GEIL90842
Up/Down Counter Inputs

SPECIFICATIONS
RESET INPUT
UP/DOWN INPUT
WEM
Minimum Input
Pulse width
Supply Voltage
OnCuIrent
off Current
On Voltage
Off Voltage
25 nsec
loo nsec
+12 V dc, 10%

<3mA
10 to 15 IILA
<3Vdc
>7Vdc
+12 V dc, 10%

10 to 15 mA
<3mA
UVdc
<3Vdc
OFF r
a40068
I
.
ON--T
ON
,T
OFF 4
RESET*
COUNT*
Figure 644. Signal Direction

The conditions necessary to increment/decrement,
particular interest when counting in one direction
or reset the counter are described below.

only.
DESIRED ACTION
Incxement Current Count
Decrement Cunent Count
Reset Chent
Count
Increment Input:
Decrement Input:
Reset Input:
CONDITION
Increment Input: (Disabled) - (Enabled)
Deuement Input: Disabled
Reset Input: Disabled
Decrement Inputz (Disabled) - (Knabled)
Increment Input: Disabled
Reset Input: Disabled
Reset Input (Disabled) -- (Enabled)
Increment Input: Disabled or Enabled
Decrement Input: Disabled or Enabled
Disabled,~10VdcBetweenPhsB1andAl
Enabled,<2VdcBetw~nPinsBl
andA1
Disabled,>lOVdcBetweenF5niB2andA2
Enabkd,<2VdcBetweenPinsB2andA2
Disabled,<2VdcBetweenPinsB6andA6
Enabled,~lOVdcBetweeaPinsB6andA6
Figure 6-45. UPlDOWNkESET
Input Circuit
This is of
644

GEK-90842
Encoder Interface 1
Typically an incremental encoder controls the counter through the Up/Down, and Reset Inputs. To
comply with HSC circuitry, the encoder should represent clockwise and counterclockwise movement of
its shaft with two separate pulse trains that increment and decrement the counter. Figures 6.46, 6.47,
and 6.48 illustrate sample connections.
.
pc-~1-84-0005
WGMSPEEDCou)JrrcI
MWULE
Figure
6-46. Encoder with RESET/MARKER Option

Resetting Counter Once Der Revolution
_
of Encoder Shaft
Figure 64% Encoder with RESET Option in Series with Home Limit Switch Such That
Counter is Reset When Both Home Limit Switch and RESET/MARKER Pulse
are Enabled
6-45
GEL90842
PHOTO LLECTfBC CELL
RESET
COUNTER
OECREMENT
COUNTER
HCREMENT
COUNTER
Figure 6-48. Encoder With Limit Switch Resetting Counter and Photoelectric Cell Inhibiting
the Counter Operation
L/O Specifications and Wiring
6-46
GEE90842
Binary Coded Decimal (BCD) Output

To view the counter current value, a four digit BCD (sink/source)
output is provided.
SPECIFICATIONS
RATING
ITEM
0uTPuTPoLARrN
SOURCE MODE
Supply Voltage
Allowable Ripple
cumnt CoI3sumption
Output Voltage
SINK MODE
Output Voltage
1: Optoisolator OFF
0: Ojmisolator ON
See Sample Circuit Below
12 V dc + 10%
< 3%
< 25 mA
6V&
at 0.4 mA
5Vdc
5%
< 1%
< 10 mA
3.5 v dc
at 0.1 mA
0.4 v dc @ 2 IIA
0.1 v dc @ 3 mA
a40070
SVDC
OR
r2vrlC
(SOURCE)
IOKfi
VOLTAGE
Figure 649. Sample BCD Output Circuit
6-47
GEK-90842
Figure 6.50 illustrates the connections necessary to use an external BCD Display. For a source type
output the 5 V or 12 V supply is required.
SENSE OF OUTPUT:
SENSE OF OUTPUT:
(1) Optoisolator OFF

(0) Optoisolator ON
PCFOUR DIGIT
BCD DISPLAY
SAMPLE ClRCutT
OPTOISOLATOR
II
II
l-
V.
Figure 640.
5-12 VDC
BCD Output Wiring Diagram
UNITS
I/O Specifkations and Wiring
Counter Output
The HSC has two discrete outputs that can be controlled from ladder logic or by the relationship
between the present and current value of the counter.
SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM
RATING
Type
NPN Transistor, open collector, sinking
Voltage Range
Peak Voltage
Cumznt Range
5 to 24 V dc
< 45 V dc
> 0.3 A
A typical wiring schematic
to field devices and a sample circuit are shown in figure 6.51.
HK3H SPEED COUNTER MODULE
USER LOADS
+v
5-24VDC
Figure 641.
User Load Wiring Diagram
(>=<)
i-
-c
6149
GEK-90842
Interface to User Logic

Eight I/O and two counter functions interface the HSC to user logic. The specificreferences associated
with these functions depend upon the location of the module in the CPU rack. Figure 6.52 illustrates
how these references comspond to the modules location.
couNTmfuwTmH
;
I
muNlm#RmNcm
I
I
,106I
PRESETVALUE
I107
' 105 , 103 I 101 I
mwr~~wcE8
I
I
I
I
m?urFwcrmu
I
I
>PRESETVALlE
30
-fRESOVMUE
I31
,
<PREsnvALlJE
' 32
CARRvmmRow
'I33
I
I
OvlcvTnmcnm
104,
smcuRRENTvALuf
20
omPulNO.l~SflECf'
omPuTMo.2sTATE
O~T~TNO.~M~~ESEECT'
'
1
I
I
1
22
,'2
IO2
, 23
113
I03
'
,
1
1130,
00
'01
I
ok!mAFElrmu,
100,
,O
(11
I2l
1
I
oiJlPul~.1S1AtE
102,
I
I
'
120,
110,
100;
131 I
132,
121,
122,
111,
112,
101 '
102 I
133'
123)
113'
103I
Figure 642. I/O and Counter Function Reference Chart
640
Interface Function Definition

Shown below is the definition and user logic symbol for each interface function.
a42645
SET CURRENT VALUE

X+
v+
WHEN COUNTER X Is ENABLED,

CURRENT COUNT IS SET TO A
VALUE OF Y
O--r7
x: loo, 102,104,106
Y:O-9999
PRESET VALUE
4-l
CNT
X+
Y+
x: 101,103,105,107
Y:O-9999
l
l
X - Counter Reference
Y=VaMRarrge
WHEN COUNTER X IS ENABLED,

PRESET VALUE OF COUNTER
ISSETTOY
641
I/O Specificationsand Wiring

GEK-90842
a42646
PUT FUNCnQbls
> PRESET VALUE*
ENABLED WHEN CURRENT

VALUE OF COUNTER IS
GREATER THAN ITS PRESET VALUE
x: 00, 10,20,30
I: PRESET VALUE*
,1,

VALUE OFCOUNTER IS
EQUAL TO ITS PRESET VALUE
x: 01, 11,21,31
VALUE OF COUNTER IS
LESS THAN ITS PRESET VALUE
< PRESET VALUE+ *
X: 02, 12,22,32
CARRY / BORROW
,rt+
X: 03, 13,23,33
l
0001 - 0000 - 9999 (Decrement Rollover)

9999 - 0000 - 0001 (Increment Rollover)
0001 - 0000 - 0001
9998 - 9999 - 9998
(Increment Current Count) - (Extemalty Reset Counter) - (Decrement Current Count)
(Decrement Current Count) - (Externally Reset Counter) - (Increment or Decrement Current Count)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
l
Enabied when current value of the counter undergoes one of the six sequences
described beiow :
The status of these input functions is given to the CPU once per scan. Therefore, if a
particularcanditbn is true for less than the scan time of the user bgic, its associated
Input function woukl not be enabled in the user program.

GEK-90842
a42647
QEEMmQN
USER
OUTPUT NO. 1
MODE SELECT
. IF DISABLED OUTPUT NO. 1

IS IN MANUAL MODE
. IF ENABLED OUTPUT NO. 1
IS IN COUNTER MODE
OUTPUT NO. 1
STATE
X: 103, 113, 123,133
. IF ENABLED OUTPUT NO. 2

IS IN COUNTER MODE.
l
,K,
X: 102,112, 122, 132
IN COUNTER MODE DETERMINES

IF OUTPUT NO. 1 IS ENABLED
BEFORE OR AmER PRESET
IS REACHED
. IF DISABLED OUTPUT NO. 2

IS IN MANUAL MODE
OUTPUT NO. 2
MODE SELECT
OUTPUT NO. 2
STATE
IN MANUAL MODE OPERATES

OUlWTNO. 1 AS
NORMAL OUTPUT
IN MANUAL MODE OPERATES

OUTPUT NO. 2 AS NORMAL
OUTPUT
IN COUNTER MODE DETERMINES
IF OUTPUT NO. 2 IS ENABLED
BEFORE OR ARER PRESET
IS REACHED
For further description on the operation of outputs, refer to Output Logic Section.
643
GEK-90842
Ouptut Logic
Each of the two HSC outputs operate in either the manual or counter mode. The operating mode of each
output is determined by the state of its mode select function (refer to output function section). The logic
of each mode will be covered separately.
If Mode Select Function
Disabled (0): Manual Mode, Enabled (1): Counter Mode.
Manual Mode
The state of an output in the manual mode corresponds to the status of its associated
Function as shown below in the manual mode output truth table.
Output State
Table 6-6. Manual Mode Output Logic Truth Table
OUTPUT MODE SELECT
0
0
OUTPUT STATE
0
1
OUTPUT
0
1
Counter Mode
In the counter mode of operation outputs can react immediately when the current count reaches specific
preset values. In this mode each output is controlled by a combination of three factors.
1. Initial relationship
between preset and current count.
2. Real time relationship
3. Status
of
between preset and current count.
Output State function.
When the HSC receives a preset value from user logic (via preset counter function), it is initially
compared to the current value of the counter. If the preset is-greater than the current count in this initial
comparison the real time comparison *2between the preset and current count is true when the current
count is greater than or equal to the preset. In other words when the current count reaches the preset
moving in the POSITIVE direction the real time comparison becomes true.
This concept is shown
below in table 6.7.
Table 6-7. Real Time Comparison Table for Preset Initially > Current Count
/
REAL TIME COMPARISON STATUS
CURRENT COUNT
< PRESET
CURRENT COUNT
-> PRESET
FALSE
TRUE
*Real Time compariston = continuous comparison between preset value and cummt value of cutmter.
6-54

GEK-90842
Conversely, if the preset is kGtially less than the current count, the real time comparison is true when
the current count is less than or equal to the preset. In other words, when the current count reaches the
preset moving in the negative direction the real time comparison becomes true.
This concept is
shown below in table 6.8.
Table 6-8. Real Time Comparison Table for Preset

Initially c Current Count
I
I REAL TIME COMPARISON STATUS
CURRENTCOUNT
> PRESET
FALSE
CURRENT COUNT
< PRESET
TRUE
Once the status of the real time comparison between the preset and current count has been determined,
the status of the output is easily obtained. If the outputs associated output state function is disabled its
status corresponds directly to the real time comparison status. If the output state function is enabled the
outputs status is the inverse of the real time comparison status. This concept is shown in table 6.9.
Table 6.9. Output State vs Real Time Comparison Status in Counter Mode
OUTPUT STATE
FUNCTION
I
I
DISABLED
ENABLED
1: OUTPUT ENABLED
0: OUTPUT DISABLED
Table 6.10 summarizes
I
I
REAL TIME COMPARISON

IS FALSE
0
1
REAL TIME COMPARISON

ISTRUE
1
0
the logic associated with an output in the counter mode of operation.
I
I
Ii0 Specifications and Wiring
6-55
GEK-90842
Table 640. Output Logic in Counter Mode

INITMLLY PRESET > CURREW
OUTPUT STATE FUNCTION
0
1
COUNT
cuRRENTcOuNT
< PRESET
CURRENT COUNT
> PRESET
1
INITMLLY PRESET < CURRENT COUNT

OUTFWT STATE FUNCTION
0
1
cuRRENTcOuNT
> PRESET
0
1
CURRENT COUNT
< PRESET
1
0
Filter Selection
In some electrical noisy environments it may be necessary to filter out noise through filters available on
the module.
The HSC provides this capability on the incremental count, decremental count, and
reset/inarker inputs. The location of these switches on the module is shown in figure 6.53.
Sense of switch: OPEN - Filter Disabled (< 10 Khz)
CLOSED - Filter Enabled (C 500 Hz)
Figure 643. Filter Selection with Dip Switch
646
GEK-90842
Fast Response I/O

IC610MDL115
The Fast Response I/o module allows a Series One or Series One Plus PC to respond quickly to an
input and/or monitor very short input pulses. The modules four 24 V dc inputs and two relay outputs
use 8 I/O references to interface with user logic. Each of the 2 outputs can operate in a manual or fast
response mode. An output in manual mode is controlled from user logic similar to any other discrete
output. An output in the fast response mode can be controlled independent of CPU scan time by its 2
associated inputs, with one input enabling it, and the other disabhg it. Up to 14 Fast Response I/O
modules can be included in a Series One or Series One Plus PC system, thereby providing 28 fast
response outputs and 56 inputs total. Following are specifications for each of the input and output
circuits.
DC INPUT CIRCUITS
Number of Circuits
Maximum Voltage (Open Circuit)
Input current
ON Level
OFF Level
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Maximum OFF Cment
Minimum ON Current
Input Pulse Width
Chait Indicator
36 V dc
16 mA (maximum)
0-3Vdc
18 - 36 V dc
0.3 to 1 ms
50 to 150 ms
3mA
7mA
1 ms (minimum)
Field Side
NOTE
Input Switching Voltage Provided by Module
RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUITS

Number of Circub
Operating Voltage
2
S-265 V ac/dc
AC Freqwncy
47-63 Hz
4 amp (esistive)
0.5 amp (inductive)
1mA
10 mA
Range
lkhuimum C-t*
Smahst Recommended Load
Maximum Inrush
OFF To ON Response
ON To OFF Response
Ciralit Indicator
Ciralit Indicator
Fbse (In Output Common Line)
Wernal Power Consumption
5ms
5 ms (hum)
5 to 10 ms
Field Side
Field Side
3 mP
5OmA+53mA/OutputONChuitat9Vdc,
lS~ut@24Vdc
Units of Load: 16 (9 V dc)
6 (2A V dc)
Since non-solid state relays are used as the power switching devices, the limitations as shown in table
below must be observed for reliable operation.
647
Table 641, Maximum Current vs. Load Type for Relay Outputs
OPERATING
MAXIMUM
VOLTAGE
22ovac
22ovac
1lOVac
11ovac
24 V dc
50 V de
1OOVdc
250 V dc
RESISTIVE
4bP
4bP
5bP
1hP
0.5
0.3
Amp
Amp
CURRENT FOR LOAD TYPE

LAMP
0.5 Amp
0.05
0.5
0.1
0.5
0.1
0.05
0.03
Amp
Amp
Amp
Amp
Amp
Amp
Amp
SOLENOID
TYPICAL
LIFE
(OPERATIONS)
100,ooo
800,000
150400
650,000
100,ooo
0.5 Amp
0.05 Amp
OJ Amp
0.1 Amp
0.5 Amp
0.1 Amp
0.05 Amp
0.03 Amp
100,000
100,ooo
100,ooo
NOTE
Lamp loads are defined as a X10 inrush with a power factor (PF) of 1.00 and when tumed OFF
represent a PF of 1.00. Solenoids are defined with a X10 inrush, a PF of 0.65, and when turned
OFF represent a PF of 0.35.
b40556
Figure
6-54. Module Reference NUMBER/LOGIC Symbol Definition
6-58

GEK-90842
Mode Selection
The Operating Mode Selection of outputs X4 and X6 is determined
references SS and S7 as shown in table 6.12.
by the status of their mode select
Table 6-12. Operating Mode Selection
MODE SELECT
OUTPUT
(SS and S7)

Disabled (0)
Enabled (1)
w=dx6)
Manual Mode
Fast Response Mode
Output Logic - Manual Mode

An output operating in the manual mode is controlled through user logic similar to any other discrete
output. Its associated inputs on the fast response module do not affect it any way.
Output Logic - Fast Response Mode

In the fast response
output.
mode of operation,
a combination
State of Associated
Enable Input (Reference
State of Associated
User Logic
Disable Input (Reference
The truth table (following)

and disable inputs.
of three factors determines
the status of the
number 0 or 2)
number 1 or 3)
shows how the output can be controlled
from user logic or with its enable
Table 643. Truth Table for Output in Fast Response Mode

(S5 or S7 Have Been Enabled)
ENABLE INPUT
No. 0 or 2
DISABLE INPUT
No. 1 or 3
USER LOGIC
X4 or X6
OUTPUT
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
It can be seen from the first three rows in the truth table that the output can be enabled from its enable
input or from user logic. The last four rows of this truth table show the various conditions that disable
the outputs.
The logic diagram shown below in figure 6.55 summarizes the operation of this module.

GEK-90842
a40547
CPU s&e (UserLogic)
Fast Response Moduk
fidd Side
Input No. 0 4
1 LnQutNo.0
hputNo.1
hputNo.1
b Output No. 4
Output No. 4 o(4) c
wect
Output No. 4 IS51
hput No. 2 (I-
3 input No. 2
Input No. 3 (3-
3 Input No. 3 _
> OutputNo.
Output No. 6 DC61
SeIect
Output No. 6 @I)
Figure 645. Fast Response Module Logic Diagram
6-60

G=-90842
USER WIRING
INPUTS
USER
MODULE
WIRING
OUTPUTS
c4
USER
WIRING
DIAGRAM
24 VDC
COMMON
r ___________~____+~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L - ,d:P=
5 255
VAC DC
TO OTHER
m THREE CIRCUITS
INTERNAL
POWER SUPPLY
INPUT
H(-he
w -
LOAD
.> 5-265
RELAY
SAMPLE OUTPUT
3A
CIRCUIT
Figure 6-56. Wiring for Fast Response I/O Module
VACDC
6-61

GEL90842
I/O Simulator
IC6lOMDL124
The I/O simulator module has 8 two-position
(ON or OFF) switches, each having an associated LED,

that is, if switch 1 is turned ON, LED 1 will light. An I/O simulator module uses one I/O slot and the 8
I/O references assigned to that slot. Each of the switches can be programmed as a discrete input device.
This module requires no field connections since its function is controlled by programming.
An I/O
simulator module is a valuable tool in program development and troubleshooting.
An I/O simulator
could also be programmed to be used as conditional input contacts for control of output devices.
Specifications for this module are as follows:
4 to 15 ms
4 to 15 ms
lOmA@ 9Vdc
14mA/CircuitON@24Vdc
lunit@9Vdc
llunits@24Vdc
3.2 oz (90 g)
ON to OFF Response
OFF to ON Response
Interndl
Power Consumption
unitsof Load
Weight
a40215
1
I
,
I/O SIMULATOR
Figure 647. I/O Simulator Module Faceplate
6-62
GEK-90842
-.
Analog Input
IC610MDLll6
Introduction
The Analog Input module provides four independent
input channels capable of converting an analog

input signal to a digital signal for processing by the programmable controller. This module can be used
with Series One and Series One Plus programmable controllers.
However, the input can only be
provided in binary form with a Series One PC. Ihe Series One Plus, in addition to the basic functions,
provides data operations (including math functions), which allows other types of operations to be
performed when using the analog input module. Each Analog Input module requires 16 I/O references
for addressing.
Hardware Features
The user can select, by jumper placement, to use either voltage inputs (1 to 5 V dc) or current inputs (4
to 20 mA>. The factory setting is for voltage input operation. Resolution is 8 bits, which allows a
maximum digital value of 255 to be converted. Eight LEDs on the faceplate provide an 8-bit binary
display of the input. The channel to be displayed is selected by depressing a pushbutton on the
faceplate. Each time the pushbutton is depressed, the next channel in sequence is selected, i.e., channel
1, 2, 3, 4, 1, etc.
User field wiring is made to a removable terminal board on the modules faceplate. A hinged plastic
temG.nal cover on the terminal board protects the terminals. The terminal cover has a removable label
that can be used to record circuit information.
The maximum conversion time is 2 milliseconds and does not add to the scan time of the CPU. The
four channels are converted one at a time, with one channel being converted each scan. Each successive
scan converts the next channel in turn.
Power Requirements
This module requires an external 24 V dc power supply. The 24 V dc supply in Series One racks can be
used, however the current provided by the rack is limited to 100 mA, which is sufficient current for one
Analog Input module, sin& the module requires up to 65 m4 for operation.

SpecifGzations for this module are provided
in the following table.
6-63
GE&90842
Table 6-14. Analog Input Module Specifications

Number of cJhanmls
Input Ranges
(Independent)
+l to +5 v dc or 4 to 20 mA
(jumper selectable for each channel)
&bit binary (1 in 256)
8 bits, binary data output
4 bits, cbannel status
16 consecutive (per slot assignments for 16 points, 0 to 7 and 100 to 117, etc.)
8 bits: Data being read into the selected channel
4 bits: Channel selected for Data Display
4 bits: Channels being scanned
0 to 60 C (32 to 140 I?)
5% to 95% (non-condensing)
Differential
> 1 MSZ (Voltage put)
250 Sz (Current put)
Voltage Input, 0 to +lO V dc
Current Input, 0 to 30 mA
Successive Approximation Method
2 msec, maximum
fo.8%, maximum
21% at 25 C, maximum
i50 ppm (parts per million) per lC
+25 V dc, 65 mA (maximum)
55 mA (Supplied by rack power supply)
4
Resolution
Digital outputs
I/O Points Required
LEVI Display (16 LEDs)
Relative Humidity
@Jut Types
Input Impedance
Conversion Method
Conversion Time
Linearity Error
AmY
Accuracy vs. Temperature
External Power Source
9 V dc Power Consumption

The Analog Input module uses 16 consecutiveI/O points, beginning with the first I/O reference assigned
to the I/O slot selected for the module. In the table, it is assumed that the Analog Input module is placed
in slot 3 of a properly configured 5 or lO-slot CPU rack (references 10 to 17 and 110 to 117). These
references are used for the example only, other valid references for I/O slots that allow 16 references can
be used. The following table defines the use of each of the I/O points.
Table 6-15. I/O Point Definition

I/O POINT
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
110
111
112
DEFINITION
Data Bit - Binary

Data Bit - Binary
Data Bit - Binary
Data Bit - Binary
Data Bit - Binary
Data Bit - Binary
Data Bit - Binary
Data Bit - Binary
Channel 1 Ibis bit is used in ladder logic to sense
whenthedatarezeivedattheinputsisforthis
channel.
Channel 2 sense bit
-1
3 Sense bit
WEIGHT
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
I/O TYPE
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Wut
644
GEK-90842
Table 645. I/O Point Definition - Continued

I/O POINT
WEIGHT
DEFINITION
113
114
115
Channel 4 Sense bit

This output combined with the following output can
be set to selectively scan only 1 channel, instead of all
4. These outputs are ignored if the scan selection
output is on. The desired channel is selected by
settingthesetwooutputsinthel~logictothe
state, as shown below, for that channel.
OUTPUT 114
0
OUTPUT 115
0
0
1
1
1
116
117
Not used
Scan selection output. This bit must be set for the
module to n5ad data input, unless the selected channel
scan outputs anz used. This output is set in the ladder
logic program
I/O TYPE
Input
output
-put
2
3
4
output
Sample Ladder Logic

Sample ladder diagrams are provided below using the same I/O referencing as is used in defking the I/O
points in Table 6.15 on the previous page. These are examples of programming the Series One Plus.
Example 1. If all channels are to be scanned, output 117 must be on.
117
SW1
+ -m-- 1 I ~~-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
( s )--+
117
E~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
--&
SW1 and SW2 are

switches
user
I/O Specifications
and Wiring
6-65
GEK-90842
Example 2. This example of ladder logic allows you to select the channel to be scanned.
1 CH
2 SELECT
114
&___]
CH 4 SELECT
+ ---1 1
----I)--
CH 3 SELECT
+ ---1
111-w
w--w
115
CH 4 SELECT
1 1
-----1-
SW2
+ ----
[ ~~--~~~~~~-~~
1~-~~~~---~~~~~~~-~~~[
+ ----[
F51 R# 1
]-------+
F60 R# 500]-------+
Retrieve data
and
convert to BCD
Store channel 1 data in

registers
500 and 501
111
+
w---
--I)-
-m-w
[ ~~~~---------~~~~~~~[
112
-~~~~~~~---~-~~~~~~~[
I
[
g-60
R#
5()2]---_---

registers 502 and 503
F60 R# 5041.-0-0-0 +

~'60 R# 50610-0---9+

113
[ ~~--~~----~---~~~-~~[
The Function codes used in the above example are as follows:

F51 = D STRl (Data Store l), F86 = BIN to BCD, F60 = D OUT (Data Out)
6-66
GEK-90842
Analog Input Module Features

Figure 6.58 is an illustration of the faceplate for the Analog Input module, showing its features and user
wiring CoMections.
a41 896
CHANNELS
BEINGSCANNEDALL DIM,
IF ALLSCANNED
DATABEINGREAD
IN ON SELECTED CHANNEL
31 31
CHANNELSELECTED
FOR DATADISPLAY
BY DEPRESSING
PUSHBUTTON
I4164
FOR
-DATADISPLAY
&
CHANNEL I INPUT
+24V
ov
EXTERNAL
SUPPLY
Figure 648. Analog Input Module Faceplate

Sekction Of Operating Mode
The mode of operation, either 1 to 5 V or 4 to 20 IYA is determined by the absence or presence of
jumper plugs on pins that are located on the side of the bottom circuit board. There are four sets of pins
(2 pins in each set), with one set for each channel. The first set of pins is labeled CHl and the last set of
pins is labeled CH4. The factory default setting is for 1 to 5 V operation, which is no jumper present.
TO select the 4 to 20 mA mode of operation for any channel, place a jumper on the two pins for the
channel or channels and push the jumper fkmly onto the pins.
6-67
GEL90842
Analog Output
IC610MDL166
Introduction
The Analog Output module provides two independent output channels, each capable of converting 8 bits
of binary data to an analog output. This module can be used with any of the Series One family of
programmable
controllers. The Series One Plus, in addition to the basic functions, provides data
operations (including math functions), which allows other types of operations to be performed when
using the analog output module. Each Analog Output module requires 16 YO references for addressing.
Although this module can be used with the Series One and Series One Junior, in addition to the Series
One Plus, certain programmin g techniques will make better use of the capabilities of the Analog Output
module with these PCs. An APPLICATION NOTE will be issued explaining those techniques in detail.
Hardware Features
Each channel can provide either a voltage output (0 to +lO V dc) or current output (4 to 20 r&4 source).
Voltage or current selection for each channel is user selected by how the field wiring is connected on the
scow terminals on the faceplate. Resolution is 8 bits, which allows a maximum digital value of 255 to
be converted. Eight LEDs for each channel on the faceplate provide an 8-bit binary display of the data
output for each channel.
User field wiring is made to a removable terminal board on the modules faceplate. A hinged plastic
terminal cover on the terminal board protects the terminals. The terminal cover has a removable
label
that can be used to record circuit information.
The maximum conversion time is 10 microseconds
channels are converted with each scan.
and does not add to the scan time of the CPU. Both
Power Requirements
This module requires an external 24 V dc power supply. The 24 V dc supply in Series One racks can be
used, however the current provided by the rack is 100 mA, which is sufficient current for one Analog
Output channel, since the module requires up to 85 mA for operation.
The maximum load for both
channels is 170 m4.

Specifications
for this module are provided
in the following table.
6-68
II0 Specifications
and Wiring
GEL90842
Table 6-16. Analog Output Module

Number of Channels
Analog Output Ranges
Resolution
Digital Input Data
I/O Points Required
2 (Independent)
. 0 to +lO V dc or 4 to 20 mA
(selectable for each channel on faceplate terminals)
&bit binary (1 in 256)
8 bits, binary from the CPU
16 consecutive (per slot assignments for 16 points, 0 to 7
and 100 to 117, etc.)
8-bit binary data display of output data for each channel
.
.
LED Display (16 LEDs)

8 LEDs for each channel
Relative Humidity
Output Impedance
Output Current
External Resistor
Conversion Start
Conversion Time
Accuracy
Accuracy vs. Temperature
External Power Source
9 V dc Power Consumption
I/O Reference
Specifications
0 to 60 C (32 to 140 F)
5% to 95% (non-condensing)
< 0.5L (Voltage Output)
10 mA, maximum (Voltage Output)
55OL, maximum (Current Output)
At start of CPUs scan
10 msec, maximum
0.2% at 25OC
30 ppm (parts per million) per lC
+24 V dc, 85 mA (maximum)
55 mA (Supplied by rack power supply)
Definitions
The Analog Output module uses 16 consecutive I/O points, beginning with the first I/O reference
assigned to the I/O slot selected for the module. In the table, it is assumed that the Analog Output
module is placed in slot 2 of a properly configured 5 or lO-slot CPU rack (references 0 to 10 and 100 to
110). These references are used for the example only, other valid references for II0 slots Jhatallow 16
references can be used.The following table defines the use of each of the I/O points.
Table 6-17. I/O Point Definition
I/O POINT
CHANNEL
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
100
101
102 ,
103
104
105
106
107
DEFINITION
DATA
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
WEIGHT
1 - Data Bit 1
1 - Data Bit 2
1 - Data Bit 3
l- Data
1 - Data
1- Data
1- Data
1 - Data
2- Data
2 - Data
2 - Data
2- Data
2- Data
2- Data
2 - Data
2- Data
L/O TYPE
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
output
output
output
output
output
output
output
output
output
output
output
output
output
output
output
output
6-69

GE&90842
Sample Ladder Logic

A sample ladder diagram is provided below showing a method of how to move output data to Channels
1 and 2. This is an example of programming the Series One Plus for using the Analog Output module.
Example.
Move output data to Channels 1 and 2, using the same I/O references as are used in
previous table; i.e., 0 to 7 for Channel 1 and 100 to 107 for Channel 2.
SW1
SW2
+ --w-1 [----I/[-w---w
SW1
+ m--w IO ---I,
----a-[
1 -------
------
1 F85
-----[
F61
----111[
~50 R# 502]-------+
R#
]-------+
SW2
1 111-----
-----[
The
F50
F85
F61
F50 R# 500]-------+
F61
R#
10
I-------
Function codes used in the above example are as follows:

= D STR (Data Store)
= BCD to BIN
= D OUT1 (Data Out 1)
Move data from

registers
500/501
to the accumulator
then
Convert data from
BDC to Binary
and
Send the data to
Channel 1
Move data from

registers
502/503
to the accumulator
then
Convert data from
BCD to Binary
and
Send the data to
Channel 2
6-70

GEK-90842
Analog Output Module Features

Figure 6.59 is an illustration
user wiring connections.
of the faceplate for the Analog Output module,
a41 897
CHANNEL I
DISPLAY OF
DATAOUTPUT
CHANNEL I
4T0 20MA
OUTPUT
OR
CHANNEL I
0 TO +lOV
OUTPUT
CONNECTIONSON
MODULE,ONLY
ONEREQUIRED
SUPPLY
Figure 6-59. Analog Output Module Faceplate
showing its features and
6-71
GE&90842
UL Listed Products
The Series One products that have obtained UL approval or are UL pending are described in the
following pages. These products are listed below. As with all products that have obtained UL approval,
each listed item has an attached UL label.
l
IC61OCPUlOl
Series One CPU. Version C of the CPU is UL Listed. The functionality
has not changed, all specifications are the same as the previous version.
IC61OCHSlll
IC61OMDL135
Series One 115 V ac Input module,
IC61OMDLl81
IC61OMDLl85
Series One Relay Output module, 5 circuits.

Series One 115 V ac Output module, 6 circuits.
Series One S-slot rack.
of the CPU
115 V ac source of input power required.
The following pages contain the technical specifications

the Series One UL listed products.
6 circuits.
and wiring information
required to implement
6-72
GEK-90842
5-Slot Rack, UL Listed

IC610CHSlll
The 5-slot UL Listed rack is similar to the existing 5-slot rack, IC610CHS110, in that it has a power
supply to the right and slots to contain up to 5 modules. The power supply for this UL rack requires an
input power source of 115 V ac. This rack does not accept 230 V ac input.
As with existing S-slot rack, a terminal board is provided for field wiring connections, refer to the
following figure. The two top terminals a for the 115 V ac HOT (H) and NEUTRAL (N) connections.
The next two terminals are for connecting an external device to the RUN relay, the next two contacts (+
and -) provide a 24 V dc output voltage at 100 mA for connection to an external sensor, and the bottom
terminal is the common (C) connection to an expansion rack.
When used as the first rack in an installation, it must contain the CPU which is placed in the slot next to
the power supply. The rack can also be used as the second or third rack in a system if more I/O is
required than can be contained in the first rack. A two-position switch on the inside, left of the rack,
must be set detetied
by location of the rack in the system. For a UL approved installation, do not mix
UL approved and non UL racks or modules. Specifications for this rack are as follows:
AC power
Requeucy:
Required:
Maximum Load:
output current:
115vac,
15%
47 to 63 Hz
0.8 A, max.
1.4 A, at 5 V dc
0.8 A, at 9 V dc
0.5 A, at 24 V dc
b41930
Figure 6-60, UL Listed SISlot Rack
6-73
GEK-90842
115 V ac Input Module, UL Listed
IC6lOMDL135
This UL listed module provides 6 circuits, each designed to receive a single discrete (ON or OFF) signal
from user supplied devices. Examples of these devices include limit switches, pushbuttons, selector
switches, and relay contacts. The 6 circuits are grouped together and share a single common terminal.
Power to operate the field devices must be supplied by the user. An LED, viewed on the faceplate,
provides a visible indication of the ON or OFF state of each circuit. Specifications for each of the 6
circuits are Drovided below:
Input Points
Operating Voltage
AC Frequency
Input Current
6
97 to 132 V ac
47 t 63 Hz
7mAperpoint
maximum
9.5 K ohms
>8OVac
<2ovac
10 to 30 ms
10 to 60 ms
Field Side
lOmAat9Vdc
1 unit (9 v dc)
Input Impedance
ON Level
OFF Level
OF'F to Oh Response
ON to OFF Response
Circuit Indicator
Internal Power CoIlsumption
Units of Load
a41 924
USER
WIRING
MODULE
TYPICAL
REFERENCES
a41 687
r_w-&___
t
I
I
I
I
1
15VAC
COMMON
L _J&_-_
4-J
TO OTHER
CIRCUITS
OPTICAL
COUPLER
Figure 6-61. Wiring for UL Listed 115 V ac Input Module
634

GEK-90842
Relay Output Module, UL Listed

IC610MDL181
This UL listed module provides 5 circuits, each capable of controlling
user supplied discrete (ON or

OFF) loads. These loads typically include relay coils, motor starters, solenoid valves, annunciation
devices and indicator lights. Since this module is not designed to operate with a specific cumnt type
such as 115 V ac or 24 V dc. It can be used to control a wide variety of loads and signal types. The
relay contact rating for this module is ClSO.
The 5 circuits are arranged in one group, with 2 common connections, which are tied together internally.
Power to operate the field devices must be supplied by the user. An LED, viewed on the faceplate,
Drovides a visible indication of the ON or OFF state of each circuit.
a41 925
outputs
Operating Vokage
AC Frequency
Contact Rating
CwTenty Continuous
Current, Make, 120 V
Current, Break, 120 V
M&mum
Leakage Current
(across contacts)
Smallest Recommended Luad
Maximum Inrush
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Chuit Indicator
Fuses (Internal)
Units of Load
5
5 to 132 V ac/&
47 to 63 Hz
Cl50
2.5 Amps
15 Amps
1.5 Amps
1 mA
TYPICAL
REFERENCES
MODULE
USER
WWNG
030
031
032
5 mA
5 amps
5 ms
4 ms
Logic Side
(1) 10 amp, replaceable
45 mA for each ON
circuitat9vdc
23Unitsat9Vdc
TO OTHER
CIRCUITS
033
034
INTERNAL
JUMPER
a41 689
COMMON
____&p___q
\/
I
I
I
I
I
I
COMMON
I
I
I
Figure 6-62. Wiring for UL Listed Relay Output Module
6-75
GEK-90842
115 V ac Output Module, UL Listed

IC610MDLl85
This UL listed module provides 6 circuits, each capable of controlling
user supplied discrete (ON or

OFF) loads. These loads typically include relay coils, motor starters, solenoid valves, annunciation
devices and indicator lights.
The 6 circuits are arranged in two groups, with a single common
connection for all circuits. Power to operate the field devices must be supplied by the user. An LED,
viewed on the faceplate, provides a visible indication of the ON or OFF state of each circuit.
1 CAUTION
If this module is wired incorrectly or the listed specifications are exceeded, any damage
incurred by the module may not be covered by warranty.
outputs
Operating Voltage
AC Frequenizy
Maximum Current
ON Voltage Drop
Smallest Recommended
Maximum Inrush
Load
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Circuit Indicator
Fuses (Internal, soldered)

Units
of Load
6
97 to 132 V ac
47 to 63 Hz
0.5 amp (per patint)
0.5 mA al 110 v ac, 60
Hz
0.8 V dc at 0.5 SIIP
25mA
10 ampsfor
/ 5 =ps for
a41 926
TYPICAL
REFERENCES
MODULE
USER
WIRING
040
041
16 ms
100 ms
042
I lms
~ 8 to 10 ms (l/2 cycle)
043
1 Logic Sick
(2) 5 =p
(one for each efoup uf
thrte circuits)
20mAforeachON
d5rcuitat9vcic
l2unitsat9vcic
044
045
a41 688
TO OTHER
3 CIRCUITS
--+h
HOT
97 132
r4 VAC
Figure 6-63. Wiring for UL Listed ll!W ac Output Module
I/O Specifkation~ and Wiring
6-76
115 V ac Input Module (16 Circuits

IC610MDL129
This module provides 16 circuits each designed to receive a single discrete (ON/OFF) signal from user
contacts. The 16 circuits are divided into two groups of 8 circuits each. Each group can be supplied
from a separate power source. Power to operate the field devices must also be supplied by the user.
Figure 6-64 provides wiring information for this module. Following are specifications for each of the 16
circuits.
a42493
Input Points
OpeWing Vohage
AC Frequency
Input Current
Intescon.nection
ON Level
OFF Level
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Circuit Indhtor
Units of Load
weight
l2
OF
-6ON
4
N
10%
Figure
WlRtNG
115VA
A
11
a42308
FIELD
16
80-132 V ac
47-63 Hz
14Sma @ 60 Hz
2 groups of 8 circuits
each
Above 80 V
Below 15 V
S-50 ms
5-60 ms
Logic Side
~~@9VwqqQ
1ounits@9vcic
6.4 02 (180 g)
MODULE
644.
20%
30%
40%
50%
,.rrrwTTEwERAfll#~)
60%
I/O Points vs Temperature

Chart
a42362
Fiire
6-65. Wiring for 115 V ac Inputs with Removable Terminal Board
6-77
GEK-90842
115/230 V ac Output Module (8 Circuits)

with Removable Terminal Board
ICXlOMDL179
Typical loads include relay coils, motor starters (up to No. 3), solenoid valves and indicator lights. The
8 circuits &IS divided into 2 groups of 4 circuits each. Each group can be supplied from a separate
power source. Power to operate the field devices must also by supplied by the user. Figure 6-65
provides wiring information for this module. Followinn are sDecifications for each of the 8 circuits:
Y
output Points
Operating Voltage
AC Frquency
lkhximum Current
Maximum Wage
Curreut
011 Vdtage Drop
SmaIlest Recommended
Load
*urn
Inrush
OFF to Oh Response
011 to OFF Response
Circuit Indicator
Fuses (Interual, Soldered)
Iutemal
Power Consumption
Units of Laad
weight
8
80-264 v ac
47-63 Hz
a42492
MODULE
1 -P
1.2 mA @ 23ov, 60 Hz
1.w @ 1 amp
25 ti
10 amps for 17 ms
1 ms
9 ms
Logic Side
(2) 5 amp (one on each
group of 4)
12 mA for each ON
circuit@9vdc
16@9Vdc
7.4 02 (210 g)
USER WIRING
l-4
co
*
6
a42367
8
NJl#o
OF:
-.
6-W
1.0 AWPOINT
a4

Chart
a42366
Figure 6-67. Wiring for 115/230 V ac Output with Removable Terminal Board
Chapter
m
71
Maintenance
Introduction to Maintenance Procedures

The Series One and Series One Plus PCs are designed to provide trouble-free operation. However,
occasionally situations requiring corrective action do occur and it is important to be able to quickly
identify the source of such situations and correct them. Many times the need for corrective action
originates outside of the PC.
Troubleshooting Aids
.-
The advantages provided by the Series One and Series One Plus PC design are indicators and built-in
aids to troubleshooting not only the PC, but also the overall control system. The main diagnostic tool is
the programmer that can be easily attached to the PC. The programmer provides great insight to the
status of the overall control system. When troubleshooting a Series One or Series One Plus PC based
control system, make a habit of having a programmer with you.
Basic Troubleshooting Procedure

The following questions should be asked and appropriate action taken to negative answers. At the end
of the list of questions are step by step procedures to be followed to replace various modules in a Series
One or Series One Plus PC. All major corrective action can be accomplished by replacing modules.
No special hand tools are required except for a screw driver and voltmeter. There is no requirement for
an oscilloscope, highly accurate voltage measurements (digital voltmeters), or specialized test programs. Refer to figure 7.1 for location of the rckmnced indicators.
1. Is PWR (Power) light ON? If not, measure power at the input voltage terminals (98-126 V ac or
195-252 V 8~ as appropriate) on racks using an AC source of power. For racks rquiring a DC
power source, measure the DC voltage between the +24 and 0 V terminals. If the appropriate AC
or DC power is not present, locate the source of the problem external to Series One or Series One
Plus PC. If the AC or DC power levels are correct but the PWR light is off, fuses should be
checked, then rcpl acement of the CPU rack if necessary.
2 . Is CPU light OFF? If ON, check which error code is displayed, r&r to table 4.1 for error code
.
action.
d&nitions and take F
3 . IS RUN light ON? If not, check for the cause such as the programmer in the PRG or LOAD
position or programming errors. If RUN light is OFF and a pgrammcr is not mnnwtcd, or the
propammcrinintkRUNmodcwith
ou t an error code being displayed, rcp&0c the CPU module.
4 Is the BATI light ON? If yes, replace the battery. Sin= the BATI light 5s only a warning level,
the program my be unaltered even if the batt#y is low. Afk replacing the brm#y, examine the
programoYtcstthOc
apcrati01~ Ifafaultislocatedreloadtheprogramfnrmtapencordedattht
completion of initial system programming.
l
5.
Inmultiple~syaemsifthecPUisoperating,~RuNrelaycanbe~~~fulin~wifying
operation of the other pz.;a* supplies. If the RUN relay is not closed @igh resistance) check the
AC or DC poww impply as in step 1 above. Adequate AC or DC power and 8n open relay requires
replacement of the rack.
m
72
Maintenance
GmMo842
a40288
Figure 7-l. Troubleshooting Indicators
General Troublesbooting Procedure

Additional procedures depend upon knowledge of the
are more general in nature and should be modified
application. There 8l[r$no better troubleshooting tools
the programmer and place it in the RUN mode, then
logic installed by the user. I3e following stqx

or adjusted as necessary to meet your specific
than common sense and experience. First plug in
follow these steps:
1. If the Series One or Series One Plus PC has stopped with some outputs energized or basically in
mid-stream, locate the signal (input, timer, coil, sequencer, etc.) that should cause the next operation
to occur, The programmer will display ON or OFF condition of that signal.
2 . If the signal is an input, compare the programmer state with the LED on the input module. If they
are Merent, replace the input module. If multiple modules in an expansion rack appear to require
replacement, ver@ the I/O cable and its connection before replacing any modules.
3 . If input state and LED on the input module agree, compare the LED status and the input device
(pushbutton, limit switch, etc.). If they are different, measure the voltage at the input module (refer
to Chapter 6 for typical I/O wiring). If the voltage indicates a problem, replace the I/O device, field
wiring, or power source; otbwisc; +ace the input module.
4 . Ifthesignalisacoilwindtoafield~vice,campareitsmatustothe
LEDontheoutputmodule.
If
they arc difSercnt, verify the source of field power to ensure exitation voltage is available. If field
power is not present, examine the power source and its wiring. If tbc pqxr Geld power is
available, but the status is wrong af the W modules output fenninal, repke tht output module or
vcri@thattherackisprovidingthcproperpowcrtotbemodule.
5.
IfthesignslisaooilandeitherthereisM,outputmoduleortheou~ut
is~~8Hhecoilstate,
examinethelogicdrivingtheoutputwithtbeprognrmmerandahardcopyoftheprogram.
proceeding fhm tight towards
le& locate first contact that is not passing power that is otherwise
.
availabletoitfkomW
left. Troubleshootthatsignalperstcps2and
3aboveifitisan
input, or 4 4 5 if it is a coil. EnSVnr:&.S Master Control Relays arc not tikting operation of the
logic.
m
73
Maintenance
6. If the signal is a timer that has stopped at a value below 9999, other &MIIoooo, replace the CPU
module.
7. If the signal is the control over a counter, examine the logic controlling
count signal. Follow steps 2 through S above.
the reset first and then the
Replacement of Components
The following proceduzs provide details on proctdms
Series One or Series One Plus PC system.
to be followed when replacing components of a
Replacing a Rack
1. Tum OFF power and reTnove the programmer (if installed).
2 . Remove the plastic cover and disconnect power wiring from the terminal board on the lower right
side of the rack.
.-
3 . Remove all I/O modules. YO wiring does not have to be disturbed if setice
during
the original
installation.
loop was provided

of each module in the rack for proper
Note the position
reinstallation.
4 . Remove CPU module (if installed) and any filler modules.
Place them aside in a safe location for
later reinstallaxion.
S. Remove bottom two bolts holding the rack in place.
Loosen but do not remove the top bolts.
6 . Slide base unit up and then pull forward to clear the top mounting
bolts. Set the rack aside.
7 . Reinstall the new rack onto the top mounting bolts.

8 . Insert bottom bolts and tighten all four mounting bolts.
9 . Install the m
Placinga module
modules in the same slots from which they were removed.
in the
wrong
slot m cause incorrect and dangerous operation of the control system.
10. Install the CPU and any filler modules that were removed.
11. Reconnect power wiring to the terminals on the right
side of the rack. Reinstall the plastic cover
over the power terminals.

check aperation of the entire
12* Verify proper power wiring and then tum power ON. Carely
~~toenrmrethatall~modulesartinthcirpraperlocationsand~programisnotaltertd.
Replacing a CPU Module

1 Turn OFF power and move
l
2 . S+=z
the programmer (if installed).
the CPU nmdule ait the front, top and bottom to rtleast securing t&s.
3 Pull the module tight

l
4 a If PROM mmv
out dram its slot.
had been installed in the CPU, szmove the PROM and &tall
& h &e new CPU.
Maintenance
GEL90842
5 . Insert the new CPU module by firstaligning the printed circuit boards into the bottom board guide.
6 Rotate the module upwards slightly to engage the top board guide.
l
7 . Push the CPU module into the rack until both tabs snap into place.
8 . Reinstall the programmer and reapply power.
9 . Reload the program from tape recorded after initial system programming. Check operation of entire
system.
Replacing l/O Modules

1. Tum OFF power from both the rack and the UO system.
2 . Remove the plastic cover from over the temkals
on the I/O module to be replaced.

wiring on the defective module needs to be removed.
*-
Only field
3 . Disconnect field wiring from I/O teminals, detach the removable connector, or remove the connector to the I/O Interface cable, as applicable according to the type of module. Lzibel each wire or
nott installed wire marking for future reconnection.
4 . Squeezethe I/O module at the fkont, top and bottom to release securing
tabs.
5 . Pull the I/O module straight out.
6 . Insert the new I/O module, aligning printed circuit boards fint into the bottom board guide.
7
Rotate the module slightly upwards to engage the top board guide.
8 . Push the module into the rack until both tabs snap into place.
9. Reconnectall field wiring, replace the removable
connector board or n=pplace the connector,
then
xcplace the plastic cover.
10. Reapply power to the CPU, then to the I/O system. Check operation of the system, especially the
UO module that was replaced.
Replacing the Battery
If the CMOS memory back-up battery requires replacement, s&r to the following procedures. Figure
7.2 shows the battery location on the CPU, location of the battery connector and the bmry tie-down
=4=
75
Maintenance
a40289
Figure 7-2. Battery Location and Connection

.-
1. Remove the CPU following the previous instructions.

2 . Cut the plastic tie down straps that secure the battery to the board.
3 Disconnect the battery. There is sufficient capacitance in the system to retain the CMOS memory
contents even without the battery for about 20 minutes.
l
WARNING
The lithium battery sbould be handled with care. DO NOT discard tbe battery iu fire. DO
NOT attempt to recharge the battery. DO NOT short the battery. If these precautions are
not followed, the battery may burst, bum or release hazardous materials.
4 . Connect the new battery (catalog no. IC610ACC150)
and place it in its proper position on the
printed circuit board.

5 . Secure with new tie downs or insulated wire.
6 . Reinstall the CPU module.
7 . Verify that the BATI light is OFF.
If necessary, reload the CPU from a tape m&e afkr initial

system pro gramming. Then, check operation of the entire system.
8 . Iftht~oprintedcircuitboardsthatmakeupthtcPUarcseparated,ensuItthattheyare
~~onnccted, installed in a rack, and power4 up. Otherwise, logic may lock into a high current
drainmodeandp remauely drain the battezy.
Adding Memory
The following procedure should be followed when adding memory to a Series One 0~ Series One Plus
PC. Either CMOS IUiM memory can be added to increase mory
capacity fnnn 700 words to 1724
words or non-volatile PROM memory can be installed that contaim a pmgmm previously entered into
the PROM.
76
Maintenance
I,
a40290
Figure T3. Location of Extra Memory Socket

.-
1. Before installing additional memory, it is recommended that any prow

currently in memory be
horded
on tape. If this is not done, the program will be lost after memory is added and a Clear All
Memory operation
is performed.
2 . Remove the CPU following previous instructions.

3 . hate
spare memory socket at the rear of the larger printed circuit board
in the CPU.
4 . Obtain the required memory IC either type 6116LP for Series One or 6264LP-15 for a Series One
Plus, 2K x 8 bit CMOS RAM: (or equivalent).
If adding PROM memory, obtain an Intel type
2732A-2 for Series One or a 27256-25 for a Series One Plus (or equivalent PROMS). Ensure that
the CMOS RAM or PROM is correct for your PC.
When handling CMOS memory 10, aiways handle by the case and not leads. Static
electricity on leads can damage internal circuits, This damage may not be apparent for
several days or weeks of operation.
5 . Orient the IC so that the notch at one end matches the notch in the memory
socket.
6 . For clearance when insMing memory ICs, it may be necessary to lift the smaller printed circuit
board l/8 (3mm). Do not separate the boards. After the mcmoxy IC is instab& reseat the smaller
board,
1 . Insert the IC intothe socket casefblly and evenly so as not to bend any leads. Visually inspect to
cnsurethatallleadsateinplaceandthenpushdowntofirmlyscattheIC.
Ifa6assary,rcadjustthe
jumpers and/or switch 2 as shown in table 3.2.
8 . IfthetwoprintedcircuitboardsthatmakeuptheCPUarescparated
ensurethattheyare
reconnect& installed in a base unit, and powed up. Othcwisc, logic may lock into a high cuxzent
&ainmodeanciprcuWwelydrain
thebaitte~.
9 . Reinstall the CPU module following pwious
instructions.
Maintenance
10. Power-up the CPU, place the mode switch in the PRG position and perform a Clear All Memory
operation (CLRSHF348DE~.
The entire memory will now be entirely clear of data. Any
pqram
previously recorded on tape can now be loaded into the CPU from tqe or a new program
can be entered.
Spare Parts and Components

To support the Series One or Series One Plus PC, an Accessory Kit is available (ICalOACC120). This
kit includes commonly needed components that may get damaged or lost in the normal course of
operation. For a complete list of accessories for the Series One Family of programmable controllers,
refer to GEP-762. Rather than axtempting to place ord?rs for plastic covers, fuses, audio cables, screws,
etc., this kit can be ordered and provides sufficient material to support 3-5 CPUs depending upon their
I/O count. Included in the kit arxzthe following items:
I
ITEM
ITEM
QW@
Cable, Frogrammer to Tape Rccder

Cable, Programmer to Peripheral
1
1
cover,cPucoM!eaor
Cover (large), DCU, PROM Writer,

Rinter Interface
Cover (small), DCXJ, PROM Writer,
Printer Interface
Cover, I/O Termid
Cover, Power Supply Terminal
Cover, Rack Dust
Fuses, 1A SB
Fuses, 2A SB
Fuses, 2A SB (Spiral Ekmcnt)

Fuses, 3A FB
Fuses,3A
SB
Rises, 4A SB
Fuses, SA FB
Fuses, 1OA SB
Key, Hand-Held Programmer
Screws, PH (M3x5)
Screws, PH @43x7)
Screws, PH @43x16)
Spacer
1
4
2
1
5
3
QW*
3
5
5
3
3
5
1
10
10
10
3
When supporting a Series One or Series One Plus installation, it is recommended that spare modules be
available on site. These are in addition to the Accessory Kit previously discussed. As a guide to your
requirements, the following percentages are presented. As a minimum, one each of all modules is
recommended. Depending upon a number of application related conditions (location, average weekly
hours of qxration, cost of downtime, etc.) more units may be justified.
I
Base with Power Sqply
CPLJS
Inpat
b!bdn@
outplt
~~
Rw==-
(=b
Cd
cables
Puipbual Devias
type)
type)
96 SPARES
15
15
10
1s
10
10
10
Maintenance
GEIC-90842
a40022
Figure 74. Accessory Kit for Series One/One Plus
Fuse
List
Table 7.1 is a list of fuses used in Series One I/O modules.
Table 7-l. I/O Module Fuse List

I/O MODULE
CATALOG
NUMBER
CURRENT
RATING (AMPS)
CIRCUIT
CONNECTION
QU-
TYPE OF FUSE
IC61OMDL103
ICdlOMDLlO4
IC61OMDLllS
3 Amps
10 Amps
3 Amps
1
1
2
sokieIed
-clip
fuseclips
picofb
miniame sb
rninhm sb
IC61OMDLlSl
IC61OMDL153
lC61OMDLl54
3 Amps
5 Amps
.5 Amps
2
4
4
sokkzed
filseclips
filscclips
pica
SIiniahlrefb
miniahuefb
IC61OMDL155
IC6lOMDL156
IC6lOMDL157
3 Amps
3 Amps
3Amps
5 Amps
5-s
3Amps
10 Amps
5Amps
2 Amps
5 Amps
2
4
2
sol&d
Soldered
pi=)
pim
SddCred
tic0
2
2
4
2
1
2
sol&led
soldered
pi=
pico!b
lxkimrefb
miniature sb
nkiame sb
IC6lOMDL158
IC61OMDLl75
IC61OMDL176
Ic61oMDLl8o
IC61OMDLl81
mslOMDLl82
IC61OhJDLl85
f=clips
fuscclips
fuse clip
fiase dip
sohked
NW
Chapter
810
Applications
GEK-90842
Application
1 - One-Shots
This application is particularly useful when applied with a Series One PC, since with a Series One Plus
PC, a one-shot can be programmed simply by entering the key sequence SET OUT RESET. In many
applications, a signal is required that is valid for a very short time period. These signals are called
one-shots and are generated by transitions (OFF to ON, or ON to 0%) of a control signal. They are
valid for exactly one scan, which is the shortest signal available within the Series One and Series One
Plus PCs. Timing for typical One-Shots is as follows:
Figure 8-l. Typical OnemSbotTiming

In this example, input 01 is the control signal and coil 160 the resulting one shot.
one-shots
IAgic for these
is shown below.
pc-$1m-0041
Fiie
02
8-2. Typicd OneSbot Logic
9::
m
82
Appkations
%
CEIL-90842
Application 2 - Flip Flop

This logic rwerses states (ON/OFF/ON/OFF, etc.) each time a control signal is energizd.
In this
example, the Flip/Flop changes state on the OFF to ON transition of the control signal. A typical timing
diagram is as follows:
pc-sl-83-0042
)9vI
-II
-1
*1
*2
13
Figure 8-3. Typical Flip-FIop Timing Diagram

In the following typical logic, input 01 is the control signal and output 20 is the flip/flop.
pc-sl-83-0043
01
161
160
01
161
160
20
162
Figure 84. Typical FliplFlop Logic
83D
Applications
GEK-90842
Application
3 - Event/Time Drum
Many control requirements can be defined as a sequence of established sttttcs for each output. The
decision to shift from one step to another can be based upon time or specific input states. To illustrate
this concept, the following 6 step example is provided. The control on inatig
the step is a
confirmation of both events (for example, input 11) and a time value (for example, timer 601).
step
Input
Time
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
10
11
12
13
14
T600
T601
T602
T603
T604
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
Number
1
2
3
Each step can have Merent output states and more or less control can be implemented
requires. The ladder diagram required to implement this function is as follows:
Fiie
8-5. EvenVIime Drum Logic
as the application
Applications
8-4
GEK-90842
STEPNUMBERI
fx-sl -03-0047
TMR600
06
06
STR
TMR
*--
STEPNUMBER 2
07
t:
STEP NUMBER
342
341
601
7 .o
STR
TMR
mm-
l-W602
08
STR
TMR
-a-
342
602
1 .o
STEPNUWER4
TMR603
343
09
---ISTEP NUMBER
TMR604
----+I
ADVANCE
I t
TMRGO 1
010
STR
TMR
-am
344
604
1 .o
STR
OR
OR
OR
OR
OUT
TMR600
TMRGO 1
TMR602
TMR603
TMR604
345
STR
STR
CNT
w-m
345
17
605
5
DRUM
345
I t
TMR602
343
603
1 .o
344
TMRGOO
STR
TMR
w-a
11
1 I
TMR603
t t
TMR604
11
SEQUENCER
345
1I
17
-----+I
qCNT
605
012
Figure 84. Event/Time Drum Logic (Continued)
Applications
0
GE?wo842
DEWCE NUMBER 1
605
1
1
013
/rJ---
STR
OR
ET
605
4
605
5
20
5
DR(K=ENUMBER2
605
605
605
1
3
4
21
4
DEVICE NUMBER 3
015
STR
605
OR
605
OR
605
iii
605
OUT
016
605
OR
605
Figure 84. Event/Time Drum Logic (Continued)
5.
22
sTR
iiiiT
5
23
Appliu~tions
GEwo842
pc-~1-83-0049
605
DEvcE
NUMBER
24
07
STR
605
OR
606
OR
605
--
&T
31
5
24
11
5
DEVCENUWER6
0l8
STR
-*
605
-OUT
19
04
605
DEVICE NUMBER
26
1
005
019
NUMBER
1
3
5
25
605
OR
605
OUT
DMCE
605
STR
-e
OR
OR
3
605
605
605
605
1
3
5
26
27
a
0
STR
605
OR
605
GiiT
Figure S-5. Event/Time Drum Logic (Continued)
5
27
Applications
GEILW842
Application 4 - Cascaded Counters

If an application requires a counter with presets greater than 9999, multiple cuunkrs c8111be assigned to
that function. Two counters can record values up to 99,999,999 and three up to 999,999,999,!399 etc.
Additional logic is incorporated to generate a reset signal at 10,000 counts instead of the normal 9999.
The following logic uses two counters to record up to 99,999,599 events. Counter 601 records the low
order values (thousands, hundreds, tens, and units) and counter 602 the high order values (tens of
millions, millions, hundreds of thousands, tens of thousands).
pc-sl -83-0050
cAscADEDcouNlERs
WE SHOT
mm
01
01
STR
AND NOT
OUT
Do
340
341
t+
02
02
D0-
ST-R
OUT
I+
=Sf
COUNTER bJ CHAti (O-1D()OO)
03
AND NOT
SfR CNT
OR
CNT
341
342
601
01
601
9999
EXTENDS CNT 601 BY ONE COUNT

342
341
601
342
isS
0+
STR
SEcohm COUNTER IN CHAIN (1 o,ooo-99,990,ooo)

342
602
&502
0
it
01
I t
Figure
8-6. Sample Cascaded
342
602
01
602
9999
88
Applications
GEL90842
Application 5 - Coil 374, Power-Up One-Shot

In industry, power loss to machines and process equipment is a fkquent event. When such an event
occurs it creates havoc with automatically controlled equipment and processes. The moment power
retums it may be desirable to place the machine or process in a hold state until verifktion
or critical
limits, position of moving parts, and support quipment interfaces a conkned to be correct by
authori& personnel.
The Series One and Series One Plus PCs have a special function reference (internal coil 374) that
provides a pulse during the first scan only after powering up the CPU (or going from program to run
mode). Using this pulse in the ladder logic, as shown below, will place the machine or process in the
desired hold state.
.-
The instant power returns to an automatic machine or process, certain phases (for instance, activating a
cylinder, starting a motor etc.) of the automatic cycle need to be inhibited until a correct state is
determined allowing the continuation of the cycle. The following program scheme will inhibit those
critical outputs from activating field devices until a reset pushbutton is depressed, thereby, releasing all
inhibited outputs and allowing the cycle to continue.
0I
02
IO
ttHt
0
I2
04
20
340
kt,
200
-
CYLINDER
EXTfnD
A
130
340
IY
250
RUN
CDNlv:ovoe
Figure 8m7. Typical Machine or Process Power4Jp Inhibit Logic

Tht pro&ram logic in the above fim is an example you csn use to inhibit certain phases of a cycle. In
this example, when power rctums to the process, 374 will be on during the fixst scan of the CPU,
latching coil 340 on. Ihe referenced NC contact of coil 340 is plaid in series with the logic that
actuates output coils 200 and 250. Even if the program logic is calling far coils 200 and 250 to turn on,
theywillnotuntil34Oisunl8&&
The mly way to unlatch 340 is to &press tbc reset pushbutton
(MO), allowing outputs 200 and 250 to be tumed on.
890
Applications
Application
6 - Coil 375, 1OHz Clock
The Series One and Series One Plus PCs have a special function refkrencc that cantinuously provides a
pulse every tenth of a second. The following t\wo examples use the function of this reference (10 Hz
Internal Coil 375) to create a cumulative timer and a time of day clock.
Example 1: - Cumulative Timer

In this example, when reference 01 is on, time (in tenths of a second) would be accumulated by counter
600. If the time to be measured is anticipated to be larger than 999.9 seconds, cascading another counter
will increase the range to 9,999,999.9 seconds. This technique allows you to meas= the duration of
an intermittent
event that would otherwise reset the standard timer when changing state.
STR
AND
STR
CNT
01
375
02
600
9999
FTligure8-8. Cumulative Timer

Example 2: - Time of Day CIock
In this example, the 1OHZ clock (Internal Coil 375) is used to program a time of day clock with reset
capabilities. This is a 24-hour time clock, with the time format being xX:W, where Xx = hours
(O-23) and W = minutes (O-59). The 1OHZ clock providts the 0.1 second pulse to counter 603 which in
turn produoes one pulse every second. The mminin gthmecounters,600,601and602kuptrackof
seconds, minutes and hours that have elapsed. If power goes off and the clock needs rcsetig, the
combined use of a 3 position switch and a pushbutton, as shown in Figure 8.10, will allow you to set the
comet time. The lower portion of Figure 8.10 is the ladder logic which ~sets the clock. An VO
Simulator module, IC61OMDLl24, could also be used and programmed to reset the clock).
a40509
02
02
603
-ICUT SECONDS
I
so
-i
CUT
m CUT603
ml6Q
STR CWT600
cwr 600
co
CM1600
03
5rR CUT 600

OF?161
ND MDT I60
STR CWT 601
CUT 601
60
ST'R CNT 602

kc
24
CNT 602
24
Figure 8-9. Sample 24 Hour Time Clock Logic
Applications
8-11
a40557
THREE
POSITION
SELECTOR
SWITCH
PWWTTON
*DENOTES Ix)REFERENCE
05
LADDER LOGIC
01
f604
' 2HZ CLOCK
1604
05
STR 01
AnO NOT T604
Figure 8-10. Time Clock Resetting

To met
the
time,use
the following procedure.
1. Select hours, minutes or seconds with the 3 position selector switch.

2. Monitor the appropriate counter.
CNT 600:
CNT 601:
CNT 602:
Keystroke
3.Depressthechan
Seconds
Minutes
Hours
sequence is SHF, 6xX, MON
ge btt
u on until the pmper value (time) is displayed on the programmer.
8-12
Applications
GEK-w2
Application 7 - Start/Stop Circuit

A simple but informative application for the Fast Response module is the Start/Stop circuit. In this
example, Output 4 is in the Fast Response mode and is controlled by Inputs 0 and NO. 1. The timing
diagram shows worst case response times.
X4lNFASfRESPWSEICIK)(N
Figure 8-11. Fast Response Start/Stop Logic

I/O REFERENCE
00
01
04
05
200
D-ON
Enablcoutput,X4ihhstrtsponsemode
Disable output X4 in fhst Itspotse mode

ou~X4tiedtofielddevi~beingco~lled
Mode
z&ct for aaput x4

DISABLED: msnualmode
ENABLED: fhstqxmscmodc
DummycaucttoputoutputX4infbstrcsponscmode
pc-sl -84-0019
Figure 8d2. Worst Case Thing
Diagram
.
Applications
843
Application 8 - High Speed Counter Applications

Threegeneral types of application examples will be covered within &is applica2ion.
1. Programmable
2.
Cut
CAM Switch
to Length
3. Measurement
of length
In the development of these applications the following
system configuration
will be used.
pc-sl -04-0010
l/o
vo
vo
CW
SERES ONE
POHIfR
SUPPLY
CA
Fiiiiiire843. Application System
Apptications
8-14
Programma ble Cam Switch

The basic concept behind a CAhd switch is to enable/disable certain devices at various points in the
cycle of a machine. Using one or more high speed counters this type of control can easily be
implemented. The following example illustrates this, cycling the high speed coulltcfs two outputs at
difkent preset values. The timing diagram below shows the output logic, with the user program
necessaq to implement this logic shown on the following pages. This example assumes that the
encoder is resetting the counter once per revolution, and that the machine will not travel f&m one
transition point to the next in less than twice the scan time.
a40023
150
CURRENT COUNT
PROCESS STAGE
1 FIRST [SECOND 1 THIRD IFOURTH 1 FlFTH 1
SHIFT REGISTER
STAGE
1 400
OUTPUT NO.1
OUTPUT NO.2
Figure 8-14. Programmable
50
401
250
I 402
1 403
325
1 404
360
I
]
CAM Switch Logic Timiq
Diagram
a40893
Figure 8-15. Programmable
CAM Switch
Applications
8-15
0
6
cit
I
165
00
01
07
162
SR
162
Figure 8-15 Programmable CAM Switch (Continued)
SHlF7 REGISTER THAT

WERMINES
STAGE
OF SEOUENCER
846
Applications
GEK-90842
a40893
400
08 i +Ht
162
SO
WlPUT
NO 1 NOT INVERTED
OUTPUT No
1 IN COUNTER MODE
OUTPUT NO 2 DISABLED
~TPUT
64
0
9
NO. 2 M MANUAL MODE
SECONDSTAGE
(
--i
CURRENT COUNT < PRESET

MTWUY
CNflOl
150
4
i
100
OuTptn
NO. I INVERTED
103
OUTPUT NO. 2 IN COUNTER MODE
Figure 8-15 Programmable CAM Switch (Continued)
Applications
GE&=42
With this type of control application the object is to generate a pulse output every X numkr of counts.
In cut to length applications X rcpments the length of material to be cut in pulses from the encoder.
The following example pulses output No. 1 of the High Speed Counter once evczy 100 counts. The
figurebelow shows the logic diagram for output No. 1, while the next figure contains the wiring diagram
for this type of application, followed by the associated ladder logic.
a40894
OUTPUT NO. 1
CURRENT COUNT
100
200
300
400...
Figure 846. Output No. 1 Logic Diagram
WSHSPEEDCOUNTER
MOOULE
8
USER LOAD
OUTPUTNO
A+
5-24VDC
USER
SUPPLIED
Y
-
RESET
COUNTER
DECREMENT
COWTER
DECREMENT
PULSE
-1
COUNTER
+lZvDc f 1Ol
USER SlJPfUED
Figure 8-17. Wiring Diagram
Applications
GEK-90842
a40005
ONE SHOTTO WITE
PRESETTOHsc
OUTPU?NO.1IN COUNTER
MODEOf OPfRATION
Figure 8-18. Cut to Length Program

.-
In measuring the length of moving objects, the leading and trailing edge of the object enables and
disables the counter which is tied to the encoder. At this point the accumulate value of the counter
repments
the length of the object. Unfortunately the accumulate value of the High Speed Counter
cannot be moved into the user logic of a Series One or Series One Plus PC. Thus an objects length can
only be measured relative (> = <) to a preset value in the counter. Through the use of a shift register and
multiple presets, the length can be approximated to within two successive presets. To determine the
accuracy a moving objects length can be measured. Three parameters must be considered:
1. Velocity of Object (pulses/second)

2. Resolution of Encoder (inches/pulse)
3. Scan time of the Series One or Series One Plus CPU (seconds) These three factors combine in the
following manner to determine the accuracy of measurement.
Accuracy of Measurement = R INCH V PULSE 1.1s~ (sex)
PLJLSE
SEC
Applications
849
GEwo842
Sample Calculation
Given:
1. 0.1 inches/pulse
2. 60 RPM, assume 1 pulse/degree
= 360 pulses/second
3. Scan time 20 msec

PULSE
SEC
The user logic as shown would implement

I/O Definition: Ill
- Photoelectric
this type of measmment
giving a resolution
of 10 counts.
cell which enables counter 110 - Manual Reset/initialize

a40895
01
02
03
04
0s
F&we 8-19. Measuring a Random
Appikations
8-20
a40895
0a
0
7
0a
010
0
11
12
n
0
0
la
CWlW
00
on
Fiire
101
10
wrrmunkV*uIETOmc
8-19 Measuring a Random Length(Continued)

a40895
Fiiiiiire 8-19 Mtssuring a Random Length(Continued)
Applications
8-21
GEK-90842
a40895
0
21
0
22
022
Figure 849 Measuring a Random Length(Continued)

a40895
Applications
8-22
Application 9 - Typical Shift Registers

When applying controls to a conveyor system or indexing machine, consideration must be given to the
object being assembled, since it invariably has discrete information (pass, fail, etc.) ~sociated with it.
Each time that the object is advanced in the assembly process, its discrete information must follow it.
The shift rqister fiuxztion provides this control within the Series One and Series One Plus PCs.
Referring
Number
the pass
and one
to the following example, the objects undergo a mechanical and visual inqxction at stations
1 and 3. If either inspection fails, the object is rejected at station Number 5. In order to track
or fail status of each object, two shift registers are required, one for the mechanical inspection
for the visual inspection.
pc-s l-83-0044
Fire
8-20. Shift Register Example
In this example, I/O and shift register references
are assigned as follows:

OUTPUTS
INPUTS
00
Advance belt, shift
01
lttkhmiealinspection
O-PI-fail
02
visual isa!gmim
Q-P03
II-fail
ReaeebiftRcgista
signal
20
Reject Arm
o-off
l-On
Applications
Shift
8.23
Register References
in mechanical inspection
shift register.
400
First Mixcnce
401
Secondreference
in medumical
402
Third
403
Fourth reference in mechanical inpaion
410
First Itaaxe
411
second rtfezace
inspection
shift register.
reference
in mechanical impection
shift
register.
shift register
in visual inspection shift rqiskr.

in visual hspection shift register.
Typical logic using these refemxes
is shown in the following
ladder diagram.
pc-s f-83-0045
00
161
1eo
00
161
01
160
2
403
Figure 8-21. Typical Shift Register Logic
Appendix A
Introduction
Several manuals are available that complement this manual. These manuals provide information
rqukd
to fully implement certain featwrts and options available for use witi a Series One or One Plus
programmable controller system. A basic description of the content of these manuals is provided in this
apPendix. The following manuals are available and along with this manual, constitute a complete set of
documentation for a Series One or Series One Plus PC system.
_-
GEK-90477
GEIWOS07
GEK-90825
GEK-90846
GEK-96632
GFK-0075
Series OneData Communications Manual

Remote IjO Users Manual
Series Six PC I/O Link Local Module Users Manual
Portable Programmer Users manual
Logicmaster 1 Programmer Documentor Manual
Logicmaster 1 Family Pro gramming and Documentation Software
GEK-90477 Series One/Three Data Communications Manual

This manual provides information necessary to implement a serial communications link between a
Series Six or Series Six Plus programmable controller (PC) or host computer and a Series One, Series
One Plus, Series One Junior, or Series Three PC.
You should become familiar with the operation of the Series One, Series One Plus, Series One Junior,
or Series Three PC (depending on your application) before reading this manual. Also, if a Series Six or
Series Six Plus PC is to be included in your communications link, you may wish to refer to the Series
Six Data Communications Manual, GEK-25364, for relevant infoxmation.
Chapter 1, Introduction, describes the capabilities of the Data Communications Unit (DCU) and the
Data Communi cations Module (DCM) and possible system configurations of Series One, Series One
Plus, Series Ont Junior, and Series Thret PCs with a Series Six or Series Six Plus PC or host computer.
Chapter 2, Installation and Operation of the Data Communications Unit for the Series One, Series
One Plus, and Series One Junior PCs, bcribes

interfaces and the installation of the DCU.
the operation of the Data Communication Units user
Chapter 3, In&al&ion d
operation of the Data Communications Module for the Series Three
PC, dcscribts the operaticwlt
of tk Data Communication Modules user interfaces and the installation of
the DCM.
Chapter
4, Ektrical
Interface Circuits, provides the information needed to constnzt
c0nneCttheDCUorDCMto~rdtviccs.
cables to
Chapter 5, Communications Examples, explains how to build the Series Six ladder diagram to initiate
corrnnunications between a Series Six or Series Six Plus PC md a Series One, Series oht Plus, Series
One Junior, or Series Thp#: PC.
Chpter 6, Serial Interface Pro-l,

provides complete &kcncc inform&on on DCU and DCM
serial interface pc01
and thing
to allow the user to write a serial communications driver for a host
computer or micimpmcessor.
Am2
GEK-90507 Remote I/O Users Manual

This manual provides information needed to implement a Remote &/Osystem llrcinp the I/O of Series
One and Series Three PCs.
Chapter 1, Introduction to Remote I/O, is a general description of the
Series Three PCs.
capabilities
of
Chapter 2, Installation and wiring of the Ii0 Link modules,

installation, wiring, and fault detection.
discxsscs the hardware used,
Series One and
Chapter 3, Configuring a Remote I/O system for the Series One PC, dcscrilxs how to design and
implement a Series One Remote I/O system.
Chapter 4, Configuring a Remote I/O system for the Series Three PC, describes how to design and
implement a Series Three Remote I/O system.
Chapter 5, Configuring Mixed Remote I/O systems,destibes how to design and implement a mixed
(Series One and Series Threz) Remote I/O system.
Chapter 6, Timing Considerations, explains how to determine the timing delays in the Remote UO
SUUctLlX.
Appendix A, Power Supply Loading, lists the power
modules used in Series One and Series Three PCs.
characteristics of the power supplies and
Appendix B, Design Worksheets, contains handy worksheets for designing Remote I/O systems.
GEK-90825 Series Six PC I/O Link Local Module Users Manual

This manual describes the link between the Series Six family of programmable controllers and the I/O
structure for the Series One and Series Three programmable controllen.
&is link is established
between the Series Six I/O Link Local module and the Series One family and Series Three I/O IArk
Remote modules.
chapter
~vervicw
1, co~eding
the Series Six PC to the Series One or Series Three I/O system, is an
of the system con&uration and operation.
Chapter 2, Series Six PC I/O Link Iacal Module and Programming, ex@ains how to install and
optfate the Merits six I/O Link Local module and how to pgram the Series Six CPU for &JOLink
bcal operations.
Chapter 3, Series One PC I/O Link Remote ModuI~xplains
_
the installation and operation of the
Chapter 4, Series lluee PC I/O Link Remote Moduk,cxplains

Series Ibcc PC J/D I&k Remote module.
the installatbn and cpration
Series One PC I/O Link Remote module.
of the
Chapter 5, Cable Wii,

describes cable wiring between the Series
and~series~orseritsThretPCyOLinkRemottmodule.
A, B, and C, provide application infoxmazion on sttting up an uwmple m
usingthcI/ochainstanlsbytc.
Appendices
chin and
GEK4O846PortabIe Programmer Users Manual

Tht purpost Of this manual is to providt tioRnaion on the functions and feahuts of the Portable
RogrammerandtoiWnxttbeuserinbAling,
programming, and impl~hg
the Portable
Programmer
A-3
with the Series One programmable
controller family and the Series Three pgrammable
conuoller.
This manual contains nine chapttrs and six appendices.
locating required infozmation.
Each chapter contains scctioIIs to aid the user in
Chapter 1, Product Summary, presents a product overview and describes the operating modes.
Chapter 2, Operation, explains the installation and operation of the portable Programmer.
Chap&r
39 introduction
to Programming,
provides
general information
Chapter 4, Definition and Entry of Inst~~tiom,explains

instruction
on pmgramming.
how to start a new program and contains the
sets.
Chapter 5, Edit Program, provides instructions
for entering the Edit mode and editing functions.
Chapter 6, Display Program, provides the user with the information
for displaying
a ladder logic
program*
*-
Chaptei 7, On-Line Monitor/Change, covers the On-Line Monitor

available for the Series One Plus and Series Three PCs.
and On-Line Change functions
Chapter 8, Communications, explains how programs may be stored on cassette tapes or transferred to
the PCs.
Chapter 9, Print, covers the
print
options and fitnctions.
Appendix A, Series One PC Serial Interface Setup, covers tie Data Communicatioris
Unit and the
CPU serial cable.
Appendix B, Series Three PC Serial Interface Setup,contains inforrnaxion needed for connecting
Series Three PC with the Portable
Programmer.
Appendix C, Port Definition, describes the CPU serial port and the printer port.
Appendix D, Compatible Printers, contains the necessary information to implement and specifications
for selection of compatible
Appendix E,
printers.
Series One Plus PC Password, contains instnxtions for password operation.
Appendix F, Portable Programmer Case, illustrates
optional carrying case for the Portable
Programmer.
GEK-96662 Logicmaster 1 Programmer Documentor Manual

This manual presents the information necessary to use the Workznasttr industrial computer with the
bgicmastcr 1 a@kation sofbwarc to program a Series One PC. The i~Sormation cuntain& in this
manual conesponds to version 02.01 oft& Logicmaster 1 Programming and -on
Sofiware.
Chapter 1, Introduction, hoduccs

how to load and copy it.
the wpabilitics of the Lugkmaster 1 softwazc and also explains
Chapter & WOdcHUbSW OperotiOn US& LOgi-r

1 SOftWW+c@ains basic operation of the
Wow
industrial computer when using Logicmastu 1 sofkw8rc. Sections a included on the
kybozud, display format, and kcyswitch positions fa the Wozkmastcrcomputer and Series One PC.
Chapter 3, programming tbe kies
he
PC, explains how to enter pro-g
One PC through the Edit Program function.
logic for the Series
A-4
4, Advanced bogramming Functions, ex@iins how to annotate Series One programs and
how to use the Teach function to make programming on the Wo&naster computer easier.
chapter
Chapter 5, Logicmaster 1 System Functions, explains how to use the match pad, print programs,
upload and download pmgmms, and use the filing programs.
Appendix A, Menu Tree for Logicmaster 1 Sofbvare, provides a map to the function keys throughout
the hgicmaster 1 software.
Appendix B, Port Characteristics and Wiring Diagrams, provides the information needed to connect
the Workmaster
computer to the Series One PC or peripherals
such as an extemal disk drive or printer.
GFK4075 Logicmaster 1 Family Programming and Documentation Software

Users Manual
_-
This manual provides the information necessary to use the Workmaster@ and Cimstar PM industrial
computers with Logicmaster 1 Family application software to program the Series One Model E, Series
One Plus, and Series One Plus 3.7K Programmable Controllers. The content of this manual is arranged
similarly to GEK-96662, as described above.
Appendix B
Glossary of Terms
Address
- A series of numbers from 0 to 1723 in the Series One and Series One Plus Programmable
Controllers, assigned to specific program memory locations and used to ;OLCCCSS
those locations.
AND - (Logical) A mathematical operation between bits, whereby all bits must be a 1 in order for the
resulttobeal.
AND - (Function) An operation that places two contacts or groups of contacts in series. Both control the
resultant statLis.
BCD (Binary Coded Decimal) - A 4-bit system in which individual decimal digits (0 through 9) a~
represented by 4-bit binary numerals; for example, the number 43 is represented by OlOO(4)
0011(3) in the BCD notion.
_-
Bit - The smallest unit of memory. Can be used to store only one piece of information having more than
one state (for example, a one/zero, ON/OFF, good/bad, yes/ho, etc). Data that rquires more
than two states (e.g. numerical values 000-999) will require multiple bits.
Byte - A me asurement of memory, in the Series One and Series One Plus, equal to 8 bits.
CMOS - Acronym for Complimentary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor. A rea&rite
a battery to retain its content upon loss of power.
memory that requires
CPU (Central Processing Unit) - The central device or controller that interprets user instructions,
makes decisions and executes the functions based on a stored program. This program specifies
actions to be taken to all possible inputs.
counter - A function within the PC that records events based upon the on/off -ition
of a signal. A
coil associated with the counter is energized at a user determined preset value.
Field Devices - User supplied devices typically providing information to the PC (Inputs: pushbutton,
limitswitches, relay contacts, etc.) or performing PC tasks (Outputs: motor starters, solenoids,
indicator lights, etc.).
Group - A series of eight consecutive references, such as I/O points, internal coils, etc.
Inputs - A signal, typically ON or OFF, that provides information to the PC.
Instruction - A word, usually an acronym, or group of words and numerals that are part of a program
entered into user memory.
I/O (Input/Output) - That portion of the PC to which field devices arc connwtcd. Isolates the CPU
hm
ehrkal
noise.
I/O Scan - A method by which the CPU monitors all inputs and controls all outputs within a prescribed
time.
K - An abbreviation for kilo or exactly 1024 in the world of computers. Usually r&ted to 1024 words of
memory.
Ladder Diagram - A representation of co-1

logic relay systems. The user programmed logic is
expressed in relay equivalent symbology.
Latch - A PC operation thawcauses a coil to stay on and remain on even if power or the input is
removed. Referred to as a mmtive function.
B20
Glossary of Terms
Logic - A fixed set of responses (outputs) to various external conditions (inputs). Au possible situations
for both synchronous and non-synchronous activity must be specified by the us~f. Also referred
to as the program.
Memory - a physical place to store Formation
such as programs and/or data.
Microsecond (II& - One millionth of a second. 1 x lO=6 or O.OOOOO1second.

Milkcond
(mu) - One thousandth of a second.
1 x lo,-3 or 0.001 second.
Modules - A replaceable electronic subassembly usually plugged in and secured in place but easily
removable in case of fault or system redesign.
Noise - Undesirable electrical disturbances to normal signals generally of high frequency content.
Non-Retentive Coil - A coil that will tum off when power i,s mnoved.
Optical Isolation - Use of a solid state device to isolate the user input and output devices from internal
circuitry of an UO module and the CPU.
OR - (Lcgical) A mathematical operation between bits, whereby if any bit is a 1, the result will be a 1.
OR - (Function) An operation that places two contacts or groups of contacts in parallel. Either contrh
the resultant status.
Outputs
- A signal typically ON or OFF, originaxing from the PC w&h user supplied power thar controls
external devices based upon commands from the CPU.
PC or PLC - See Programmable Controller.

Peripheral Equipment - Extemal tits ti c8n communicate with a PC; for example, cassette tape
recorder, Printer Interface Unit or PROM Writer Unit.
Preset
- A numerical value specified in a function which establishes a limit for a counter or timer. A
coil will energize when this value is cached.
Program - A sequence of fknctions and/or instructions entered into a Programmable Controller to be

executed by the CPU for the purpose of controlling a machine or process.
Programmable Controller - A solid-state industrial control device which receives inputs fkom user
supplied control devices such as switches and sensors, implements them in a precise pattern
determined by ladder diagram based programs stored in the user memory, and provides outputs
for control of user supplied devices such as relays and motor stators.
Programmer - A device for entry, examination and alteration of the PCs memory including logic and
storage areas.
PROM - Acronym for Programmable Read Only Memory. A type of memory that requires a special
method of loading, but is retentive upon power loss.
RAM - An acronym for Random Access Memory. A solid-~
memory ht &ws i&ivid~al bits to
be stoti and acct~scd. This type of memory is volatile; that is, stow& &a is lost under no
power conditions, therefore a battery backup is rqhd.
Register - A group of wn~r~=t..k

.::e
rmxnory locations within a PC, used for storage of numerical data
RetentiveCoil-AcoilthatwillI#nain
in its last state, even though power has been removed.
Glossary of Terms
B3-
GEK-90842
Rung
A sequence or grouping of PC functions and instructions that control one coil. One or more
rungs form a ladder diagnun.
technique of ex amining or solving all logic steps specified by the ppm
repetitive or&r from the first step to the last.
Scan - The
in a sequential,
Thumbwheel Switch - A rotating numeric switch which can be used for inputting numeric data to a PC.
Unlatch - A PC function that causes an output previously turned on by a latch function to turn off no
rnantf how briefiy the function is enabled.
Word - A measurement of memory, in the Series One and Series One Plus, qud
Write - To output or transfer dam from the PC to a peripheral unit.
to 16 bits.
GEL90842
Appendix C
Guide
Ft!8tUR
-~-~
p Points (maximum)
~=ory
Memory, 700 words CMOS RAM
d to 1724 words
M-ofY*
Memory, Eg;;
37
words CMOS
_-
EPROM, non-vole
v
Bawy Back-Up
Cal San 0.5 K Program:
T lmesl.0 K Ropm:
1.7 K Ropm:
3.7 K Pro-:
htcmal Function6
Non-Retentive coils
RetaWe Cails
Function Coils
S
lme~untcrs
?
lhumbwfiecl htufacc Module
rimcr/Gmnscr Setpint Unit
Shift Registas
Data Regiliters (12)
l
*UencerS
gb Speed Counter
3uibh (2 KHZ)
LK)Module (10 KHz)
-I/DMOdUlCS
mlog I/O Modules
Ided
MO&k6
;notcI)o
$0. of I/O in Remote System
Basic Ladder hag.

Daa opcrrriOll6
and Math
W/Hand-Held Pqpmmer
?!F
I lwRG100
IC61OPRG105
Kand-Held Prog Maant hanbly
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Modd E
Junior
24 Basic Unit
50 w/Exp Unit
%W/Eqaack
112
112
168
stantiard
y= (1)
no
#amid
y= (1)
stan&Td
stadard
IlO
b0
y=
yes (2)
yes 0
yes (2)
Ye6
Y=
Y=
y= (2)
Y=
no
Y=
Yes
y= (7)
Y=
y= (8)
96
no
Y=
Y=
Y=
Yy= (8)
96
DO
20 InSec
4omSec
n/r
n/a
160
96
59
5
20 (44igit)
2OmSec
4UmSec
65 mSec
%
144
112
28
4
64 (4d@)
Y=
Ii0
;:S
1%
dep6
l==P
IlO
IJO
20
(1)
(1~
=p)
64
Ye6
DO
(4, 5, 6)
yes (4.7)
ye6
Ye6
yt6
(9)
26,4Oor72
Ye6
DO
Y=
Ye6
Yes
Y=
no
(1~
step)
8mSec
l2mStc
15 mStc
48
144
112
28
4
64 (qt)
y= (3)
y (3)
128 rtep6
no
64 (loo0 rttp)
Y=
no
Ph6 3.7K
Plus
168
IlO
8mSec
12 mSec
15 mScc
n/a
144
112
28
4
64 (rldigit)
y= (3)
y- (3)
128 rtep6
64 (16bit)
6ulooo
rtep)
y=s (2)
Y=
8mSec
12 mStc
15 mSec
36 mSec
144
112
28
4
64 (4_dieit)
y= (3)
y- (3)
B=PS
64 (l&bit)
64 (loo0 sttp)
Series One Family of Programmable Controllers Compatibility Guide
c2 m
GEK-90842
Futllre
Junior
!+opmn with WokrAM
One=
ModdE
Ph5 3.m
Phu
(1)
Yes
Yes
Ya
Y=
Yes
Y=
Y=s
Ya
Y=
n/a
Y=
130
b0
110
n/a
IlO
n/a
no
s/a
no
Cumputer or IBM Personal

complta
kpJlW&hXDPlXL
*w==
ZPU
1C61KPU101
(UL I&cd)
1C610cPu104
1C61ocIw105
IC61OCPUlO6
Available
assword Ihccticm
Yno
II0
b0
YM
130
no
no
I)0
Y-
no
Y=
Y=
Y=
bCk6
(2x6)
no
Yes
Ye6
Yes
Y=
s-dot, 1C61oCHs110
IC6lOCHSlOl
(2)
ycr(clrplIlsi=)
y=
Yes
Yes
Y-
s-slot, IC61oCHsl11
(5)
Yer(~~)
y=
Y-
Y=
Y-
hla,
IC6loCHs114
(3)
y-mp-w
y-
Yes
Y=
Y-
m-da,
1C6mCHs130
(2)
y=mp--w
y=
Y=
Yes
Yes
lbhx,
IC610CHS134
(3)
yetitjqunsid
y=
Y=
Yf=
Yes
S-Jot,
.-
yes (4)
y= (4)
thl&
Y=s
Y-
no
no
no
unit,
Yes
Y-
Y=
Y=
yes Rev C
Yes
Y=
Yes
Y=
Yes
Rev A & B
yes Rev A & B
yes Rev B
yes Rev B
Y-
19 F&k Mounting Bxackets
ht4lfhlIIlti~CXl6
ZCMlOO
htJi &IXUIlUKliCtiCXlS
ZCM105
RS2321422 AdaptouUnit
Peripbml
printer
yes (4
y= (4)
p (4)
xkvias
Unit
Imdacc
yt6
Rev C
PROM Writer unit
yes Rev A & B
yes Rev A Br B
yes Rev B
yes Rev B
yes Rev C
Tiitusetpoiatunit
Ye*
no
Y=
Y=
Y-
CwetteTape
Ye6
included
Y=
Y=
Y=s
Y=
YW
Y-
Yes
Y-
Recder
Accwwry Kit
1.
2
3.
4.
5.
6.
Futue -crlt
bt@CE
115/23t)
with this pm&la

v
POWCX m.
RequireS2LSV&pQcllnr~.
&cd with l~rlot rack
uLIi*
115v~poovw-~y.
Not expandable
5% to 9!5% (non_
ZWSYeUr
8tolOYem
1ls/230vac
MVdC
See~~cxl8fo?~unitoa&fordct8ils
c3
Table C-l. I/O Module Capability/Compatibility Guide

Fature
Judor
OX&P
Model E
plus 3.m
Input Moddes
KZ61OMDLl.25
115 V IC, 8 circuits
~C61OMDLl27
23OVac,8Circuits
C6lOhmL126
115VrIBda44circuits
:C61oMDLlo1
24VdcSi&8Ci1cuits
C6lOMDL107
~VdcSinkLoad,16Circuits
C61OMDLlO6
24 V dc Sirrk, 16 Circuits
C6lOMDLlll
24 V r/df Source, 8 Cixuits
C6lOMDL112
ZU V &ic Source, 16 Cimaits
[C6lOMDL116
bd0
UtyeS
(1)
~c6lO$lLKs
(UL I&cd)
115 V u hput, 6 &Wit6
Kz61OMDLl75
115/230V ac, 8 Cimaits
DlOMDL176
119230vac~4Cjmaits
c6lOMDLl51
%V&Sink,8Cimits
IC61OMDL156
24VcicSi&16Circuits
KZ6lOMDLl53
24Vdc2ASi&4Grcuits
c6lOMDL154
24Vdc2ASinl&wcc,4Circtits
E61OMDL155
24VdcSowcc,8Cimaits
KXlOMDL158
24V&S-,16M
E6lOMDL166
b!i%$%L*
ut, 8 Circuits
bhY
9
1 (UL I&ted)
E6lOMDLl
SCircuits
&hY
E61OMDLl
T
2
16 Circuits
WY
r61OMDLl
v
5 (UL Iisted)
R&y 0utput, 8 Cimzits
K6lOMDL103
wvdchpu~4h$4Out
K!6lOMDL104
wvdcsinlr:h/Rlyou~4hs/4out
1C610n4DL115
FastRcspacI/Q4In/2out
IcmMDLm
uOSimdrror,8Ingpt~
1CXWTCCJ100
Ic610
==*-tw
LlO5
TInIInm
1c610MDL110
%w=d-t=
hterface
1. R#luirur5orl~dae~mrrk.
ZObt~~hrttrfrncKoDer~
yes (1)
Ye6
yes
Y=
yes
y= (1)
Yes
yes
YU
yes
y= (1)
Yes
yes
Y=s
yes (1)
Yes
Y=
Y-
yes
y= (1)
Y=s
yts
Yes
yes
y= (1)
Yes
Yes
Yes
yes
y- (1)
Yes
Y=S
Yes
yts
yes (1)
Y=S
Yes
Yes
yes
Yes
Ye
Y-
Yes
y+s
Y=
yes
ye6
(1)
Yes
Output ModuAes
yes (1)
Yes
yes
Y=
yes
y- (1)
Y=S
yts
Y=
Y-
yes (1)
Ye6
yes
Y-
yes
y= (1)
Yes
yes
YCS
y= (1)
Y=s
yes
Y=
yes
y= (1)
Yes
yes
Yes
ylts
y= (1)
Y=S
yes
Y=
yes (1)
Yes
yes
Y=
yes
ya (1)
Yes
yes
Y-
yts
y-
(1)
Yes
yes
Y=
yts
ya (1)
Yes
yes
Y=
yes
ya (1)
Ye6
ye6
Y=
yes
yt6
Yes
rcLf
y= (1)
Yes
special Modu)m
)RS
ya (1)
Ye6
ye6
Ya
yes
y= (1)
ye6
F6
ye6
y= (1)
rc6
Y=
Y=
yts
Y= (1)
yes
yes
Y=
PC6
ya (1)
no
(2)
F@ 0)
yt6 (2)
(2)
P@
ye6
II0
ye6
F6
DO
ye6
F6
oerSetpointpnitunbeurtdin~SerierObCP1\1E~natbath.
Y=
F6
(2)
C-4
Table C-2. Summary of Programming References for Series One Family

of Programmable Controllers
Mtmory
Valid Rderemts (Octal)
Typt
-Qorotftg
se&s Oat Junior

w Point6
%tOtAl
15
9
16
10
40
OCKKU6
Basic Unit Inputs

BUiChitQEpUb
IED Expansion unit Inputs
I/o Expamion unit ouqms
Exp8nsioIlRackI/o
017-027
030-047
058-061
03cw67
13@137
160 total
96
59
1
1
1
1
1
155 (m)
20 (4 digit) (1)
1
20 (loo0 =p)
IlltCZdcoilS
14w77
3001372
373
374
375
376
377
Mb372
6cxM23
624
6oM23
NOII-RCtUHiVC
Retmtive
Set Retentive Cc&
First Scan Reset
0.1 Seccmd clock
Diuble Au outputs
Back-Up Batmy Status
Shift Register
Timers and Counters
High speed Counm
stqueact=
se&s
OnilSuits
IntemJ Coils
Nan-Retaative
16@337
34a373
374
375
376
377
4tKu77
Mn-677
axM77
Retaaive Chih
Initial React
0.1 Second Clock
DimHe All outputs
Back-Up Batmy Status
shift Registers
Timcr~tcr6
sequsales oat PI&W
hCXdcoi36
Non-Retentive
Rctaaive Coils
Initial React
0.1 Sacoad Clock
Disabk All autputs
Back-Up Batmy Sums
S@8lhIpOUCOih
shiftRt*m
Ti~~tcrs
z*
112 total
144tmaI
112
28
1
1
1
1
128 #taps
64 (1)
64 (10
=pp)
an157
uc>poinQ
m poinm157
ant Model E
ant Plus 3.7K

168 total
700-767
1-337
34@373
374
375
376
377
8
4#577 (2)
Hs677
-577
(2)
144t0Ul
112
28
1
1
1
1
128 rtcgt
64 (1)
a (lax) -1
64 (l&m)
Table C-3. Programming Function Compatibility Guide
S'TRSTRNOT
AND ANDNOT
0 bR NOT
Sw 3ST
Yes
Yes
Y=S
Y=S
Y=S
Yes
Yes
Y=S
Y=S
OUT
SET OUT
SET OUT RST
OR SIR
MCS. MCR
YZ
Yes
Yes
STRTMR
Y=S
Y=S
Y=S
Yes
yes
Y=S
Yes
Y=S
Y=S
Y=S
yes
Y=S
STRNOTTMR
ANDT!bm
ANDNOTTMR
ORTMR
OR NOTTRM
STRCNT
STRNOTCN'T
ANDCNT
ANDNOTCNT
OR CM
OR NOTCNT
SR
Yes
Y=
Ye6
Y=S
Yy%
Yes
Yes
Y=S
Ye6
Ye6
Y=S
Yes
Ye6
Y=S
Y=S
Y=s
Y=S
Yes
YCS
Y=S
Y=S
Y=S
Y=S
Ye'
Ye6
Y=S
Y=S
Yes
Ye6
Ye6
Ye6
yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Y=
Yes
Y=S
Y=S
Yes
Yes
Y=S
Yes
Yes
Ye=
Y=S
Yes
Y=
Y=S
Y=S
Ye6
YY=
Y=
110
Y=S
Y=
Yes
Yes
Y=
YY=S
Y=
YY=
Y=
Y=
Y=S
Y=S
Y=s
Yes
Ye6
Y=S
Y=S
Y=S
Y=S
Y=S
Y=s
Y=S
no
no
no
no
no
II0
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
DO
00
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
y=s
YCS
YYes
Yes
Y=S
Y=s
Y=s
Yes
Y=
Yes
Y=
YYes
Y-
xhta opaaions
DcrR
D.STRl
(Data Stem)
D.STR2
Dam3
DaTR5
D.cwT(Dataout)
IbOUT
IbouT
Dam-3
DaJT5
COMPARE
ADD
SUBTRACIMuLrnLY
DIVIDE
DaND(LogicdAND)
D.OR (bgicdOR)
INVERT
BIN(BCDToBin
BCD&BhG~o
SM(FTLEFIDECODE
ENCODE
EXTERNAL
B%=s)
FAULT DLAGNOSIS
n0
n0
no
no
no
no
b0
DO
110
no
no
no
n0
no
no
no
no
IbO
n0
no
no
no
no
no
110
II0
I10
n0
n0
no
no
no
n0
n0
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
nQ
no
no
YfS
Yes
Y=S
Y=S
Y=S
Y-
YY=6
Y=
F
YYe6
yes
Y=S
F'
F
YF
Y=6
yt*
ye6
Y=S
Yyes
Ya
yes
Y=
Y=
YW
Y=S
Y+s
YY=
Y=
Y=
Yes
Y-
YYY=
Y=S
Y=
Y=S
Yes
Y=
YYes
Yes
Y=
'
C-6
Guide
GEK-90842
Table C-4. Examples of Valid System Configurations for I/O Points

I/O
Points
Valid Configmtion
and Ref-
I/O
PCmd
Rack Type
Mod&
Type
-KAACMt%
Series One Junior
10509SJR100
1c6o9sJR102
Basic Unit
000- 016
1ao9sJR110
or7- 027
outputs- -15
9
Inputs
1c?5o9sJR120
Iao9sJR114
Ic609sJR124
Iao9sJR121
Junior
Ic6o9sJR1oO
1ao9sJR102
1ao9sJR110
IC609SJR114
Inputs-
15
1c6O9sJR120
outps
- 9
Suits
50
TPKA.41931
t
1
One
Basic Unit
000 - 016
017 - 027
I
.
Ic609sJR124
Ic6O9sJR121
,
I
!
.
f
030 - 047
I/oExpsionunits
I/O Expansion
Inputs - 16
outputs - 10
1c6o9ExP110
IC609EXP120
Iao9Exl?l21
050 - 061
,
c
7
.
TpKAA0097
Series One Junior

10609sJR100,102
1c6o9sJR110, 114
1ao9sJR120,
Ic6o9sJR121
124
Basic Unit
Inputs-15
000- 016
outplts-9
017- 027
=uo
64
/
11
111
t
I
oneExpar!sicmRack
:
8
!
or
1041a Rack114
1~1ocHs110,
1a1ocHs130,
134
(3)
(1) 80Point
l&Paint
1c61ocHs120,
40 I/D
124
I1
Ii
I
I
!i:
I
I
:i
1
t
1
?iY
F,f
cf
?I!
a7
057
047
037
I
iI
0
130
::: d
rc
Se&s One Family of Programmable Controllers Compatibility Guide

GEK-90342
Table C-4. Examples of Valid System Configurations for I/O Points - ChMinued
PC and
Rack Type
I/O
Points
YO
Modale Type
Vaiid Coniigmtim
and Refmsms
TmUL41932
Series Onei
Junior
1c6o9sJR100,102
1c6o9sJR110, 114
1c6o9sJR120, 124
Ic609SJRl21
96
Basic Unit
Inputs- 15
outputs - 9
Bvo
L
72 IP
One Expansion Rack
m-Slot Rack
1c61ocHs130, 134
1c61ocHs120, 124
a a 0 0 0 0 8 u
OR
(7) 8-Point
(1) l&Paint
or
$ a 8 a 8 0 8 0 a
(9) 8-Point
TPKAAuw8
(4) 8-Point
32
SeIiesOne
SerieSOIXModelE
suits one Plus
Modules
or
series one Plus 3.7K

(1) 5-Slot Rack
64
1c61ocHs110
1061OCHS114
1~1ocHs101
(4) l&Point
MO&k
I6
t6
t6
16
m41933
8
suiesone
64
SuiesOneModelE
suies one Plus
saies ofx Plus 3.7K
(2) s-slot Racks
I061ocHs110
Ic61oc31s~d4
(8) 8-Point
MOdIlk
smiesont
SuiesomM~E
lmcA.41934
(8) 8-Point
saiesoneP!lus
64
!kics
one Phls 3.7K
(1) l&Slot Rack

1061OCHS130
1a1m134
1~1ocHs120
1061oCHs124
0 0
or
(4) 16Paint
8 a a
an QLt05700 037on on m ml
f
IL i
IL
C8
Table C-4. Examples of Valid System Configurations for I/O Points - Continued
It/O
Points
PCmd
Rack Type
72
(9) 8-Point
seriesone
SeriesOneModelE
112
series
one
Plus
series
one
Plus
Valid Cmfigu&on
I/O
ModuAeType
and lb&rums
TPKJuo920
MOdUkS
8
or
(2) &Point
ModU.kS
IC61OCHS134
1c61ocHs120
Ic61ocHs124
(6) l&Point
Mod&S
o$ CKK;y
0:; m$ ,
107
057
047
017
\Y \Y :zoo O Fi
on
067
3.7K
(1) lo-Slot Rack

IC6lOCHS130
\y o$z cs; yf
:::
037
147
16
cm
in
I6
, I27
I6
o:a7
I6
007
cm
107
16
16
*Notuscdwith112
uocoQfigurati00
TKA.40899
72
(9) 8-Point
SeIiesone
SeriesOneMocklE
1
ModlikS
01:
suies one Plus
or
series one Plus 3.7K
112
. 8. 0 0
(2) SISlot Rack

1c61ocHs110
Ic61OCHS114
(2) 8-Point
Mod&Lb
(6) 16Point
Is L
a 0
u$ 7; Iayy OIC
TCI
ho?ct7 dc OT 047
I
; zi
I
4
0 8 I( IG
Modules
TpIcAAW?2
112
series 0ne Plus 3.7K

series one Plus
(1) loISlot Rack
ICfilOCHS130, 134
0 (I 0 0 a 8 a 0 n
T 1
(14) &Point
F $5: yf y-f ys \. $f yc!y

?C0%a? op & m az: 01#7
01,
Modules
.
1
1
(1) S-Slot Rack
1c61ocHs110,
I I
0 0 0 0 0
114
8 0 8 8
837027on 00 ml
suiesont
SuicsOncMocIdE
suksonePlus
series
one
Plus
TPLA.40923
3.7K
112
(3) S-Slot Racks
1a1ocHs110
IamcHsll4
(14) &Point
Modules
6
Series One Family of Progr ammable Controllers Compatibility Guide
c90
GEL90842
Table C-4. Examples of Valid System Configurations for I/O Points - continued
I/O
Points
PCand
Rack Type
YO
Moduie Type
Valid Con@u@im
md Refhsms
TPLA.41935
suiesone
8 0 8 m 0 0 0 a 0
1 1 7 .
1
!g Itrct
I? qf F ;t g cr; 5
IO? . 06 m 04 037cr 017it7
SekheModelE
O'?
112
(2) lo-Slot Racks
IC61OCHS130
Ic6locHS134
1c61ocHS120
IC61OCHSl24
I
J
(14) 8-Point
MOdllkS
qy~il
1
1
TIXJ4.40924
seriesonePlus
Series he Plus 3.7K
(6) l&Paint
Mod&s
~
120
Ic61ocHS130
Ic61ocHS134
(3) 8-Point
MO&lk!S
sexiesonePlus
SeIiesone
152
Plus3.7K
(19) &Point
IC61OCHS130
Ic6loc!H!s134
(1) S-Slot Rack

1a1ocHs110,
MoChlkS
114
(6) 16Paint
Modules
c-10
GEL90842
Table C-4. Examples of Valid System Configurations for I/O Points - CoNinued
I
I/O
PC and
POWS
I/O
Radr Type
ModuAe Type
Valid Cmfigmtion
and Refbums
=lTKA.40926
seriesonePllls
sees one Plus 3.7K
168
(2) lo-slot Racks

1c61ocHs130
Ic6mcHs134
(9) 8-Point
Mties
(6) l&Point
ModUS
1. These examples represent only a sampling of the many configurations of racks and I/O points thti
a~ available. Configuraxions depend on the number of I/O points and type of I/O modules (4,8, or
16 points and the units of load used by the modules) required for a particular application.
2. If modules having only 4 I/O points are used in any slot, the references not used as real world
I/O anz available for use as internal references in the user program.
3. The lo-slot racks (IC6lOCHS130
and IC61OCHS134) have 2 bridge connectors on the backplane

Configuration of the bridge connectors is
which must be configured for proper rack addressing.
explained in chapter 3, Installation. The X in a slot means that there is no valid address for that slot
for that configuration.
D-l
Appendix D
Other Programmable Controllers
Series OneTMJunior Programmable Controller
The Series One Junior programmable controllers are a group of low cost controllers specifically
designed for control applications requiring 4 to 60 relays. The Series One Junior offers a control
package using only 53 square inches of mounting ma, which is about the same as four 4pole relays.
Series One Junior PCs are available in various combinations of voltages.
Each Series One Junior basic
_-
has 24 built-in I/O circuits, including 15 inputs and 9 outputs. User

memory is 700 words of CMOS-RAM, or optional EPROM memory. If more than 24 I/O points are
required, expansion is accomplished by one of two methods, either add a Series One Junior I/O
expansion unit or a 5 or 10 slot expansion rack to the basic unit. A system can have up to 50 YO points
by adding an I/O expansion unit, which has the same form as the basic unit.Up to 96 I/O points can be
included in a system by adding a standard Series One 5 or lo-slot rack to the Series One Junior basic
unit
unit.
Any combination of standard Series One I/O modules can be included in an expansion rack, with the
exception of the High Speed Counter module or the Thumbwheel Interface Unit. The expansion rack
can be located up to 100 feet (30 m) from a Series One Junior.
The Series One Junior has a built-in high speed counter capable of counting pulses up to 2000 counts
per second. The programmin g language is the same (basic ladder diagram functions) as is used to
program the Series One and Series One Plus. Programs can be entered using either the hand-held
programmer, which can be mounted on the basic unit, or the LCD Portable Pqgrammer.
Many
programs developed on the Series One Junior PC can be transferred to a Series One or Series One Plus
PC .
Table D-1. Series One Junior Capabilities

Number of J/O Points (Maximum)
Basic Unit Inputs
Basic Unit Outputs
Elqmsion unit Inputs
Ecpnsion unit outputs
Exp8fsion Rack I/o (h!hed
Internal coils
Non-Retentive
RMCSBtiVt
spccialFmrction
sbifb
stem=
Tiiiirs/c!uuntcIs
High
Speed
Counter,
BuibIn
I/o)
%td
15
9
16
10
72
16OtCW
96
59
5
1=aJrrps
64 (1)
1
64 (loo0 steps)
Other Programmable Controllers
D-2
GEK40842
Series ThreeTMProgrammable Controller

The Series Thme PC is a compact programmable controller capable of handling applicationsin the 16 to
400 Vo range. It offers many of the same outstanding features 8s the Series One family of programmable controllers such as compact size, ChtfOS or PROM memory, hand held programmer, and low
price.
Improved
specifhtions
capabilities include 4K memory, 400 I/O points, and four function math. Following ax
for the Series Thrw PC:
Table D-2. Series Three PC Specifications
Siza for CPU and 128 I/O

(WxHxD)
18.9 x 10.3 x 6.3

(48Omm x 262mm x 159mm)
FbDCtiOllS
Relav including Latches

Timirs (1.0, 0.1 set)
camttrs
MasterControlRelay
shift Registers
Add, Subtract, timpare
Multiply, Divide
Data Moves
Subroutine
ScanRate
20 msec. for 2K
40 msec. for 4K
Intemd
Refeences
400 YO
64 Latches
304 Intemal coils
128 Shift Register Stages
128 Timer/Counters (4 digit)
Built-In with Keylock
Programmer
Available I/O Types

INPUTS
OUTPUTS
I/o POINTS
115/230 V ac (2 A)
Isolated 11x230 v ac (2A)
115 V ac/dc
Is0la&d 115 v 8c
16
24Vdc
24Vdc
24VrJdcSOUlW
23ovac
-w
542vdc
16
32
24 v & (2 amp)
24 V dc (1 Amp)
16
16
2
32
24Vdc
Relay out
A-h
542vdc
16
8
8
16
32
16
2
32
OTHER MODULES
High Speed Counter, I/0 bnk Local and Remote (Twisted Pair and Fiber Optics), Data Communications, 24 V dc In/Out (16/16),y0 Simulator
D3D
Other Pmgrammable Controllers

BGEK-90842
Series Sixm Programmable
Controller
The family of Series Six pqrammable

controllers consists of three models: 60, 600, 6000. The
capacity for memory and Input/Output increases as the model number increases. Each model also has
intexnal register storage in varying sizes. The family concept allows the use of common features
between models. The common features include a common programming language featuring a basic,
extended, and advanced set, the s&ne reference numbers, the same Wo&naster industrial computer for
programming and runnin g many available programs tailored for industrial applications, the same I/O
structure; including modules, racks and cables, most of the same CPU modules, transportable programs
from one model or size to another (upward or downward compatibility) and the same options. Memory
and I/O capability a~ listed in Table D.3.
Table D-3. Series Six CPU Capacities
T
e-
MODEL
60
600
LOGIC WMORY
4K
8K
32K
I/O CAPACITY
INPUTS
OUTPUTS
loo0
loo0
2ooo
1000
1000
1
REGISTER STORAGE
1024
8192
8192
entered using the LogicMaster 6 software package on the Workmaster@IJindustrial

computer. The Worhaster has a 9 CRT display, a full-travel keyboard, integral 3 l/2 diskette drive,
and full off-line/stand along programming. Programming logic is basically a relay ladder diagram
language consisting of relay ladder logic (N.O. and N.C. contacts, counters, timers, one-shots and
latches). Additional features in the Basic group include Arithmetic (add, subtract, and compare), data
moves, binary and BCD conversion, a Master Control Relay function and communication requests. The
extended Mnemonic group includes the following functions:
l Data Moves (Lefi 8, Right 8, Block)
l Signed fithmetic
(Double Precision Add and Subtract, Extended Add and Subtract, Multiply, Divide
and Greater Than)
l Table Moves (Table-To-Destination,
Source-To-Table, Move Table and Move Table Extended)
l List (Add-To-Top, Remove-From-Bottom,
Remove-From-Top and Sort)
l Matrix (AND, OR, Exclusive OR, Invert and Compare)
l Bit Matrix (Bit Set, Bit Clear, Shift Right, Shift Left)
l Control (Do Submutinc, Return, Suspend I/O, Do I/O and Status)
The advanced function adds an additional Table Move instruction, Move Table Ex, which has the
ability to address A8192 regimers in an advanced model 600 or a model 6000.
I/O modules available for the Series Six PCs include the following:
115/230 V ac/dc, Inputs and Outputs
llSJ230 V ac Isolated Inputs and Outputs
12 V ac/dc Inputs
2448Vac,/dcInputs
12,24,48 V dc Sink and Source Outputs
12OVdcOutputs
High Den&y Inputs (32 Inputs)
High Density Outputs (32 Outputs)
Programs
are
D-4
Other Prqpmmable
ControIIers
Reed Relay Outputs

Analog Inputs and Outputs
Thermocouple Inputs
Interrupt Inputs
Axis Positioning, Type 1 and Type 2
High Speed Counter
ASCII BASIC module, 12K or 2OK versions
I/O Receiver and Transmitter for operation up to 2ooo feet (600 meters).
Remote IlO Driver and Receiver for cable operation up to 10,ooO feet (3 Km) or unlimited distance
over a modem link.
--
Optional Items
Optional items for use with a Series Six PC include a Redundant Processor Unit (RPU), Commtications Control Modules, an Operator Interface Unit (ON), color and amber Operator Interface Teminals
(OIT), ProLoopTdpror~ss controllers, and various software packages for use with the Workmaster
information center. The software packages include VuMaster~,
FactoryMasterTM, and ProcessMastery. Additional software packages will be available in the future
The RPU acts as a switch to transfer control from one Series Six CPU or I/O chain to a standby in the
event that a fail ure occurs in the first. This provides a method of mhimizhg
downtime in the event of a
failure in the PC system.
The Type 2 Communications Control Module (CCM) provides 2 independent ports (Rs_232C, RS-422,
or 20 mA) for slave communications with computers or similar intelligent devices. The Type 2 CCM
also has the added function of originating communicadons to other Series Six CPUs,computers, or
other similar intelligent devices from the users ladder diagram program. The Type 3 CCM also
provides 2 ports, and the protocol required for interfacing to selected process control systems.
The OIU is a hand-held micro-terminal that allows an operator to monitor or modify the register
contents and I/O states of a Series Six CPU. The OIU communicates with a CPU through the
Communications Control module (Type 2).
The OIT connects to the Series Six through an ASCII/BASIC module and provides CRT background
screens for the display of status from the CPU. User configuration of the scans allows tailoring the
screens to fit the application.
The ProLoop process controllers are a group of analog controllers that can operate independent of, but
be supervised by a Series Six PC.
Series SixTMPlus Programmable Controller

The Series Six Plus is a cost effective programmable controller that can be easily expanded to cover a
wide variety of applications. The Series Six Plus off& in one ra& more cqdlity than the Series Six
family of programmable controIIers, which incIudes models 60,600 and 6000.
A Combined Mcmoxy module, which includes intemal memory, up to 16K wards af wcz mcmov and
up to 16K of register memory, is available in six different configurations as shown below in Table D.4
Table D-4. Series Six Plus Combined Memory Configu~ns
SK
12K
16K
4K
4K
8K
1YJra
8K
8K
Other Programma ble Controllers

GEK-90842
Table D-4. Series Six Plus Combined Memory Confqprations
Total Memory
userMemory
24K
16K
48K
8OK
32K
64K
- CWhmd
R4gisw
Memory
~~-
8K
16K
16K
The Series Six Plus PC can be configured to have up to 16K Inputs and 16K Outputs. Insaction
sets
for programmin g are available in 3 versions; Advanced, Expanded, and Expanded II. The expanded
function set has all previous Series Six instructions plus several new instructions and enhancements
which include:
Reference range expanded for 16K I/O
Floating Point functions, including:
l
l
l
Add, subtract, multiply, divide, greater than

Integer to floating point
Floating point to integer
Enhanced DO I/O and STATUS instructions

New WINDOW function
The Series Six Plus PC also includes enhanced GENIUS I/O diagnostics and expanded error checking.
The CPU rack, which contains all required CPU modules, has 6 slots available for I/O modules.
The Series Six Plus PC is compatible with all existing Series Six I/O modules, peripherals and software
packages.
Programs are entered with the Workmaster@ industrial computer, as with the Series Six
family of PCS.
1
lO-Slot Rack, 2-3
115 V ac Input Module, IC61OMDL129,6-76
115 V ac Input Module, UL Listed
IC61OMDL135,6-73
115 V ac Input, IC6lOMDL125,6-7
115 V ac Isolated Input, IC6lOMDL126,6-9
115 V ac Output Module, UL Listed
IC61OMDL185,6-75
115/230 v ac Isolated output
IC61OMDL176,6-17
115/230 V ac Output IC610MDL175,6-16
16 Circuit UT) Modules with Connectors, 6-4
2
230 V ac Input, IC61OMDL127,6-8
24 V ac Sink Output (16 Circuits)
IC61OMDL156,6-19
24 V ac Sink Output (8 Circuits)
IC61OMDL151,6-18
24 V ac/dc Source Input (16 Circuits),
IC61OMDL112,6-14
24 V ac/dc Source Input, IC61OMDLl11,6-13
24Vdc2AmpSinkOutput
IC6lOMDL153,6-22
24 V dc 2 Amp Sink/Source Output
IC61OMDL154,6-23
24 V dc Input/Output (4 In/4 Out)
IC61OMDL103,6-31
24 V dc Input/Output (4 In/4 Out)
IC61OMDL104,6-33
24 V dc Sink Input (16 Circuits),
IC61OMDL106,6-11
24 V de Sink Input (8 Circuits),
IC61OMDL101,6-10
24 V dc Sink Load Input (16 Circuits),
1C610MDL107,6-12
24 V dc Sink Output (16 Circuits)
IC6lOMDLl57,6-20
24 V dc Source Output (16 Circuits)
1c610n4DL158,6-26
24 V dc Source Output IC6lOMDL155,6-24
5-Slot Rack, 2-3

5-Slot Rack, UL Listed IC61OCHS111,6-72
A
Accessory Kit, IC61OACCl20,7-6
Adding Memory, 7-5
Adding Racks, 2-2
Advantages and Features, l-2
Advantages Over Other Control Devices, l-l
Alter One Logic Element, 4-l 1
Analog Input IC61OMDL116,6-62
Analog Output IC61OMDL166,667
Appendix A - Related Documentation, A-l
Appendix B - Glossaq of Terms, B-l
Appendix C - Compatibility Guide, C-l
Appendix D - Other Programmable
Controllers, D-l
Applications, 8-l
Application 1 - One-Shots, 8-l
Application 2 - Flip Flop, 8-2
Application 3 - Event/Time Drum, 8-3
Application 4 - Cascaded Counts,
8-5
Application 5 - Coil 374, Power-Up
One-Shot, 8-7
Application 6 - Coil 375, 1OHz Clock, 8-8
Application 7 - Start/Stop Circuit, 8-11
Application 8 - High Speed Counter, 8-12
Application 9 - Typical Shift Registers, 8-21
B
Basic
Basic
Basic
Basic
Bridge
Instructions, 5-19
Ladder Diagram Instruct&s,
5-1
PC Block w
1-S
Troubleshooting, 7-1
Connectors, lo-Slot Rack, 3-5
C
catalog
Numbers,
.5
I20
Index
GEiC-90642
Central Processing Unit, Function of, I-6

Change Contents of a Data Register, 4-14
Clear All Memory, 4-12
Components, Replacement of, 7-3
CPU Option Settings, 3-8
CPU Programmer Cable, 24
CPU Scanning Sequence, 5-15
D
Data Communications,
1-3
Data Communications
Unit, l-8,2-10
Data Operation Block Diagram, 5-43
Data Operation Instructions, 54,543
Data Registers, 5-13
DCU, 2-10
Delete One Logic Element, 4-12
Display a Specific Address, 4-13
E
Earth Ground Wire, 3-10
Enter or Change a Password, 4-14
LOG IN, o-14
LOG OUT, 4-15
Entering Basic Instructions, 5-24
AND SIR, OR SIR, 5-24
Basic Relay Logic, 5-20

Disabling of Outputs, 5-29
Latch4 Relay, 5-26
Master Control Relay, 5-27
Normally Closed Input, 5-22
Push-Down Stack, 5-23
Retentive Coils as Latches, 5-26
Rung with Parallel Contacts, 5-20
Rung with Series Contacts, 5-19
Simple Timtr Rung, 5-20
Euor Code D&nitions,4-7
Euor Codes, 4-7
Ecample of counters, 5-33
&ample of Relay Control, 2-9
Ekample of Timer Logic, S-31
Expandad Cable Irmabrim, 24
F
Fast Response I/O IC61OMDL115,656
Faster Scan Rate, 1-3
Field Wiring to I/O Modules, 6-2
Forcing I/O References, 542
Forcing References, 4-15
Fuse List, 7-7
G
General Specifications, l-3
General Troubleshooting, 7-2
Ground, Earth, 3-10
Grounding, Rack, 3-3
H
Hand-Held Programmer, l-l, l-5
Hardware Requirements, 2-7
Heat Dissipation, 2-2

High Density Module with Removable
Connector, 6-3
High Speed Counter IC61OMDL110,6-39
History of Programmable Controllers, l-1
I
I/O Addressing Switches, 3-6
vo Expansion Cable Connection, 3-4
vo Interface Cable Cross Reference List, 6-5
vo Interface Cable Wiring I&t, 6-4
T/n Module Cap&ility~cmpatibility
q %uide, C-3
I/O Module Catalog Numbus, 6-6
I/O References for 16 CiraGt Modules, 6-4
I/O Simulator IC61OMDL124,6-61
I/O Specifications md Wiring,61
IC61OCHS111, S-slot I&&, UL I&ted, 6-72
IC6lOMDL101,24$ V & Sink Input (8
Circuits), 6-10
IC61OMDL103,24 V dc Iqm/Output
(4 In/4
out), 6-31
Index
IC61OMDL104,24
--
V dc Input/Output (4
In/4/Out), 6-33
IC61OMDL105, Thumbwheel Interface, 6-36
IC61OMDL106, 24 V dc Sink Input (16
Circuits), 6-11
IC61OMDL107, 24 V dc Sink Load Input (16
Circuits), 6- 12
IC6lOMDL110, High Speed Counter, 6-39
IC61OMDL111, 24 V ac/dc Source Input, 6-13
IC6lOMDL112, 24 V ac/dc Source Input, 6-14
IC6lOMDL115, Fash Response I/O, 6-56
IC61OMDL116, Analog Input, 6-62
IC61OMDL124, I/O Simulator, 6-61
IC61OMDL125, 115 V ac Input, 6-7
IC61OMDL126, 115 V ac Isolated Input, 6-9
IC61OMDL127, 230 V ac Input, 6-8
IC61OMDL129, 115 V ac Input Module, 6-76
IC61OMDL135, 115 V ac Input Module, UL
Listed, 6-73
IC61Oh4DL151, 24 V ac Sink Output (8
Circuits), 6-18
IC61OMDL153, 24 V dc 2 Amp Sink
Output, 6-22
IC61Oh4DL154, 24 V dc 2 Amp Sink/Source
Output, 6-23
IC61OMDL155, 24 V dc Source Output, 6-24
IC61OMDL156 24 V ac Sink Output (16
Circuits), 6-19
IC61OMDLl57 24 V dc Sink Output (16
Circuits), 6-20
IC61OMDL158, 24 V dc Source Output (16
Circuits), 6-26
IC6lOMDL16, Analog Output, 6-67
IC61OMDL175, 115/230 V ac output, 6-16
IC61OMDL176, 1151230 V &c Isolated
output, 6-17
IC61OMDL180, Relay Output (8
Circuits), 6-27
IC61OMDL181, Relay atput Module, UL
Listed, 6-74
IC61OMDL182, Relay Output (16

Circuits), 6-29
Ic61OMDL185, 11s v E output Module, UL
Listed, 6-75
Inpumtput circuitry, 1-7
Immt one Lugic Elamm, 4-12
I3m
Installation, 3-2
CPU, 3-7
I/o, 3-9
I/O Field Wiring, 3-10
Power Connections, 3-10
Programmer, 3-11
Racks, 3-2
Installation of Programmer Cable, 3-13
Installation, Specifications, 3-1
Instruction Groups, 5-7
Internal Coils, 5-13
Introduction to Maintenance Procedures, 7-1
Introduction to Programming, 5-l
L
Ladder Diagram Format, 5-17
List of Fuses, 7-7
Location of Extra Memory Socket, 7-5
Logicmaster 1 Application Software, l-l
Logicmaster 1 Family Application
Software, 1-6
Logicmaster 1F Application Software, 1-1
M
Memory
Monitor
Monitor
Monitor
Monitor
Monitor
Size, 3-8
Counter Status, 4-13
CPU Logic, 4-10
Data Register Contents, 4-14
I/O Status, 4-12
Timer Status, 4-13
0
Operating Principles, S-14
scanning, 5-14
Operation Sequences, 4-8
Operation With Pefiphcral Devices, 4-15
Larding a Program, 4-18

Recording a Program, 4-16
Tape Recmkr, 4-15
Vcr@ing a lYmgram,4-16
Opthal Hardwate, 2-8
I-4
Index
(Programming the Data Operation

Instructions cant)
Password Protection, l-3

PC Operation, 4-1
PC Terminology, l-8
Peripheral Devices, 2-9
Peripheral Devices, Operation, 4 15
Planning a PC System, S-l
Portable Programmer, l-l, l-5
Power Flow, 5-17
Power Supply Limitations, 3-13
Printer Interface Unit, 2-l 1,4-18
Printer Requirements, 4-19
80/132 Column Selection Switch, 4-21
External Power Supply Connector, 4-21
Hardware Description, 4-19
Hardware Features, 4-20
Power Supply Select Switch, 4-21
Sequence of Operation, 4-22
Program Checking, 4-7
Programmable Controller Concepts, l-5
Programmer, 4-l
Programmer Cable, 3-l 1
Programmer Features, 4-2
Address Data Display, 4-2
Data Operation Keys, 4-6
Editing Keys, 4-4
Logic Display, 4-2
Logic Keys, 4-3
Mode Switch, 4-2
Peripheral Jack, 4-7
Shifted Functions, 4-5
Status Display, 4-2
Programmer Functions, S-15
Programmer Mount Assembly, 2-4
Programmer Tape Port, 2-4

I?rogramming,l-5
Programming Function Compatibility
Glide, c-s
programming Fundamentals, S-7
programming the Data Operation
Instnlctions, s-45
Addition (+), l3CD 4 Digit (F71), S-53

BCD (Binary to BCD (F86), S-70
BIN @CD to Binary) (PSS), 5-69
CMPR (F70), 5-52
DoAND (DATA AND) (FZ), 5-61

D.OR (DATA OR) (F76), S-63
DoOUT (F60), S-SO
D.OUTl (F61), s-so
D.OUT2 (F62), 5-51
BOUT3 (F63), 5-51
BOUT5 (F65), S-52
D*STR (F50), 5-47
BSTRl
(F51), 5-48
D.STR2 (F52), 5-48
DoSIR
(F53), 5-49
BSTRS (F55), 5-49
Decode (F82), 5-67
Division (I), BCD 4 Digit (F74), 5-59
Encode (F83), 5-68
External Fault Diagnosis (F20), 5-71
INV (F84), 5-68
Multiplication (X), BCD 4 Digit (F73), 5-58
shift Left (FSl), 5-65
Shift Right (FSO), 5-65
Special Function Coils, 546
Subtraction (-), BCD 4 Digit (F72), 5-56
Programming, Introduction to, 5-l
PROM Writer Unit, 2-12,4-29
Front Panel Features, 4-30
Power Supply Select Switch, 4-31
Sequence of Operation, 4-31
Proper Heat Dissipation, 3-2
R
Rack Description, 2-1
Rack Grounding, 3-3
Rack Mounting Dimensions, 3-2
Recommended Field Wiring Procedures, 3-15
Referencing Sequencer C~EUUXS,
S-37
IC61OMDL182,6-29
Relay Output (8 Circuits) IC6lOMDL180,6-27
Relay Output Module, UL Listed
IC6lOMDL181,6-74
Remote I/Q 1-8
Removable Connector, 6-3
Index
Replacement of Components, 7-3

Replacing a CPU, 7-3
Replacing a Rack, 7-3
Replacing I/O Modules, 7-4
Replacing the Battery, 7-4
Requirements, Hardware, 2-7
Routing of I/O Wiring, Typical, 3-11
--
Safety Considerations, 3-15

Search CPU Logic, 4-11
Sequencer Operation, 5-36
Series One Execution Times, 5-3
Series One Model E, 1-3
Series One Plus 3.7K, l-3
Series One Plus Program Protection, 1-6
Series One Programmable Controllers, l-l
Shift Register, 5-38
Operation, 5-40
References, 5-39
Shift Register References, 5-13
Significance of References, 5-7
Spare Parts and Components, 7-6
Special Function Coils, Use of, 5-13
Specificationsfor Installation, 3-1
Summary of I/O References for 8 Circuit
Modules, 5-10
Summary of Programming References, C-4
Summary of References, 5-8
System Estimating, 2-7
(Timer/Counter Setpoint Unit cant)
Specifications, 4-33
Total Scan Time, 5-14
Troubleshooting Aids, 7-l
Types of Memory, l-7
CMOS RAM, l-7
PROM, 1-7
Typical I/O Terminal Configuration, 6-3
Typical Rack, 2-1
Typical Sequencer Logic, 5-37
U
UL Listed Products, l-7,6-71
units of Load, 3-13
Units of Load Supplied by Rack, 3-13
Units of Load Used by Modules, 3-14,3-15
Unlimited use of References, 5-18
Use of the Special Function Coils, 5-13
Using References for Data Operations, 5-44
Data Register References, 5-44
Entering a Constant Value, 5-44
Entering a Group Reference, 5-44
Timer/Counter References, 545
V
Valid System Configurations for I/O
Points, C-6
T
Thumbwheel Interface IC6lOMDLlO5,6-36
Timer and Counter, S-30
Extending Timer/Counter Range, 5-34
Pmgmmming Counters,5-32
ProgrammingTimers, S-30
Timer/CounterReferences,S-30
Timer and CounterReferences,3-13
Tim&Counter SetpointUnit, 4-32
Exmple of using ThumbwheelInputs,4-34
References for, 4-33
Remote Mounting,4-33
l
Workmaster Industrial Computer, 1-1
GE Fanuc Automation
North America, Inc., Charlottemilk,
Virginia

Gek 90842cSeriesOneProgrammableControllersUser'sManual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Gek 90842cSeriesOneProgrammableControllersUser'sManual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Gek 90842cSeriesOneProgrammableControllersUser'sManual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Series One

WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES AS USED IN THIS PUBLICATION

Wopyright 1987GE Fanuc Auto&n

Chapter 1, Introduction, is an introduction

Chapter 2, Physical Equipment Configuration, provides a detailed description of the hardware

required for installation

and their physical

of the input and output (I/O)

Chapter 7, Maintenance, is a guide to basic maintenance

of your system, should it be needed.

Chapter 8, Applications, provides several typical Applications

This chapter should be especially

using the capabilities of the Series One

Appendices A through D contain a summary of Related Documentation,

First Edition - May 1986

PROM Writer Unit

Timer/Counter Setpoint Unit

Extending the Timer and Counter Range

BIN (BCD to Binary) (F85)

I/O SPECIFICATIONS AND WIRING

I/O Interface Cable Cross Reference

Application 8 - High Speed Counter Applications

Series One/Series One Plus Programmable Controllers

Push-Down Stack Storage Locations

AND SIR/OR STR Example Number 2

Wiring for 24 V dc Source Outputs

Sample Cascaded Counter Logic

Series One Family General Specifications

Summary of Progr amming References for Series One

Series One/Series One Plus PC Introduction

History of Programmable Controllers

Advantages Over Other Control Devices

Series One Programmable Controllers

to be very cost effective relay or other sequential

Series One/Series One Plus PC Introduction

Small size - (64 I/O points in a 5-slot rack)

Internal and external indication of low battery

Figure l-l. Series One/Series One Plus Programmable Controllers

One Plus PC Introduction

Series One Model E Programmable

Series One Plus 3.7K

Series One/Series One Plus PC Introduction

Table M. Series One Family General Specifications

Maximum, Total (All Voltages)

0 to 60C (32 to 14OOF)

20.5 - 30 V dc (100% of capacity used)

*Depends upon operating temperature

700 words (CMOS) or

Typical Scan Time per K of Memory)

Overhead time must be added to the

logic solution for total real scIu1,

time overhead is typically 4 to 5 m&c.

Retintive Coils (Latches)

(Series One Pius and

Series one Pius 3.7K)

112 (s&es one)

Series One/Series One Plus PC Introduction

Programmable Controller Concepts